JP2020078708A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enlarging a liquid crystal display device.SOLUTION: The game machine includes a first out hole 71 disposed at width-directional one side of a second specific winning hole 650a, and a second out hole 72 disposed in the other side thereof. Game balls flowing down to the width-directional one side of the second specific winning hole 650a can be discharged by the first out hole 71 and game balls flowing down to the width-directional other side of the second specific winning hole 650a can be discharged by the second out hole 72 respectively from a game area. Consequently, this configuration can dispense with provision of a space to which game balls flow down, at the lower side (between an inner rail 61) of the second specific winning hole 650a so as to lower the position of the second specific winning hole 650a, thereby enlarging a third symbol display device 81 (a liquid crystal display device) by that amount.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and game balls that have not flown into the plurality of winning openings and flow down from the game area. There is a gaming machine provided with an outlet (Patent Document 1).

  In recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device in order to enhance the effect.

JP, 2012-143268, A

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered downward in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, the position of the winning opening also needs to be lowered accordingly. However, if the position of the winning opening falls too downward, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the gaming ball to flow down below the winning opening. That is, the game ball that has not flown into the winning opening and flows down cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning port downward, and as a result, there is a problem that the liquid crystal display device cannot be made sufficiently large.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the size of a liquid crystal display device.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and the plurality of winning openings flowed without winning. An outlet that discharges the game ball from the game area, and a first prize hole of the plurality of prize holes is configured to prevent the game ball from passing between the lower edge of the game area. Is arranged so as to be close to the lower edge of the game area or in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the out opening is on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening. It is provided with a first outlet provided and a second outlet provided on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with an effect member for effecting an award of a game ball to a second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings, and a front side. The game board on which the game area is formed is made of a light-transmissive material, and the effect member is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning port on the back side of the game board, and The winning port and the effect member are arranged on one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the second winning opening is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the out-out opening is a first out-out opening that is arranged on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to a first winning-opening opening of the plurality of winning-down openings, and Since the second outlet is arranged on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning opening, the first winning opening is not placed in the first winning opening and is located on the one side in the width direction than the first winning opening. The game ball that has flowed down can be discharged from the game area by the first outlet, while the game ball that has flowed to the other side in the width direction than the first winning port without being awarded to the first winning port is the second. It can be discharged from the game area by the outlet. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning opening (between the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot pass through between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device. Can be upsized.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, an effect member that produces an effect associated with winning a game ball to a second winning opening of a plurality of winning openings Since the effect member is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the game board made of a light-transmissive material, a game ball is won in the second winning opening. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the effect by the effect member behind the scene at the same time, and it is possible to effectively perform the effect accompanying the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening.

  In this case, the second winning opening and the effect member are arranged on the one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, and thus the positions of the second winning opening and the effect member. Can be lowered, and the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the liquid crystal display device can be upsized even when the effect member is provided.

  That is, arranging the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening interferes with the size increase of the liquid crystal display device because the effect member interferes with the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, by arranging the first out opening and the second out opening on one side in the width direction and on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, Not only can the position of the first winning opening be lowered, but also the degree of freedom of the arrangement position of the first winning opening on the one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction can be secured. It becomes possible to secure a space for disposing the second winning opening and the effect member. As a result, according to claim 2, a layout for disposing the effect member on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second winning opening. Became possible.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, since the second winning port is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction of the gaming area, the liquid crystal display device is increased in size. It is possible to secure a wider space for disposing the effect member by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game area while achieving the above. That is, with such a layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the effect member. In addition, by arranging the second winning port in the approximate center of the game area in the width direction, it is possible to lengthen the flow path of the game ball to the second winning port. As a result, it is possible to enhance the playability for winning the game ball in the second winning opening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the effect produced by the effect member that accompanies the winning in the second winning opening.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of a game board. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled rotary operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled rotary operation unit. (A) is a front view of a case body, (b) is a front view of a fixing member. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the support structure by the case body of a 1st gear, a 2nd gear, and a 3rd gear. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the compound operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled compound operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the compound operation unit in the state which decomposed|disassembled a part of compound operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of an opening/closing first gear, an opening/closing second gear, a rotating first gear and a rotating second gear. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the combined operation unit, which illustrates in time series the process of assembling the opening/closing first gear and the opening/closing second gear and the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear on the first shaft and the second shaft. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the combined operation unit, which illustrates in time series the process of assembling the opening/closing first gear and the opening/closing second gear and the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear on the first shaft and the second shaft. FIG. 6 is an exploded front view of a combined operation unit for explaining a relative displacement state of an opening/closing second gear and a slide rack member with respect to a back arm body. FIG. 7 is a front view of the combined operation unit illustrating the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation member in time series. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound motion unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening/closing 1st gear and the opening/closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotation 1st gear and the rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound motion unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening/closing 1st gear and the opening/closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotation 1st gear and the rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound motion unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening/closing 1st gear and the opening/closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotation 1st gear and the rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st engaging member and a pair of 2nd joint members are arranged at the retracted position. It is a front view of the 1st combined operation unit and the 2nd combined operation unit in the state where the 1st engaging member and a pair of 2nd combining members are arranged at the combined position. 33A is a front view of the first combined movement unit, and FIG. 33B is a bottom view of the first combined operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 1st combined operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st combination operation unit. It is a rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism part, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism part. It is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism part which carried out the front view of the disassembled slide mechanism part. It is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism part which carried out rear view of the disassembled slide mechanism part. (A) is a front view of the 1st combination operation unit in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in a retracted position, and (b) is the 1st combination in the state where a 1st combination member is arranged in a retracted position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st combined operation unit in the state where the 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position, and (b) is the 1st combined state in the state where a 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd combination operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd combined operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a 2nd combined operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd combination operation unit. It is the model figure which looked at the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member and a pair of 2nd joint members were arranged at the joint position. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the annular movement unit in a state where the annular formation member is arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the circular ring operation unit in a state where the circular ring forming member is arranged at the coupling position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the annular motion unit which looked at the disassembled annular motion unit from the front. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the annular motion unit, which is a rear view of the exploded annular motion unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a link member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a link member, (c) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member in the portion Lc of FIG. 50(a). FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member as viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG. It is a partially expanded rear view of a ring operation unit. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the circular ring operation unit which illustrates typically the circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring formation members are arrange|positioned at the retracted position. FIG. 53 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LIII-LIII in FIG. 52. FIG. 7 is a rear schematic view of a circular ring operation unit that schematically illustrates a circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring forming members is arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position. FIG. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LV-LV of FIG. 54. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the circular ring operation unit which illustrates typically the circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring formation members were arrange|positioned at the coupling position. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56. It is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit in a state where an arm member is projected to a projecting position. 9 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position. FIG. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit in a state where the arm member is retracted to the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rocking|swiveling motion unit which looked at the disassembled rocking|swiveling motion unit from the front. 61A is a rear view of the swing motion unit in a state where the arm member is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in the portion LXIb of FIG. 61A. is there. 62A is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and FIG. 62B is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in a portion LXIIb of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in a portion LXIIIb of FIG. 63(a). 64A is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and FIG. 64B is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in the portion LXIVb of FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, a general prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structural bodies arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device provides a round of jackpots. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  The "high probability state" is a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot is finished, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (probably changing), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probable change or during the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is generated by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") which performs variable display, and an LED which variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

  In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, toward the second winning port 640, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side below the first winning opening 64, and has a circular shape having the same size as the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. The second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop pattern and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis ( (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state.

  Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening that is a guide path that guides the sphere to the second specific winning opening 650a and an opening that is opposite to the second specific winning opening 650a side of the guiding path. 651, a driving member 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the driving member 650b to open and close in the left-right direction about the lower side of the opening 651. It has and. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening which is opened and closed separately in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a triggered by the ball winning in the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during a predetermined time, The game state opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, It is not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 and a second outlet 72. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through a first out opening 71 or a second out opening 72. You will be guided to the road. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, while the second outlet 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, the second outlet 72 is arranged on the opposite side of the first outlet 71 with the second specific winning opening 650a interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 2) from the second specific winning opening 650a is the inner rail. 61 or flowed down along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while on the left side in front view of the second specific winning port 650a, the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61 ) Which has reached (), flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second outlet 72.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device, by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225. The other device 228 includes drive motors 340, 430, 522, 640, 740, 830.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the layout (arrangement) of each component of the game board 13 such as the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the outlets 71, 72 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, the respective components such as the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are schematically illustrated, and a part of the game board 13 is partially enlarged and illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the front view of the game area, the inner rail 61 has a portion arranged on the lower right side (a portion on the right side of the first outlet 71) linearly extended and It is formed so as to be inclined upward in the direction away from the 1-out port 71.

  A resin outer edge member 73 that defines the outer edge of the game area together with the rails 61 and 62 is provided between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It The outer edge member 73 is provided with a circular arc wall portion 73a formed by providing a circular arc wall surface extending from the outer rail 62 on the inner surface side, and is continuously provided below the circular arc wall portion 73a in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). A vertical wall portion 73b formed by providing a wall surface extending linearly along the inner surface side, and a vertical wall portion 73b continuously provided below the vertical wall portion 73b and extending linearly while descending and leaning toward the inner rail 61. The inclined wall portion 73c is formed by providing the wall surface provided on the inner surface side.

  In this way, the game area defined by the inner rail 61, the outer rail 62, and the outer edge member 73 has a substantially circular part (the lower right part in FIG. 5) formed in a substantially rectangular shape and expanded outward. Shaped. Specifically, the region defined by the linear portion of the inner rail 61 disposed on the right side of the first outlet 71 and the inclined wall portion 73c and the vertical wall portion 73b of the outer edge member 73 has a substantially rectangular shape. Formed in.

  As a result, as compared with the case where the game area is formed into a substantially circular shape by extending the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, the game area as a whole has a substantially rectangular area (lower right portion in FIG. 5). The area can be expanded. Therefore, the enlarged area is used as a space for arranging the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, and the like. Alternatively, it can be utilized as a space for forming a path for letting the ball flow down, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the respective winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, the flow path of the ball, etc. can be increased. As a result, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered (downward in FIG. 5), and accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 can be increased in size.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, below the third symbol display device 81, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in series along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). Was there. Therefore, the space required below the third symbol display device 81 is increased in the vertical direction, and the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81 is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the enlarged portion of the game area (substantially rectangular area, the lower right portion in FIG. 5) is provided as an installation space such as a winning opening or a flow path for the ball. It can be used as a space. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are not arranged directly under the first winning opening 64, but are arranged in the enlarged portion of the game area described above. Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered to that extent, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  According to the gaming machine 13 of the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but is located on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (variable winning device). The position opposite to 65, the left side in FIG. 5), and the position where the inner rail 61 (the lower edge of the game area) is abutted (that is, the ball cannot pass between the second specific winning port 650a and the inner rail 61). Will be located). Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered to that extent, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In this case, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, by providing two routes (first out port 71 and second out port 72) for discharging the balls from the game area to the ball discharging route, It is possible to further increase the size of the three-symbol display device 81.

  That is, in order to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, so that it is necessary to lower the position of the winning opening accordingly. For example, when the position of the first winning opening 64 is lowered downward, the guide plate member 74 (a member for guiding the ball at the time of right hitting (the ball that has passed the right side of the variable display device unit 80) to the second specific winning opening 650a. In order to secure a space for allowing the ball to flow down between the position) and the first winning port 64, it is necessary to lower the position. As a result, the position of the second specific winning port 650a also needs to be lowered.

  However, if the position of the second specific winning port 650a falls too downward, it becomes impossible to secure a space for letting the ball flow down below the second specific winning port 650a (between the inner rail 61). That is, the ball that has not flown into the winning port and flows down cannot be discharged from the out port arranged below the first winning port 64. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the second specific winning opening 650a, which becomes a factor that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be made sufficiently large.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the first outlet 71, the second outlet 72 sandwiches the second specific winning port 650a, and the first outlet 71. Since it is arranged on the opposite side (that is, the first out opening 71 and the second out opening 72 are respectively arranged on the right side and the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a), the ball flowing down the game area. In addition, the sphere that has reached the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 5) with respect to the second specific winning opening 650a is inclined to the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73. It can be made to flow down along and be discharged to the ball discharge path by the first outlet 71, while the ball reaching the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side in front view from the second specific winning hole 650a is of the inner rail 61. It can be made to flow down along an inclination (curvature) and discharged from the second outlet 72 to the ball discharge path.

  In this way, by providing the paths for discharging the balls from the game area to the ball discharging path at two locations (the first out opening 71 and the second out opening 72), below the second specific winning opening 650a (inner rail It is not necessary to secure a space for allowing the ball to flow down (between 61). Therefore, the position of the second specific winning port 650a can be lowered further (close to or adjacent to the inner rail 61), so that the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered accordingly, and by extension, the position. Since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, the second winning port 640 and the first specific winning port 65a are arranged offset to the right side of the board, and the second winning port 650a is offset to the left side of the board and close to the inner rail 61. By being arranged (or abutting), the effect by the rotary motion unit 300 can be more effectively performed.

  That is, when the player makes a right hit, only the right side of the board on which the ball flows down is noticed by the player, and particularly for a ball that has not been awarded to the second winning opening 640, The flow down is rarely noticed by the player. In this case, in this embodiment, among the spheres that have passed to the right of the variable display device unit 80, the spheres that have passed above the second winning opening 640 from right to left pass above the guide plate member 74, It flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, even if the second winning port 640 is not won, then an opportunity to win the second specific winning port 650a occurs, and from the expectation of winning the second specific winning port 650a, A ball passing from the right side to the left side above the winning opening 640 can be noticed (directed to the player). This allows the player's line of sight to be directed toward the center of the board surface below the variable display device unit 80. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the first winning opening 64, and the rotary operation unit 300 is visible through the game board 13 (through the game board 13). Therefore, when a ball that has not been awarded to the second winning opening 640 flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the player can visually recognize the effect produced by the rotation operation unit 300, and the rotation operation is performed. The staging effect of the unit 300 can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the game board 13, the base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and the rotary operation unit 300 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 is made visible to the player from the front side. Is possible. Here, the rotary operation unit 300 is a device that is operated by the winning of the first winning opening 64 or by the result of the lottery due to the winning, and on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), It is arranged at a position corresponding to the one winning opening 64.

  Therefore, with respect to the player who visually follows the ball flowing down toward the first winning opening 64, especially when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the rotation operation is performed behind the first winning opening 64. Since the effect produced by the unit 300 can be visually recognized, the effect associated with the winning of the ball at the first winning opening 64 can be effectively performed. The detailed configuration of the rotary operation unit 300 will be described later.

  In this case, since the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in the left-right direction (the width direction of the game area, the right direction in FIG. 5) with respect to the first winning port 64, they are arranged accordingly. The positions of the first winning opening 64 and the rotation operation unit 300 can be lowered downward (downward in FIG. 5), and as a result, the rotation operation unit 300 is located at a position corresponding to the first winning opening 64 at the game board 13 Even when it is arranged on the back side of the (base plate 60), it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, when the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged vertically in series like a conventional pachinko machine, a position corresponding to the first winning port 64. In arranging the rotary operation unit 300 on the rear surface side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the rotary operation unit 300 interferes with the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning a prize device 65. The space required for arranging the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 is increased in the vertical direction, which hinders the third symbol display device 81 from becoming large.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in the left-right direction with respect to the first winning port 64. Since they are arranged to be offset in the (width direction of the game area), it is possible to avoid interference between the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650 and the rotary operation unit 300, and As a result, the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered, and the third symbol display device 81 can be enlarged.

  In particular, with regard to the first variable winning device 65, by offsetting to the right by utilizing a substantially rectangular area on the lower right side of the game area, a sufficient amount of the offset can be secured, and the second variable With respect to the winning device 650, the second outlet 72 is provided in addition to the first outlet 71, so that the position thereof can be lowered without considering the space below for the ball to flow down. it can. As a result, a wider space for arranging the rotary operation unit 300 can be secured, so that the contradictory problems of increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be solved. As a result, it is possible to enhance both the effect produced by the third symbol display device 81 and the effect produced by the rotary motion unit 300.

  Here, the rotation operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape that is rotatable around the first winning opening 64. As a result, the entire periphery surrounding the first winning opening 64 can be used as an area for effect. That is, the player can visually recognize the effect produced by the rotation operation unit 300 on the back side of the first winning opening 64. Therefore, when the effect is started with the winning of the first winning opening 64 as a trigger, the effect is performed in an area centered on the first winning opening 64 in which the ball has entered, so that the first winning opening 64 It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect associated with winning the prize.

  In addition, when the player starts winning the ball into the first winning opening 64 when the state of the rotary operation unit 300 (for example, the rotating position or the lighting state) becomes a predetermined state, The game ball can be thrown toward the center of the object (rotational movement unit 300 in a predetermined state) visually recognized by the player, and the effect of the effect produced by the rotation operation unit 300 can be enhanced. ..

  Further, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape in this manner, the space around the rotary operation unit 300 can be effectively utilized, and the space for disposing the other winning openings and the like can be efficiently used. Can be secured. In particular, the installation space for the second variable winning device 650 can be efficiently secured. That is, the first variable winning device 65 can be offset to the right with respect to the first winning opening 64 by utilizing the substantially rectangular enlarged area on the lower right side of the game area. While it is relatively easy to secure, in the second variable winning device 650, it is difficult to secure a sufficient amount of offset to the left with respect to the first winning port 64 because the inner rail 61 is curved in an arc shape. Become. In this case, since the rotary operation unit 300 has a substantially circular shape, a space for disposing the second variable winning device 650 is efficiently provided between the rotary operation unit 300 and the inner rail 61 on the lower left side of the rotary operation unit 300. Can be secured.

  Further, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape with the first winning opening 64 as the center, the rotary operation unit 300 can be arranged substantially in the center of the game area in the width direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 5). it can. That is, the center of the rotary motion unit 300 can be arranged on the virtual line where the distance between the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and the inner rail 61 (the vertical distance in FIG. 5) is maximum. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the limited space of the game area while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, so that a wider space for arranging the rotary motion unit 300 is secured, and the rotary motion is performed. It is possible to efficiently increase the size of the unit 300.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning opening 640 is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (on the side of the first variable winning device 65). , The right side of FIG. 5). In this case, the second winning opening 640 is arranged such that the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a space for flowing down the ball for winning the second winning opening 640 above the second winning opening 640, and by that much, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81. Can be lowered downwards. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but is located on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (first variable winning). It is arranged offset to the side opposite to the device 65, left side in FIG. In this case, the second specific winning port 650a is arranged such that the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). Thereby, it is not necessary to provide a space for flowing down the ball for winning the second specific winning opening 650a above the second specific winning opening 650a, and accordingly, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81. The position of can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, when the opening 641 of the second winning opening 640 and the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged in a position facing above the game area (upper side in FIG. 5), there is a space for letting the ball flow down. It is necessary to secure it right above the openings 641 and 651, and accordingly, it is necessary to raise the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 upward, which hinders the enlargement of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area as in the present embodiment, a space for letting the ball flow down is obliquely above the openings 641 and 651 (the upper right side in FIG. 5). The position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered downward accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the electric accessory objects 640a and 650b are provided not on the second winning port 640 and the second specific winning port 650a but on the second side. The winning holes 640 and the second specific winning holes 650a can be arranged laterally. That is, it is not necessary to secure a space for disposing the electric auditors' products 640a and 650b right above the second winning port 640 and the second specific winning port 650a, and the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered accordingly. Can be lowered to As a result, it is possible to further increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, since the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is not necessary to provide a pair of electric accessory parts 640a and 650b for opening and closing the openings 641 and 651, and only one side is provided. be able to. As a result, the capacity required for the drive means (for example, the solenoid) for driving the electric accessory 640a, 650b can be reduced, and the cost of parts can be reduced. At the same time, energy consumption can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level of winning the second winning opening 640 from being excessively lowered. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, so that the space for arranging the winning openings and the like is limited, and the arrangement position of the second winning opening 640 and the through gate 67 is limited. The space becomes narrow. Therefore, as compared with a conventional pachinko machine in which the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, the difficulty of putting the ball into the second winning opening 640 is higher. There is a risk that it will deteriorate and impair playability. Therefore, by forming the opening 641 so as to face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning from right above the second winning port 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. It is possible to make the second winning opening 640 only possible to win. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second winning port 640 from decreasing and improve the game playability.

  Moreover, even if the distance (the horizontal direction in FIG. 5) from the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a to the second specific winning opening 650a is lengthened by the opening 651 facing the other side in the width direction of the game area, It does not affect the distance between the third symbol display device 81 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, a sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of a ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is provided between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. You can As a result, it is possible to increase the speed of detection that the ball has won the second specific winning opening 650a, and thus the player's uplifting feeling associated with winning can be increased.

  In addition to this, it is possible to prevent over-winning into the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in the opened second specific winning opening 650a, the tenth It is desirable that the driving accessory 650b be closed immediately when the ball wins. However, when the sensor device 652 is disposed behind the base plate 60, the distance from the opening 651 to the sensor device 652 increases.

  Therefore, the period from when the tenth sphere passes through the opening 651 to when it reaches the sensor device 652, that is, the period in which the driving accessory 650b is in the open state becomes longer, and the eleventh and subsequent spheres move from the opening 651. A state in which a prize can be won in the second specific winning port 650a is formed for a long period of time, and there is a possibility that fairness of the game may be lost.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is provided between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Since it is arranged in the above, it is possible to shorten the period until the sphere that has passed through the opening 651 is detected by the sensor device 652. This makes it difficult for the 11th and subsequent balls to enter the opening 651 and prevent overwinning.

  Here, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged offset in the left-right direction (one side with the other side) of the gaming board 13, respectively. By doing so, the player can be divided into left and right parts, which contributes to improvement in playability.

  That is, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, it is easier to win the first specific winning opening 65a to the right of the variable display device unit 80, while the second specific winning opening 650a is variably displayed. It is arranged that the player who passes the left side of the unit 80 can easily win the prize. Which of the specific winning openings is to be opened is determined by the jackpot stop pattern at that time, and the player will be divided into left and right in order to aim at the opening of the specific winning opening.

  Which specific winning opening is opened can be set in units of the number (round) for each jackpot stop symbol, so only the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened each time. On the other hand, in some cases, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened alternately for each number of times (rounds).

  Therefore, it is necessary for the player to confirm which specific winning opening is to be opened in units of the number of rounds, and to hit the specific winning opening to be opened separately to the left and right. This has the effect of not only focusing on the other side, but also on the other side. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player pays attention only to one side or the other side of the game board 13, and to create a situation in which the rotary motion unit 300 arranged behind the first winning opening 64 comes into view. Thus, the rotary operation unit 300 can be paid attention, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by making a decision to make a right-and-left hit for each number of jackpots (rounds), and by making the player make a left-and-right hit in the same posture. A feeling of fatigue caused by playing a game can be alleviated.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 13. First, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, a housing structure of the respective units 300 to 800 in the rear case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 7 to 9 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the swing motion unit 800, the ring motion unit 700, and the first combined motion unit 500 are mounted on the rear case 210, and in FIG. 9, in addition to the mounted state illustrated in FIG. Further, a state in which the second combined operation unit 600 and the combined operation unit 400 are mounted on the rear case 210 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, in the operation unit 200, one surface side (front side in FIG. 7) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The rear case 210 is formed in a box shape. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211 a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  The operation unit 200 includes a rotary operation unit 300, a combined operation unit 400, a first combined operation unit 500, a second combined operation unit 600, an annular operation unit 700, and a swinging operation unit 800 in the inner space of the rear case 210. It is housed and is constructed as one unit.

  Specifically, the first coupling operation unit 500 is at a position above the opening 211a, the ring operation unit 700 is at a position below the opening 211a, and the swing operation unit 800 is at a position on the left and right of the opening 211a. , Are respectively disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 8).

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 8, the second combined operation unit 600 is disposed on the front side of the annular operation unit 700, and the combined operation unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the swing operation unit 800 in a stacked state in which they are stacked. Then, it is housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 9). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 9, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged in a stacked state in which the rotary operation unit 300 is superposed on the front surface side of the second combined operation unit 600, and is housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 6).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second combined operation unit 600) and another operation unit (for example, the rotary operation unit 300) are arranged in a stacked state in which they are superposed on the front side. Therefore, in a front view, at least a part of the predetermined operation unit (for example, the front case body 612 of the second combined operation unit 600, see FIG. 42) can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 is made of a light-transmissive material and the operating unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, only a necessary portion of the predetermined operating unit is displayed. Can be visually recognized by the player, and other portions can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13, an outline of an operation mode of each of the units 300 to 800 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 10 to 13, FIGS. 6 to 9 are referred to as appropriate.

  10 to 13 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that, in FIG. 10, a state in which the ring forming member 790 of the ring operation unit 700 is arranged in the coupling position, and in FIG. 11 a state in which the arm member 820 of the swing motion unit 800 is arranged in the projecting position is shown. 12, the state in which the first engagement member 539 of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined member 630 of the second combined operation unit 600 are arranged at the combined position is shown in FIG. The state in which the 492 is arranged in the projecting position is shown in each figure.

  The ring operation unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790, and moves (displaces) the pair of ring forming members 790 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the coupling position shown in FIG. 10. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are distributed to the left and right, are retracted to the back side of the rotary operation unit 300, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 10, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81) and are coupled to each other (pair). The circular ring shape is formed by the circular ring forming member 790).

  The swing operation unit 800 includes a pair of arm members 820 that are swingably (rotatably) formed, and the pair of arm members 820 are disposed between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the extended position shown in FIG. Move (displace) with. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of arm members 820 are retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 11, the pair of arm members 820 project their tips into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81).

  The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 include a first engagement member 539 and a pair of second coupling members 630, respectively, and the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are illustrated. It moves (displaces) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 9 and the coupling position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the first engagement member 539 is retracted to the back side of the combined motion unit 400, and the second coupling member 630 is retracted to the back side of the combined motion unit 400, which are visually recognized by the player. Disabled (see Figure 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 12, the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81), Combined with each other.

  The combined operation unit 400 includes four members (operation members 491 and 492) that are swingably (rotatably) formed, and these four members (operation members 491 and 492) are moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. And the projecting position shown in FIG. 13 is operated (displaced). In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the four members (operating members 491 and 492) are retracted to the side of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the third symbol display device 81), and two pairs are respectively set. They are arranged in a straight line along the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 13, the four members (operating members 491 and 492) have their tips projecting into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81). , Are arranged so as to extend in a radial straight line from the center of the opening 211a.

  The rotary operation unit 300 includes a rotary member 330 that is rotatably formed, and rotates the rotary member 330. As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the rotary member 330 of the rotary operation unit 300 is rotated at a fixed position, and the operation members 491 and 492 of the combined operation unit 400 are at the extended position or the retracted position. Since it is arranged at the forefront in any position, it is always visible to the player via the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

  Each of these operation units 300 to 800 is formed so as to be independently operable, and as described above, the operation units 300 to 800 are arranged in a stacked (stacked) state. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, not only each of the operation units 300 to 800 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The rotary operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the rotary motion unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rotary motion unit 300.

  As described above, the rotation operation unit 300 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) at a position (a position overlapping in a front view) corresponding to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5). A reception member 361 is provided in the center of the front face, and a ball won in the first winning opening 64 is received from the reception port 361 and guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the guide path 380. To do.

  On the front side of the rotary operation unit 300, a rotary member 330 having an annular shape in a front view and a decorative member 370 that is a resin member for decoration are arranged, and a receiving port 361 is provided at a substantially central portion of the rotary member 330. (Fixing member 360) is arranged. The rotating member 330 is rotatably formed of a light-transmissive resin material, transmits the lighting and blinking of the LED arranged on the back side thereof to the front side, and rotates itself, so that the first prize is obtained. A predetermined effect is performed around the mouth 64 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 5).

  16 and 17 are exploded front perspective views of the rotational operation unit 300 in which the exploded rotational operation unit 300 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 16 illustrates a state in which only the rotating member 330 is disassembled. Further, in FIG. 17, the illustration of the decoration member 370 is omitted, and a part of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the rotary operation unit 300 includes a case body 310 that forms a skeleton on the rearmost side thereof, an electric decoration base 320 fixed to the case body 310, and a front surface of the electric decoration base 320. And a plurality of gears (first gear 351, second gear 352, and third gear 353) for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 340 to the rotation member 330, A fixing member 360 for fixing the first gear 351 of the plurality of gears to the case body 310, and a decoration member 370 arranged around the case body 310 are mainly provided and configured.

  The case body 310 includes an electric decoration base mounting portion 311 formed in a substantially annular shape in front view corresponding to the electric decoration base portion 320, and a gear mounting portion formed by retracting rearward from the electric decoration base mounting portion 311. 312, and the illumination base mounting portion 311 and the mounting base 313 that extends outward from the outer edge of the gear mounting portion 312 are mainly provided, and these are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The decoration base 320 is fixed on the front side and the decoration member 370 is fixed on the outer circumference of the decoration base attachment portion 311 by fastening screws. The gear mounting portion 312 is formed by concatenating three recesses each having a substantially circular shape in a front view, which are recessed corresponding to the outer shapes of the first gear 351 to the third gear 353, respectively, and the first gear 351 is formed in each of these recesses. The third gears 353 are housed (disposed).

  An opening 311a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the decorative base mounting portion 311 above the portion of the gear mounting portion 312 in which the first gear 351 is stored. Since the opening 311a is formed in the case body 310, the rotating member 330 (fastened portion 333) is attached to the first gear 351 (fastening seat portion 351d) from the back surface side of the case body 310 by the fastening screw through the opening 311a. Can be fastened and fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being exposed on the front side of the rotating member 330 and improve the appearance thereof.

  In the gear mounting portion 312, a passage opening 314, a fastened portion 315, an insertion portion 316, and a guide convex portion 317 are formed in a concave portion in which the first gear 351 is stored. The passage port 314 is a passage that communicates with the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360, and guides the sphere that has flowed in from the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360 to the guide passage 380 formed on the back side of the case body 310.

  Note that the guide passage 380 is formed as a passage through which a ball can pass between the attached member and the back surface of the case body 310 by mounting a member having a U-shaped cross section on the back surface of the case body 310. (See FIG. 15). The guide passage 380 communicates with the passage opening 314 on the back surface of the case body 310 and extends downward.

  The mounting pedestal 313 is provided with an insertion hole, and the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600, so that the rotary operation unit 300 is second coupled. It is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210 via the operation unit 600 (see FIGS. 9 and 42).

  The fastened portion 315 is a portion (a concave portion having a female screw engraved on the inner circumference) to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear mounting portion 312 is fastened, and the left and right sides with the passage port 314 interposed therebetween. A pair is formed at an asymmetric position (see FIG. 18). The insertion portion 315 inserts a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the gear attachment portion 312 (case body 310) to the front case body 612 (see FIGS. 9 and 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 on the rear side. It is a through hole and is formed above the passage port 314.

  The guide protrusion 317 is a rail-shaped portion for guiding the rotation of the first gear 351 and is provided as a protrusion having an annular shape in front view so as to protrude from the front surface of the gear mounting portion 312. A guide recess 351e, which is annular in a front view and corresponds to the guide portion 317, is provided on the back surface of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 19), and the guide protrusion 317 is fitted into the guide recess 351e. The rotational position of the first gear 351 with respect to the gear mounting portion 312 is defined.

  Here, the gear mounting portion 312 is arranged at a position (eccentric position) where the passage opening 314 is displaced downward from the center in a circular area in front view formed by being surrounded by the guide convex portion 317. The fastened portions 315 are arranged on the left and right sides of the passage opening 314, and the insertion portion 316 is arranged above the passage opening 314. Accordingly, as will be described later, the rigidity of the case body 310 and the fixing member 360 can be secured while efficiently securing a space for fastening and fixing in a limited space.

  In the gear mounting portion 312, a shaft portion 318 is projectingly provided in a concave portion in which the second gear 352 is housed. The shaft portion 318 is a shaft body for pivotally supporting the second gear 352, and is inserted into a shaft hole 352 a formed at the center of the second gear 352. In the present embodiment, it is possible to omit providing the second gear 352 with a retaining member at the tip of the shaft portion 318 inserted into the shaft hole 352a of the second gear 352. Details will be described later.

  On the back surface of the gear mounting portion 312, the drive motor 340 is disposed at a position corresponding to the recess that houses the third gear 353. The drive motor 340 is arranged with its drive shaft 340a projecting to the front of the gear mounting portion 312 (within the recess in which the third gear 353 is housed), and the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a. It

  The illumination base 320 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and has a board portion 321 on which a plurality of LEDs 321a are mounted on the front side, and a front surface of the board portion 321 and a plurality of front surfaces of the board portion 321. And a partition section 322 for partitioning into a region.

  Specifically, the partition portion 322 is provided with a predetermined interval between the inner edge rib 322a and the outer edge rib 322b which are provided along the inner edge and the outer edge of the substrate portion 321 and which are annular in a front view, and the ribs 322a and 322b. An annular intermediate rib 322c formed concentrically in a front view and a plurality of radial ribs 322d extending radially outward from the center of each of the ribs 322a to 322c intersect in a lattice pattern. Is arranged. The plurality of radiating ribs 322d are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (at intervals of about 30 degrees in this embodiment).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the illumination base 320, 12 areas on the inner peripheral side and 12 areas on the outer peripheral side, that is, a total of 24 areas are partitioned by the partitioning section 322, and each of the partitioned areas is respectively One or two LEDs 321a are arranged. Accordingly, when each LED 321a is individually turned on or blinked, the difference in brightness between the region related to the lighting or blinking and the region not related to the lighting or blinking can be increased, and as a result, the staging effect is enhanced. be able to.

  The rotating member 330 includes a rotating main body 331 having an opening in the center thereof and having an annular shape in a front view, and a cylindrical outer wall portion 332 axially extending from an outer edge of the rotating main body 331. Formed integrally with a flexible resin material. The inner diameter of the opening formed in the center of the rotating body 331 corresponds to the outer diameter of the fixing member 360, and in the assembled state, the fixing member 360 is housed in the opening of the rotating body 331 (see FIG. 14 ).

  Fastened portions 333 are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) on the back surface of the rotating body 331. The fastened portion 333 is a portion (a concave portion having an internal thread engraved on the inner circumference) to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the rotating body 331 (rotating member 330) to the first gear 351 is fastened. They are arranged at the same distance from the center of 331 and at positions which are unequal in the circumferential direction.

  On the front surface of the rotary body 331, a plurality of annular projections 331a to 331e that are formed in an annular shape in a front view and are arranged concentrically, and radiate outward from the center of the annular projections 331a to 331e. A plurality of radiating protrusions 331f extending in a straight line are projected. The plurality of radiating protrusions 331f are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (at intervals of about 30 degrees in this embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, the circumferential spacing of the radiating protrusions 331f is matched with the circumferential spacing of the radiating ribs 322d of the decorative base 320.

  The rotating body 331 is formed to have a uniform thickness (thickness dimension) as a whole, and in the portion where the annular projections 331a to 331e or the radial projection 331f are provided in a protruding manner, the thickness corresponding to that protrusion ( The thickness dimension) is made thicker (larger). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for light to pass through at the portions where the protrusions 331a to 331f are provided.

  In this case, in the assembled state of the rotary operation unit 300, the outer edge rib 322b of the partitioning member 322 is located at a position corresponding to the annular protrusion 331e located on the outermost radial direction (a position overlapping in a front view), and the annular protrusion 331d. The intermediate ribs 322c of the partition member 322 are respectively arranged at positions next to the outer side in the radial direction next to each other and at positions corresponding to the annular protrusions 331d and 331c (positions that overlap in a front view). ..

  As described above, since the rotating member 330 has the regions corresponding to the regions partitioned by the partitioning member 322 of the illumination base 320 partitioned by the protrusions 331 a to 331 f, the LEDs 321 a of the illumination base 320. When each is individually turned on or blinked, it is possible to increase the difference in brightness between the region related to the lighting or blinking and the region not related to the lighting or blinking, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  As described above, in the rotating member 330, the division of the region is achieved by projecting the annular protrusions 331a to 331e and the radiation protrusion 331f from the front side and increasing the thickness dimension. Accordingly, for example, it is not necessary to perform printing for partitioning an area on the front surface of the rotating member 330 or to arrange another member, and the entire rotating member 330 can be formed in a single color, so that the product cost can be reduced. In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to enhance the staging effect.

  In the rotating member 330, the inner diameter dimension of the outer wall portion 332 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the partition member 322 (outer edge rib 322b) of the decorative base 320, and in the assembled state, the inner wall dimension of the outer wall portion 332 is reduced. The partition member 322 of the illumination base 320 is fitted in the peripheral side. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light of the LED 321a from leaking from the outer peripheral side of the partition member 322, and to efficiently irradiate the light to the front side. Further, when the rotating member 330 is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351, the partition member 322 is internally fitted to the outer wall portion 332 so that the inner member and the partition member 322 can be aligned with each other. Can be rotated relative to each other. That is, each of the fastened portions 333 of the rotating member 330 can be aligned with the fastening seat portion 351d (insertion hole) of the first gear 351 only by rotating the two relatively, and the position in the radial direction is adjusted. Since there is no need to do so, workability can be improved accordingly.

  The first gear 351 has a first main body 351a that has an opening in the center and allows the fixing member 360 to be inserted into the opening, and a tooth formed on the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a. 351b, a first flange portion 351c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a in a flange shape at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the teeth 351b, and a third flange portion thereof. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening seats 351d protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than 351c, and the first main body 351a. And a guide recess 351e (see FIG. 19) which is provided on the back side of the gear mounting portion 312 and through which the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted, and by fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear mounting portion 312, It is rotatably held between the fixing member 360 and the gear mounting portion 312.

  The first gear 351 is formed by the first flange portion 351c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first body 351a, and thus the rigidity of the first gear 351 can be increased by the first flange portion 351c. In particular, in the present embodiment, the first flange portion 351c is connected to the axial end surfaces of the teeth 351b, so that the rigidity of the teeth 351b can be increased. As a result, the meshing state with the second gear 352 can be made proper, the transmission efficiency can be improved, and the durability of the teeth 351b, 352b can be improved. Further, since the first flange portion 351c also serves as a retainer for the second gear 352, as will be described later, it is possible to reduce the component cost by omitting the retainer component.

  The fastening seat portion 351d is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 333 of the rotary body 331 (rotary member 330), and is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastened portion 333 of the rotary body 331, respectively. That is, each fastening seat portion 351d is formed with an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastened portion 333, and the insertion holes are at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It is a position, and it is arrange|positioned in the position which becomes an unequal interval in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 can be fastened and fixed only at one phase position. Therefore, when the rotating member 330 is assembled to the first gear 351, the operator makes a mistake in the circumferential position. Can be avoided by assembling.

  In order to enable the fastening and fixing of the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 only at one phase position, the insertion holes of the respective fastening seat portions 351 are not necessarily provided at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It need not be provided. The insertion holes of each fastening seat portion 351 may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at different positions from the center of the rotary body 331.

  However, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable to dispose the insertion holes of the respective fastening seat portions 351 at positions having the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. That is, since the fastening seat portions 351d can have the same length dimension (overhanging length), when the first gear 351 is injection-molded from a resin material, its moldability can be improved. is there.

Here, in order to fasten and fasten the fastening screw from the back side of the case body 310 to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 through the insertion hole of the fastening seat portion 351d, it is necessary to form the opening 311a in the case body 310. There is. In this case, when the insertion holes of the fastening members 351 are arranged at different distances from the center of the first gear 351, the movement loci of the insertion holes are different, and the opening width of the opening 311a is increased accordingly. However, according to the present embodiment, the movement loci of the respective insertion holes can be made the same, so that the opening width of the opening 311a can be suppressed to the minimum.

The second gear 352 includes a second main body 352a having a circular shape in a front view, teeth 352b formed on the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 352a, and a shaft hole 352c formed at the center of the second main body 352a. When the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c, the gear mounting portion 312 is rotatably held in the state of being meshed with the first gear 351.

  The third gear 353 includes a third main body 353a having a circular shape when viewed from the front, teeth 353b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and the front side of the third gear 353 (rotating member 330 relative to the teeth 353b). Side) and a third flange portion 353c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a in a flange shape, and the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 370 is fixed to the third main body 353a. It is held by the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340 in a state of being meshed with the second gear 352.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 340 is rotationally driven and the third gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 is rotated, and the rotation of the second gear 352 is changed to the first rotation. It is transmitted to the first gear 351 and the first gear 351 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 340 is transmitted to the rotary member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351 via the fastening seat portion 351d and the fastened portion 333, and the rotary member 330 is rotated.

  As in the case of the first gear 351, the third gear 353 is formed by the third flange portion 353c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a. The rigidity of can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, the third flange portion 353c is connected to the axial end surface of the tooth 353b, so that the rigidity of the tooth 353b can be increased. As a result, the meshing state with the second gear 352 can be made proper, the transmission efficiency can be improved, and the durability of the teeth 353b, 352b can be improved. Further, since the third flange portion 353c also serves as a retainer for the second gear 352, as will be described later, it is possible to reduce the component cost by omitting the retainer component.

  The fixing member 360 is a cylindrical member for fixing the first gear 351 to the gear mounting portion 312, and includes a receiving port 361 and an insertion portion 362. The receiving opening 361 is a passage that communicates with the first winning opening 64 in a state of being attached to the game board 13, and guides the sphere that has flowed in from the first winning opening 64 to the passage opening 314 of the gear mounting portion 312. The insertion portion 362 is a through hole for inserting a fastening screw that fastens or inserts the fixing member 360 into the fastened portion 315 or the insertion portion 316 of the gear mounting portion 312.

  18A is a front view of the case body 310, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the fixing member 360. Note that FIG. 18A illustrates a state in which the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353 are arranged in the case body 310, and also shows one of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353. The part is partially sectioned.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the passage opening 314 formed in the gear mounting portion 312 of the case body 310 is downward from the center of the first gear 351 as described above (see FIG. a) Displaced (eccentric) on the lower side. Therefore, in the gear mounting portion 312, in the annular region formed around the passage opening 314, the width dimension above the passage opening 314 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18A) is smaller than the width dimension below the passage opening 314. Widened.

  Similarly, with respect to the fixing member 360 that is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the first gear 351 and is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312, the receiving port 361 formed in the fixing member 360 is located below the center of the fixing member 360 ( The position is shifted (eccentric) in the lower side of FIG. 18B. Therefore, in the fixing member 360, in the annular region formed around the receiving opening 361, the width dimension above the receiving opening 361 (vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) is wider than the lower width dimension. To be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the passage opening 314 and the reception opening 361 are displaced (eccentric), and a wide (enlarged width) portion is formed in a part of the periphery (annular region) thereof. Since the insertion portions 316 and 362 are arranged (drilled) in the widened portions, respectively, the limited space can be effectively utilized to form a large-diameter hole, and even in such a case, the case body 310 can be formed. Also, the rigidity of the fixing member 360 can be ensured.

  That is, the insertion portions 316 and 362 are formed as holes through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the rotary operation unit 300 to the front case body 612 (see FIG. 9 or 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 can be inserted. Since it is a part, and a large-diameter fastening screw is inserted because it supports a large amount of weight, it needs to be formed as a relatively large-diameter hole. By forming the (enlarged) portion, it is possible to efficiently secure a space for forming a large-diameter hole by utilizing such a portion. On the other hand, even when such a large-diameter hole is formed, the rigidity can be secured because the hole is formed in a partially widened region.

  FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the support structure of the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353 by the case body 310, and corresponds to the arrow XIX direction view of FIG. 18. In addition, in FIG. 19, the case body 310 is viewed in cross section, and a part of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 is partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first gear 351 is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 by fitting the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the guide recess 351e provided on the back side. It Further, the first gear 351 is restricted by the fixing member 360 that is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312 from dropping from the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19 ). On the other hand, the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340. Note that, as a method of fixing, for example, a method of press-fitting or a method of using an adhesive is exemplified.

  In the second gear 352, the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c formed in the second main body 352a, so that the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 have teeth 352b of the first gear 351 and the teeth 351b of the third gear 353. , 353b in mesh with each other, are rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312.

  In this case, as described above, the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 have the first flange portion 351c and the third flange 351c that project radially outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the first body 351a and the third body 353a. Each of the portions 353c is formed, and the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c are extended to a position overlapping the axial end surface of the second gear 352. As a result, the second gear 352 can be restricted from coming out of the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19). As a result, it is not necessary to dispose a retaining component at the tip of the shaft portion 318, so the number of components can be reduced and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. In addition, at the time of assembly, for the second gear 352, it is sufficient to insert the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, and the step of mounting the retaining component can be omitted. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the third flange portion 353c of the third gear 353 come into contact with the second gear 352 at two different locations, the second gear 352 moves in the axial direction. Not only is it possible to reliably prevent the second gear 352 from slipping out, but it is possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while being inclined with respect to the shaft portion 318. As a result, the meshing state between the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 and the teeth 351b, 353b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 can be made appropriate, and transmission efficiency and durability can be improved. In particular, the two positions that are in contact with the second gear 352 are set at positions where the phases are different by about 180 degrees, so that the above-described effects can be more remarkably exhibited. The phases at the two locations are preferably set within the range of about 160 degrees to about 180 degrees.

  Here, it suffices for the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 to be protruded toward the mountain peak side from the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353b. This is because if the teeth 351b and the teeth 353 project beyond the valleys, they can contact the crest-side end surfaces of the teeth 352b of the second gear 352. Further, it is possible to suppress the material required for forming the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c, and to reduce the weight and the material cost. However, it is preferable that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c project further radially outward than the crest side of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353. This is because the inclination of the second gear 352 can be suppressed more reliably.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 30.

  The composite operation unit 400 includes the four members (operation members 491 and 492) as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 13), and operates (displaces) each of the members (operation members 491 and 492). It consists of four units for That is, in the front view of the rear case 210, the combined operation unit 400 includes two units that are vertically arranged on the left side of the opening 211a and two units that are vertically arranged on the right side of the opening 211a. It consists of two units. In this case, the structure (technical idea) for moving (displacement) each member (moving member 491, 492) is the same in each of the four units, and therefore, in the following, one unit of these four units will be described. (A unit arranged above the right side of the opening 211a, see FIGS. 7 and 13) will be described as a combined operation unit 400.

  FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. 20, in the composite operation unit 400, operation members 491 and 492 are arranged on the front surface side of the mounting base 410, and the operation members 491 and 492 are made to perform the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation in a combined manner (FIG. 27). That is, the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged so as to face each other in a posture in which the longitudinal directions of the operating members are parallel to each other, and the operation of opening and closing the facing interval (opening and closing operation) and the base side of the mounting base 410 are performed. An operation of rotating as a center (rotation operation) is formed to be executable. A decorative member 411 formed as a decorative body is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 410.

  In this embodiment, two types of operation modes (opening/closing operation and rotating operation) of the operation members 491 and 492 are formed so that one drive motor 430 can execute them. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the drive motor 430 for the two types of operation modes, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. The detailed configuration of this structure will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400 in which the exploded combined operation unit 400 is viewed from the front. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400 in a state where a part of the composite operation unit 400 is disassembled. The configuration illustrated on the left side of FIG. 22 is viewed from the front and illustrated on the right side of FIG. 22. The configuration is viewed from the rear. 21 and 22, the decoration member 411 is omitted, and in FIG. 22, the attachment base 410 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the combined operation unit 400 includes a mounting base 410 arranged in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7 ), a holding case 420 mounted on the mounting base 410, and a holding case 420 thereof. A plurality of gears that are rotatably supported on the back side, a drive motor 430 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the plurality of gears, and a rear arm whose base end is rotatably supported on a holding case 420. The body 471 and the front arm body 472, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 that are narrowed between the facing surfaces of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and The 1st pinion leg member 482 and the operating members 491 and 492 connected to the tip of the 2nd pinion leg member 483 are mainly provided.

  The holding case 420 includes a back case body 421 that is attached to the mounting base 410 and a front case body 422 that faces the front side of the back case body 421. The back case body 421 and the front case body 422 include A plurality of gears are rotatably supported and housed in an internal space formed between the facing members.

  In the holding case 420, a drive motor 430 is arranged on the back side of the back case body 421, and between the back case body 421 and the front case body 422 facing each other, three rotary shafts (the reduction shaft 425, The 1st shaft 426 and the 2nd shaft 427) are each installed in a posture parallel to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430, and a plurality of gears are rotatably supported by the second shaft 427 from these reduction shafts 425. A pinion gear 431 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430.

  The plurality of gears include a reduction gear 441 pivotally supported by a reduction shaft 425, an opening/closing first gear 451 and a rotating first gear 461 pivotally supported by a first shaft 426, and an opening/closing pivotally supported by a second shaft 427. It comprises a second gear 452 and a rotating second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The reduction gear 441 includes a large-diameter gear 441a and a small-diameter gear 441b that is integrally formed coaxially with the large-diameter gear 441a, and reduces the rotation of the pinion gear 431 and transmits the rotation to the opening/closing first gear 451. .. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening/closing first gear 451, the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461, and the rotating second gear 462 will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the opening/closing first gear 451, the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461, and the rotating second gear 462. The opening/closing first gear 451 includes a main body portion 451a, an insertion hole 451b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 451a and into which the first shaft 426 is inserted, and an entire periphery of the main body portion 451a with the insertion hole 451b as a center. The teeth 451c to be provided, a pair of connecting projections 451d projecting from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 451a and sandwiching the insertion hole 451b, and penetratingly formed in the main body 451a to the side of the insertion hole 451b. The positioning hole 451e is located.

The rotating first gear 461 is a gear that is disposed on the front side of the opening/closing first gear 451 and is pivotally supported together with the opening/closing first gear 451 on the first shaft 426 (see FIGS. 21 and 22). And an insertion hole 461b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 461a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, teeth 461c carved in a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 461a around the insertion hole 461b, and the main body portion 451a. A pair of connection holes 461d that are formed so as to penetrate therethrough and that sandwich the insertion hole 461b, and a detected portion 461e that is formed to project radially outward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 451a and that is detected by an optical sensor are provided.
In the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461, the outer peripheral surface of the area excluding the area where the tooth 461c is formed (that is, the tooth 461c is not formed) is a cylindrical surface whose center is the axis of the insertion hole 461b (hereinafter "Cylindrical surface 461a1"). The outer diameter of the cylindrical surface 461a1 (the distance from the axis of the insertion hole 461b) is smaller than the outer diameter of the tip circle of the tooth 461c and larger than the outer diameter of the root circle of the tooth 461c. Thereby, as described later, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 and the rigidity of the non-forming surface 462a1 forming portion of the rotating second gear 462 at the same time.

  In addition, a pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 are respectively formed in the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 so that they can be internally fitted. The rotation position (phase) of the first gear 461 can be positioned, and both can be connected and integrally rotated in the same phase.

  The opening/closing second gear 452 has a main body portion 452a, an insertion hole 452b formed through the main body portion 452a and into which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 452a with the insertion hole 452b as the center. The tooth 452c is provided, a connecting projection 452d that projects from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 452a, and a positioning hole 452e that is formed through the main body 452a.

  The opening/closing second gear 452 is arranged with the back arm body 471 being sandwiched between the back case body 421 (that is, on the front side of the back arm body 471), and the pivotal support of the back arm body 471 is provided. An insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by a cylindrical portion provided upright along the hole 471a (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Further, the connecting protrusion 452d of the second opening/closing second gear 452 is connected to the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, and the rotation of the second opening/closing second gear 452 is transmitted to the slide rack member 481 via this connection (FIG. 26).

  The rotating second gear 462 includes a main body 462a, an insertion hole 462b penetratingly formed through the main body 462a and into which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a part of the outer periphery of the main body 462a with the insertion hole 462b as the center. A tooth 462c to be provided, a pair of connecting protrusions 462d which are projected from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 462a and have a hole formed therethrough, and a positioning hole 462e which is formed to penetrate the main body 452a. Equipped with.

  The main body portion 462a of the rotating second gear 462 is provided on both sides of the tooth 462c and has an outer peripheral surface (hereinafter referred to as "non-forming surface 462a1") in a region where the tooth is not formed on the side of the insertion hole 462b. It is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward (that is, has a center of curvature on the radially outer side). Specifically, the curvature of the non-forming surface 462a1 is set to the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or a slightly smaller curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

  Further, the rotating second gear 462 is arranged on the front side of the opening/closing second gear 452 (the posture in which the opening/closing second gear 452 is overlapped in the axial direction), but in a state independent of the opening/closing second gear 452 (that is, in a different phase). It is rotatably supported by the second shaft 427 in a relatively rotatable state. Further, the rotating second gear 462 is fastened to the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the hole of the connecting protrusion 462d, so that the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e are mutually connected. The two are connected. Therefore, the second rotating gear 462 and the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471) can be integrally rotated in the same phase via the connection.

  In this way, since the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 is fastened and fixed to the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462, both of them are connected via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e. The rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 can be formed as an integral structure by connecting at a plurality of locations (two locations in this embodiment). As a result, the rigidity of the rotary second gear 462 can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472.

  Here, as described below, the rotating second gear 462 receives a reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 when the non-formed surface 462a1 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (Fig. 28 to FIG. 30), it is necessary to secure rigidity to resist the reaction force. In this case, for example, if the rotating second gear 462 is made thicker, the weight will increase, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost will increase.

  On the other hand, according to the rotating second gear 462 of the present embodiment, the rigidity of the front arm body 472 can be utilized (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472), the rigidity can be increased. It is not necessary to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or adopt a high-rigidity material. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the second rotating gear 462 while reducing the weight and cost of the second rotating gear 462.

  Particularly, the rotating second gear 462 has a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween in the rear surface side of the non-forming surface 462a1. 28 to FIG. 30), as described later, when the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the rotating first gear The rigidity of the portion of 461 that receives a reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 can be effectively increased by using the rigidity of the front case body 472 or the like or a fastening screw made of metal. As a result, the weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotating second gear 462 and the improvement in durability thereof can both be further achieved.

  The gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452. Therefore, as will be described later, when the rotating first gear 461 is rotated by a unit rotation angle, the rotating second gear 462 is rotated by the same rotation angle as the opening/closing first gear 451. When the rotation is performed, the rotation angle of the rotation second gear 462 is matched with the rotation angle.

  It returns to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 and demonstrates. In the assembled state, the pinion gear 431 of the drive motor 430 is meshed with the large diameter gear 441a of the reduction gear 441, and the small diameter gear 441b of the reduction gear 441 is meshed with the opening/closing first gear 451. The open/close second gear 451 is meshed with the open/close second gear 452, and the rotary first gear 461 is meshed with the rotary second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, when the drive motor 430 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the opening/closing first gear 451 via the pinion gear 431 and the reduction gear 441, and the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated.

  In this case, as described above, since the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are connected by the inner fitting of the connecting protrusion 451d into the connecting hole 461d, they can be integrally rotated in the same phase. To be done. That is, when the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated, the rotation also rotates the rotating first gear 461, the rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the rotation of the rotating first gear 461 is rotated. Each is transmitted to the second gear 462.

  In the present embodiment, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are independent of each other and can be relatively rotated in different phases (see FIGS. 28 to 30). Therefore, while the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated by the rotating driving force of the drive motor 430, the rotating driving force is transmitted to the opening/closing second gear 452, and A state in which the rotational driving force is cut off can be formed on the second gear 462. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 is stopped and the opening/closing operation is executed. The details of the structure and operation will be described later.

  Positioning holes 421a and 421b are formed through the back case body 421 at the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, respectively. Further, corresponding to these positioning holes 421a, 421b, positioning holes 410a, 410b are also formed through the mounting base 410. That is, when the back case body 421 is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410, the positioning hole 410a is arranged to communicate with the positioning hole 421a and the positioning hole 410b is arranged to communicate with the positioning hole 421b.

  In the present embodiment, by inserting cylindrical jigs into the positioning holes 421a, 421b and the positioning holes 451e, 452e, 462e of the gears 451, 452, 462, the gears 451 and 452 with respect to the back case body 421 are inserted. , 461, 462, and the phase (rotational position) between the rotating first gear 461 and the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 and the opening/closing second gear 452. it can. The method of such positioning will be described later.

  The back arm body 471 is a member for transmitting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 to the operation members 491, 492 together with the front arm body 472, and rotating the operation members 491, 492 (see FIG. 26). A shaft support hole 471a into which the second shaft 427 is inserted, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) insertion holes 471b into which fastening screws (not shown) are inserted, a first pinion leg member 482, and a second pinion. A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) shaft portions 471c that rotatably support the leg members 483, respectively, and linearly extend along the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 as concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section. A guide groove 471d and a positioning hole 471e penetratingly formed on the side of the shaft support hole 471a.

  A collar 427a provided in the back case body 421 is inserted into the shaft support hole 471a, whereby the back arm body 471 is rotatable with respect to the back case body 421 about the second shaft 427. It Further, the cylindrical portion forming the shaft support hole 471a by the inner peripheral surface is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second opening/closing gear 452, and the second opening/closing gear 452 is rotatable by the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. Is pivotally supported by.

  The positioning holes 471e are formed at positions corresponding to the positioning holes 462 of the rotating second gear 462 and the positioning holes 452e of the opening/closing second gear 452, respectively. That is, as will be described later, when the front arm body 472 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the back arm body 471 and the rotary second gear 462 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the front arm body 472, the back arm body 471 is joined. The positioning hole 471e and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462 have the same phase (rotational position about the second shaft 427). On the other hand, in the opening/closing second gear 452, when the insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion of the rear arm body 471, the opening/closing second gear 452 is centered on the pivotally supporting portion. When rotated relative to 471 and arranged at a predetermined rotation position, the positioning hole 452e of the opening/closing second gear 452 is positioned relative to the positioning hole 471e of the rear arm body 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462. , Their phases (rotational positions about the second shaft 427) are matched.

  The front arm body 472 has a shaft support hole 472a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a fastening screw that is protruded toward the back arm body 471 and is inserted through the through hole 471b of the back arm body 471 can be fastened to the tip. (Four in this embodiment) raised fastening portions 472b formed in the above, a plurality (four in this embodiment) receiving recesses 472c which are recesses that can receive the tip of the shaft portion 471c, and a U-shaped cross section. -Shaped guide groove 472d linearly extending along the longitudinal direction of the front arm body 472, and a connecting projection 462d of the rotating second gear 462 which is arranged so as to sandwich the shaft support hole 472a ( And a connecting protrusion 472e that is fastened and fixed).

  A collar 422a arranged on the front case body 422 is inserted into the shaft support hole 472a, so that the front arm body 472 is rotatable about the second shaft 427 with respect to the front case body 422. It That is, since the front arm body 472 is connected to the rotating second gear 462 via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e, the rotating second gear 462 receives the rotational driving force from the rotating first gear 461 to generate the second When rotated about the shaft 427, the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471 connected to the front arm body 472) together with the rotating second gear 462 also rotate about the second shaft 427.

  The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are fastened to the raised fastening portion 472 of the front arm body 472 by fastening screws that are inserted into the through holes 471b of the back arm body 471, so that the front arm of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 471 are joined. The body 472 and the back surface of the body 472 are coupled so as to face each other. In this case, a gap (space) corresponding to the protruding height of the raised fastening portion 472b is formed between the facing surfaces (front surface and back surface) of the two. Therefore, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 can be displaceably disposed by using this gap.

  The slide rack member 481 transmits, together with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483, the rotation of the opening/closing second gear 452 to the operating members 491 and 492 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492. It is a member (see FIGS. 26 and 27 ), and is a long body portion 481a, rack portions 481b formed as rack gears on the left and right sides of the body portion 481a, and formed at one longitudinal end of the body portion 481a. The connecting groove 481c is provided with a guide convex portion 481d that is provided so as to project from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 481 in a substantially rectangular cross section and linearly extends along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a.

  As described above, the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is a groove into which the connecting protrusion 452d of the second opening/closing gear 452 is inserted, and has a groove width that allows the connecting protrusion 452d to slide and the main body 481. Is linearly extended along a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the. In the assembled state, the guide protrusion 481d of the slide rack member 481 is inserted into the guide groove 471d, 472d of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, the direction in which the slide rack member 481 can slide with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 is the extending direction of the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472). Direction) (see FIG. 26).

  The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 include body portions 482a and 483a, shaft support holes 482b and 483b formed through one end of the body portions 482a and 483a in the longitudinal direction, and shaft support holes 482b thereof. , 483b as the pinion gears, and gear holes 482c, 483c formed as pinion gears, and connecting holes 482d, 483d penetratingly formed at the other longitudinal ends of the body portions 482a, 483a. The gear portions 482c and 483c are arranged on both left and right sides of the 481 in a state of being meshed with the rack portion 481b of the slide rack member 481.

  The shaft support holes 482b and 483b are holes in which the shaft portion 471c of the rear arm body 471 is inserted and supported in the assembled state, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are It is rotatable with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 about the shaft support holes 482b and 483b (the shaft portion 471c). Therefore, by sliding the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 are provided through the meshing of the rack portion 481b and the gear portions 482c and 483c. The pinion leg member 483 can be rotated.

  A plurality of operating members 491, 492 are formed in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface side thereof and are formed so as to be inserted into the connecting holes 482d, 483d of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 (four in this embodiment). ) The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are provided. The protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed so that fastening screws can be fastened. Therefore, the projecting tips of the raised fastening portions 491a, 492a are inserted into the connecting holes 482d, 483d, and the fastening screws are fastened to the projecting tips from the side opposite to the inserting direction, so that the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 The operation members 491 and 492 are connected to the pinion leg member 483.

  In addition, the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed with a rib-shaped portion projecting on the outer peripheral surface excluding the protruding tip thereof, and the end surface of the rib-shaped portion is formed by the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion. It is brought into contact with the front surface of the leg member 483. Accordingly, the operating members 491 and 492 can be arranged at positions raised from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 by the protrusion height of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. Therefore, even in the structure in which the front arm body 472 is arranged between the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, the second pinion leg member 483, and the operating members 491 and 492, the front arm body 472 interferes with the front arm body 472. It is possible to open and close the operation members 491 and 492 without doing so.

  A bias spring 484 composed of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of first pinion leg members 482 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the bias spring 484 is The first pinion leg members 482 are configured to act in a direction toward each other. Accordingly, when the operating members 491, 492 are closed in the opening/closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491, 492 into close contact with each other to form a gap. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, a method of positioning the opening/closing first gear 451, the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 will be described. 21 to 23 will be appropriately referred to in the description of the positioning method.

  FIGS. 24 and 25 explain the process of assembling the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in a time series. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the combined operation unit 400. 24A, the state where the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction gear 425 is different from the state shown in FIG. 24A in FIG. 24B when the first shaft 426 is opened and closed. In the state in which the first gear 451 is assembled, in FIG. 25(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are further assembled to the second shaft 427 in comparison with the state illustrated in FIG. 24(b). 25B, the state in which the rotating first gear 461 is further attached to the first shaft 426 is illustrated in FIG. 25B with respect to the state illustrated in FIG. 25A.

  Here, as described above, the combined operation unit 400 sequentially transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 to the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 through the reduction gear 441, thereby opening/closing the opening/closing second gear 452. The slide rack member 481 is displaced by the rotation of the gear 452 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 is applied to the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 via the reduction gear 441. By sequentially transmitting the rotation second gear 462, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated, and the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated.

  Therefore, in order to properly perform the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, avoid the interference between the members and the occurrence of the shift of the moving range), the opening/closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451. The rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the second rotational gear and the rotational position of the second rotational gear 462 with respect to the first rotational gear 461 are respectively positioned at predetermined rotational positions, and the respective gears 451-462 are held in the holding case. It is necessary to be attached to each 420.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to assemble these two gears after positioning the rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the other gear with respect to one gear, the operator must rotate both gears. Since it was necessary to visually adjust the position and to assemble the work, the work was complicated and the work efficiency was poor, and there was a risk of defective assembly.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative rotational position (phase, meshing position) of each of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461, and each of these rotational positions. A positioning structure for positioning the mounting positions (phases) of the gears 451, 452, 461, 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is provided, and by using this positioning structure, when assembling each of the gears 451-462 to the holding case 420, While improving the workability, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of assembly failure.

  Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction shaft 425 and meshed with the pinion gear 431. As described above, the positioning holes 410a and 410b (see FIG. 21) of the mounting base 410 communicate with the positioning holes 421a and 421b of the back case body 421, respectively. , 410b are respectively inserted with jigs (not shown), and the jigs are projected from the positioning holes 421a, 421b to the front side of the back case body 421. The jig is formed as a columnar body having a circular cross section, which has an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 410a or the like.

  Next, the opening/closing first gear 451 is assembled (axially supported) to the first shaft 426 while inserting the jig projecting from the positioning hole 421a of the back case body 421 into the positioning hole 451e of the opening/closing first gear 451. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 24B, the opening/closing first gear 451 can be meshed with the reduction gear 441, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening/closing first gear 451 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned. ..

  While maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the opening/closing first gear 451), the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are then moved to the first position. Assemble on the shaft 427 (support it).

  The second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotating gear 462 are operated in a state of being integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. That is, in the opening/closing second gear 452, the insertion hole 452 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion of the rear arm body 471, and in the rotating second gear 462, the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is the connecting protrusion 472e of the front arm body 472. The second opening/closing gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are provided between the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 in a state of being fastened and fixed to the front arm body 472. The jig inserted into the positioning hole 421b of the back case 421 is projected from the surface of the back case 421 to a height position where it can be inserted into the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462.

  In this case, the assembling of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 to the second shaft 427 requires the jig projecting from the positioning hole 421b of the back case body 421 to be positioned in the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 and the opening/closing first gear. The opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are assembled (axially supported) to the second shaft 427 while being sequentially inserted into the positioning hole 452e of the second gear 452 and the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25A, the open/close second gear 452 meshes with the open/close first gear 451 and the rotational position (phase, mesh position) of the open/close second gear 452 with respect to the open/close first gear 451. Can be positioned, and the mounting position (phase) of the second opening/closing gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned.

  Lastly, while maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (at least the state of the jig being inserted into the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471), the opening/closing first pivotally supported by the first shaft 426. The rotating first gear 461 is assembled (axially supported) to the first shaft 426 while inserting the connecting protrusion 451d of the first gear 451 into the connecting hole 461d of the rotating first gear 461. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the rotating first gear 461 is meshed with the rotating second gear 462, and the mounting position (phase) of the rotating second gear 462 to the back case body 421 is positioned. You can

  After the rotating first gear 461 is attached (axially supported) to the first shaft 426, the jig is pulled out from the back side of the back case body 421. As a result, the assembly (shaft support) of the gears 451 to 462 to the back case body 421 (first shaft 426 and second shaft 427) is completed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, jigs are erected parallel to the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 of the back case body 421, and the jigs are inserted into the positioning holes 451e and the like and the gears. Positioning rotational positions (phases, meshing positions) of the gears 451 to 462 with the back case body 421 as a reference by sequentially assembling (supporting) the 451 to 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, etc. can do. That is, since the jig can be inserted at the same time when the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are inserted into the gears 451 to 462, the assembling work and the positioning work can be executed at the same time, and the workability is improved. Can be planned.

  Particularly, regarding the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, since the positioning hole 452e of the opening/closing second gear 452 is formed as a through hole, the second shaft of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 is formed. Assembly (shaft support) to 427 can be performed at the same time. Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 is formed as a through hole, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Can be assembled (supported) on the second shaft 427. Therefore, it is not necessary to assemble the respective arm bodies 471, 472 and the respective gears 452, 462 while positioning them, and the positioning work can be completed by a single assembly work, and the workability thereof can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated jig for each of the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the front arm body 472, and a common jig is used. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore,
The opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 need to be able to rotate relative to each other independently of each other. However, if the jig is removed to the rear side of the back case body 421, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 can be independently rotatable. Therefore, it is not necessary to individually provide a rotating shaft for each of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, and these opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are used as a common rotating shaft (second shaft 427). Since it can be pivotally supported, the product cost can be reduced also from this point.

  On the other hand, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 need to be connected to each other and integrally rotatable in the same phase. In this case, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are formed by inserting (interfitting) the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 into the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461. The two gears 451 and 461 are connected to each other to enable positioning of the rotational position (phase) and integral rotation in the same phase at the same time. That is, the rotational position (phase) of the two gears 451 and 461 and the connection of the two gears 451 and 461 for integral rotation can be shared by the coupling protrusion 451d and the communication hole 461d. It is not necessary to separately provide a through hole for positioning (that is, inserting a jig) and a connecting structure for integral rotation. As a result, the shapes of both gears 451 and 461 can be simplified and the manufacturing yield can be improved. Further, since the number of through holes formed penetrating the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be suppressed, the rigidity can be secured accordingly and the durability can be improved.

  In particular, the rotating first gear 461 is formed with a pair of communication holes 461d as through holes, and the pair of connecting holes 461d is inserted (internally fitted) with the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451. ), the rigidity of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be improved by the fitting structure.

  Here, according to the positioning structure of the present embodiment, as described above, the jig is projected from the front surface of the back case body 421, and the gears 451 to 462 are sequentially positioned while positioning the rotational position using the jig. Assembling (supporting) the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, etc., the jig can be removed from the back surface of the back case body 421 after the assembly of all the gears 451 to 462 is completed. That is, when assembling the gears 451 to 462, respectively, while maintaining the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning holes 451e to 462e of the gears 451 to 462, which are already assembled, of the gears 451 to 462, respectively. The remaining gears 451 to 461 of the gears 451 to 462 can be assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker from inadvertently rotating the gears 451 to 461 already assembled during the work, so that the workability can be improved and the reliability of the positioned rotation position can be improved. It is possible to improve the sex.

  In the present embodiment, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are coaxially arranged on the first shaft 426, and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are coaxially arranged on the second shaft 427, respectively. Therefore, the backlash between the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the backlash between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be generated in the same direction. .. As a result, when performing the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491 and 492 (see FIG. 27 to FIG. 30 ), it is possible to prevent the effect timing from being deviated, as will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, an opening/closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 will be described. 26(a) to 26(c) are exploded front views of the combined operation unit 400 for explaining relative displacement states of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471. The state where the operation members 491, 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is illustrated. It should be noted that FIG. 26(a) is different from FIG. 26(b) in that the opening/closing second gear 452 is counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and FIG. 26(c) is compared with FIG. 26(b). The second gear 452 corresponds to the rotated state (clockwise direction), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C, the cylindrical portion (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the back case body 271 is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the opening/closing second gear 452. As a result, the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotatable relative to the back case 271 about the second shaft 427.

  As described above, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are urged toward each other by the urging force of the urging springs 484 (see FIG. 22) installed between them. A shaft support hole 482b is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 471c of the arm body 471. That is, by receiving the urging force of the urging spring 484, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the right side in FIG. 26B of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft portion 471c. While being rotated counterclockwise, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the left side of FIG. 26B is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the shaft portion 471c. Therefore, the slide rack member 481 is urged by the urging force of the urging spring 484 acting through the rotation of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 to guide the guide recesses 471d and 472d of the two arm bodies 471 and 472 (see FIGS. 21 and 22). (Refer to FIG. 26B), the slide displacement is performed downward (the direction away from the second opening/closing second gear 452, the lower side in FIG. 26B ).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26( b ), when the second opening/closing gear 452 is not rotated against the urging force of the urging spring 484, the second opening/closing gear 452 has its connecting projection 452 d slid. The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the sliding displacement direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 26B) is pulled downward by the rack member 481 (downward in FIG. 26B) and is set to the distance L1. .. Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the distance between the connecting holes 482d is the distance W1.

  When the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d moves the slide rack member 481 upward (upward in FIG. 26A) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace the slide.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the sliding displacement direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 26A). The distance between them is shortened to the distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid and displaced upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. With the upward sliding displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the interval between the connection holes 482d is enlarged to the interval W2. (W1<W2).

  The pair of second pinion leg members 483 is similar to the pair of first pinion leg members 482, and in the state shown in FIG. 26( b ), postures close to each other (interval between the connecting holes 483 d) are used. 26A, and in the state shown in FIG. 26A, with the slide displacement of the slide rack member 481 upward, the postures (the intervals between the connection holes 483d between the connection holes 483d are set to the maximum) are separated from each other. It will be placed in a state).

  When the open/close second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26A, the state shown in FIG. Will be returned to. When the open/close second gear 452 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26B, the connecting protrusion 452d slides. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d slides the slide rack member 481 upward (upward in FIG. 26C) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace. As a result, as in the case shown in FIG. 26A, when the second opening/closing gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position, as shown in FIG. ) The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the vertical direction) is shortened to the distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. It With the upward sliding displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (and the second pinion leg members 483) are rotated in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the space between the connecting holes 482d is increased. The interval is expanded to the interval W2 (W1<W2).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, the rotation operation and opening/closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 by the combined operation unit 400 will be described.

  27A to 27D are front views of the combined operation unit 400 showing the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in time series. 27(a), the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the raised position U and opened, whereas in FIG. 27(b) the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the raised position U and closed. 27(c), the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the lowered position D and are closed. In FIG. 27(d), the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the lowered position D. Each open state is shown.

  28 to 30 are complex operation units schematically showing the meshing state of the open/close first gear 451 and the open/close second gear 452 and the meshing state of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of 400. Note that FIG. 28(a) is in the state of FIG. 27(a), FIG. 28(b) and FIG. 29(a) is in the state of FIG. 27(b), and FIG. 29(b) is in FIG. 27(c) and 30(a) correspond to the state of FIG. 27(c), and FIG. 30(b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 27(d). To do. 28(b) and FIG. 29(a) and FIG. 29(c) and FIG. 30(a) show the same state.

  Here, in FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are schematically illustrated using a chain double-dashed line. Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, one connecting projection 451d of the pair of connecting projections 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 and one connecting hole of the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 are illustrated. 461d is shown with hatching, and the hatched connecting projection 451d and connecting hole 461d will be described as a reference of rotation angles θ0 to θ4 described later. That is, in the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 462, the hatched connecting protrusion 451d is inserted (internally fitted) into the hatched connecting hole 461d, and these are arranged at the same rotation position.

  28 to 30, rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 in a state in which the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the raised position U and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27A). The position is the rotation angle θ0, and the rotation positions of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 in the state in which the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the raised position U and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27B). The opening/closing first gear in the state where the rotation angle θ1 and the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged between the ascending position U and the descending position D and are closed (a state between FIGS. 27B and 27C). Opening and closing first gear 451 in the state where the rotation positions of 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are the rotation angle θ2, and the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the lowered position D and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27C). The rotation position of the rotation first gear 461 is set to a rotation angle θ3, and the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 451 in a state where the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged at the lowered position D and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27D). The rotation position of the first gear 461 is defined as a rotation angle θ4.

  As shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 28(a), when the rotational positions of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are at the rotation angle θ0, the operating members 491 and 492 move to the rising position U. It is placed and opened. That is, the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 to a predetermined rotation position, and the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 are rotated. By shortening the distance between them to the distance L2, the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction close to the second shaft 427) and brought into a state (a state shown in FIG. 26C).

  In this case, in the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, the non-forming surface 462a1 in the body portion 462a of the rotating second gear 462 abuts on the cylindrical surface 461a1 in the body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461. . As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) is formed as a cylindrical surface centering on the first shaft 426, and the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is not formed. The surface 462a1 is a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 insertion hole 462b side (that is, the center of curvature is on the first shaft 426 side), and has the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or slightly. It is formed as a curved surface having a small curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

  Therefore, the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 causes the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462). The rotation around is impossible. That is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 serve as stopper means for restricting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, holding the operating members 491, 492 at the raised position U). Can be operated.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine, an operating member that is rotatably disposed and a drive motor that applies a rotational drive force to the operating member are provided, and the operating member is rotated by a predetermined rotation force by the rotational drive force of the drive motor. There are things that rotate within a range. In this case, for example, when the terminating end of the rotation range of the operating member is set to the ascending position and gravity acts on the operating member arranged at the end of the rotating range, the operating member rotates (falls) due to the action of gravity. You need not to. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the driving force of the drive motor is opposed to the gravity (the weight of the operating member) to restrict the rotation (lowering) of the operating member (that is, the operating member is held at the end of the rotation range). ), the energy consumption required for holding the operating member is high.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (up position U), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body 461a) and the rotating second gear 461 (main body 461a) are rotated. By making contact with the non-forming surface 462a1 of the gear 462 (main body 462a), the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 (rotational movement of the rotating second gear 462) can be restricted. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (up position U), the operating members 491 and 492 and the drive motor 430 are separated, so that the drive motor When it becomes impossible to hold the operating members 491, 492 in the raised position U by using the rotational driving force, the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 is used to move the operating members 491, 492 to the raised position U. Can be retained. As a result, energy consumption required to hold the operating members 491 and 492 can be suppressed.

  In this case, when the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) contact each other (that is, the operating member 491, When the 492 is arranged in the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later), the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise) around the second shaft 427 can be restricted. Since the second rotation gear 462 rotates in only one direction about the second shaft 427 (i.e., the movement members 491 and 492 are lowered toward the lowered position D by the action of gravity). Compared with the case of forming a shape that can be regulated by (only), the vibration of the operating members 491, 492 when the end of the movement range (the rising position U (and the lowering position D described later)) is reached is converged. The operating members 491 and 492 can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range. Furthermore, since the operating members 491, 492 can be held in a stable state at the end of the moving range, the operating members 491, 492 that should be in the stopped state in the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later) have an external force (for example, , External force generated by the player hitting or rocking the game machine) can prevent vibration and displacement.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) (that is, the operating member 491). , 492 disposed in the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later) have a shape curved in an arc shape about the rotation axis (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461, The rotary first gear 461 is curved and formed in an arc shape having the same diameter as or a slightly larger diameter than the cylindrical surface 461a1.

  As a result, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be smoothly brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and both can be easily brought into surface contact with each other. As a result, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 are brought into smooth contact with each other, and the operating members 491, 492 reach the end of the moving range (the rising position U (and the lowering position D described later)) and are stopped. It is possible to reduce the impact at the time and reduce the contact pressure between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 to improve the durability of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462.

  Here, the rotating second gear 462 has its rigidity increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472 (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472) as described above. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to use a high-rigidity material, and thus the weight of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced and the cost of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced. It is being improved.

  In particular, as described above, the rotating second gear 462 has a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the rear surface side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (that is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween). ), the rotation of the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later). The rigidity of the portion of the first gear 461 that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 can be effectively increased. As a result, the weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotating second gear 462 and the improvement in durability thereof can be further achieved at the same time.

  Furthermore, the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is arranged at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. That is, the non-formation surface 462a1 is arranged on the straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426. When the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 is contacted. The reaction force received from the rotary second gear is at a position facing the rotation shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotation first gear 461 because it is applied along a straight line connecting the coupling protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426. By disposing the connecting protrusion 462d of 462, the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 (cylindrical surface 461a1) using the front arm body 472 can be further exerted. Further, since the metal fastening screw is inserted into the rolling convex portion 462d, the rigidity can be increased in that respect as well.

  When the open/close first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1 from the state shown in FIGS. Since the first gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 slide (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462, the first rotating gear Rotational driving force is not transmitted from the rotary second gear 462 to the rotary second gear 462, and the rotary second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. As a result, the operating members 491, 492 can be held in the raised position U without rotating the operating members 491, 492 (that is, in a state where the rotating operation is stopped).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the rotating first gear 461, and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is opposed to the cylindrical surface 461a1, so that the above-described cutoff state (rotation first Since the structure in which the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the first gear 461 to the second rotation gear 462 is formed, the rigidity of the first rotation gear 462 can be improved.

  That is, even when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (a region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed on the tooth tip surface of the tooth 461c. The blocking state described above can be formed by sliding (sliding) face to face. However, in this case, since the teeth 461c are formed (recessed), the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed in the area facing the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (the tooth 451c is not formed), the body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is correspondingly formed. The rigidity of can be improved.

  When the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (a region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is different from the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461. It is necessary to be retracted to the second shaft 427 side with respect to the tooth crest surface. As a result, the amount of retreat in the portion where the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed becomes large, and the rigidity thereof is reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating first gear 461 is formed with the cylindrical surface 461a1, and the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed between the tooth crest surface and the tooth bottom surface of the tooth 451c as described above. Therefore, the amount of retreat of the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 can be reduced. Accordingly, the protrusion amount of the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the second rotating gear 462 is secured (the increase of the backward movement amount is suppressed), and the rigidity of the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the second rotating gear 462 is increased. Can be improved.

  In particular, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 side (that is, the center of curvature is on the first shaft 426 side) as described above, and the tooth 462c is formed. The cylindrical surface of the rotating first gear 461 has a shape protruding toward the front (the side of the rotating first gear 461) toward the front side (that is, a shape in which the distance from the second shaft 427 increases) as the distance from the first rotating gear 461 increases. It is possible to increase the amount of protrusion in the portion where the non-formation surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is formed while allowing sliding (formation of a blocking state) with respect to 461a1, thereby further increasing its rigidity.

  Since the teeth 451c and 452c of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 are meshed with each other, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 have the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461. Are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1, the rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the opening/closing second gear 452 causes the rear arm body 471 and It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the front arm body 472 about the second shaft 427.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is expanded to the distance L1, and the slide rack member 481 is slid downward (in the direction away from the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26B). ). As a result, as shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B and FIG. 29A, the operating members 491 and 492 that have been opened can be brought into a closed state. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the raised position U, it is possible to execute the opening/closing operation and close the opened operating members 491 and 492.

  As shown in FIGS. 27B, 28B, and 29A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ1, and the operating members 491 and 492 move to the raised position U. In the state in which the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 reaches the end of the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461, the teeth 461c of the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 are disposed in the closed state. 462c is set to a state immediately before meshing.

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B and FIG. 29A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3. When rotated toward the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462, the teeth of the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 are meshed with each other so that the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 mesh with each other. The rotation of 461 is transmitted to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 rotates integrally with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 in the clockwise direction (clockwise direction) around the second shaft 427. .. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29B, it is possible to perform the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492 from the raised position U to the lowered position D.

  On the other hand, as described above, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the open/close first gear 451 and the open/close second gear 452 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 toward the rotating angle θ3, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are similarly moved. It is rotated integrally in phase. That is, the opening/closing second gear 452 is not relatively rotated with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and as shown in FIG. 29B, the rotating second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the back arm body 471. The front arm body 472 is integrally rotated about the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped (the operating members 491 and 492 can be held in the closed state).

  Accordingly, when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are further rotated from the rotation angle θ2, the operating members 491 and 492 are held in the closed state, and the rotating operation is performed to open/close the first opening/closing first gear 451. As the gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 reach the rotation angle θ3, as shown in FIGS. 27C and 29C, the operating members 491 and 492 arranged at the ascending position U are moved to the descending position D. Can be placed at.

  As shown in FIGS. 27(c), 29(c), and 30(a), the operating members 491 and 492 are operated when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ3. It is placed in the lowered position D and is in a closed state. In this case, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are disengaged from each other, and the rotating second gear 462 is attached to the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461. The non-formation surface 462a1 of the main body portion 462a is abutted.

  That is, the meshing of the teeth 461c and 462c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 with each other is released (making the meshing impossible), so that the rotating first gear 461 to the rotating second gear 462. The rotation of the rotary second gear 462 (that is, the rotary operation of the operating members 491 and 492) can be stopped by interrupting the transmission of the rotational drive force to the (rotating state).

  Here, in the conventional game machine, the stop of the operating member is provided with a sensor device that detects the rotational position of the gear that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor to the operating member, and the sensor device causes the gear to reach a predetermined rotational position. When the rotation is detected, or when the drive amount (rotation number or step number) of the drive motor is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the operating members move. The drive motor was stopped when it was judged that the end of the range had been reached. In this case, the drive motor may not be stopped even though the operating member reaches the end of the moving range due to, for example, defective detection of the rotational position or the drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper when the drive motor is not stopped properly. However, in the structure in which the movement of the operating member is regulated by the stopper in this way, when the operating member collides with the stopper, not only the operating member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the drive motor. This may cause damage to the drive motor.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the moving range (down position D), the meshing of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is changed. It is possible to release it (to make the meshing impossible) to interrupt the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the operating members 491 and 492 (the second rotary gear 462). As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped even when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 is being continuously generated.

  As a result, it is possible to avoid damage due to collision between the operating members 491 and 492 and other members. Further, even if the operating members 491 and 492 collide with other members, the operating members 491 and 492 are separated from the drive motor 430 (that is, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are separated from each other). Since the drive motor 430 is idling, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the drive motor 430. As will be described later, the same applies when the operating members 491, 492 are rotated from the lowered position D toward the raised position U and reach the raised position U.

  As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are formed as curved surfaces having shapes corresponding to each other. Therefore, the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 causes the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462). Rotation around is impossible. That is, the stopper means that allows the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 to restrict the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, to hold the operating members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D). Can function as.

  From the state shown in FIG. 27C, FIG. 29C and FIG. 30A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in phase with each other from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4. When rotated, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 slide (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the rotating first gear 461 to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. This makes it possible to stop the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, hold the operating members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D).

  On the other hand, since the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 are meshed with the teeth 451c and 452c of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 451. When the gear 461 is integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4, the rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the opening/closing second gear 452 causes the rear arm body to rotate. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to 471 and the front arm body 472.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is shortened to the distance L2, and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction approaching the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26C). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, the operating members 491 and 492 that have been closed can be brought into the opened state. That is, while the operating members 491, 492 are held at the lowered position D, the opening/closing operation can be performed to open the closed operating members 491, 492.

  As shown in FIGS. 27(d) and 30(b), after the operating members 491 and 492 are placed in the lowered position D and are in the opened state, the driving motor 430 (FIGS. 21 and 22) is then moved. By rotating the first opening/closing first gear 451 and the first rotating gear 461 integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ4 to the rotation angle θ0. Operations (opening/closing operation and rotating operation) can be executed in reverse order.

  That is, from the state of the rotation angle θ4 shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ3. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27C, 29C, and 30A, slippage between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is performed. By using (sliding), the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 is stopped (that is, the operating members 491, 492 are held in the lowered position D), and the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise). ), the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be expanded to the distance L1 and the operating members 491 and 492 that have been opened can be closed. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D, the opening/closing operation can be executed to close the opened operating members 491 and 492.

  Next, from the state of the rotation angle θ3 shown in FIG. 27C, FIG. 29C and FIG. 30A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase through the rotation angle θ2. The rotation angle θ1. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 27B and 29A, the rotating second gear 462 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) integrally with the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and the operating member While rotating 491 and 492 from the lowered position D to the raised position U, the opening/closing second gear 452 does not rotate relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and these rotating second gears 462 and The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can be integrally rotated about the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, while the operation members 491 and 492 are held in the closed state, it is possible to perform the rotation operation and arrange the operation members 491 and 492, which are arranged in the lowered position D, in the raised position U.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when starting the rotating operation for moving the operating members 491, 492 from the lowered position D toward the raised position U, only the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 is performed first. After that, the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated. That is, after the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is cut off to prevent the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 from being transmitted to the rotation second gear 462, the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 is changed to the rotation second gear. Since the transmission state is transmitted to 462, it is possible to suppress the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 to start the rotational movement of the operation members 491 and 492, and as a result, the size of the drive motor 430 can be reduced. be able to.

  That is, when starting the rotation operation of the operating members 491, 492 in the stopped state (that is, the raised position U or the lowered position D), the stationary object is moved, so that the operating members 491, 492 are moved. Since it is necessary to apply a force exceeding the generated inertial force to the operating members 491 and 492, the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 becomes large. In particular, the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 992 is not limited to the operating members 491, 492, but a mechanical portion for performing the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 (for example, the slide rack member 481 and each pinion leg member 482, 483). Etc.) and the respective arm bodies 471, 472, etc. that hold the mechanical parts thereof need to be moved, and the inertial force at the time of starting the rotation operation becomes large. Further, when rotating the operating members 491, 492 in the lowered position D toward the raised position D, it is necessary to resist the weight (the action of gravity) of the operating members 491, 492 in addition to the inertial force. .. Therefore, the drive motor 430 is increased in size.

  On the other hand, after the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492 is started, the action of inertia acting to maintain the motion state of the operating members 491 and 492 acts, so that the rotation required for the drive motor 430 is increased. The driving force becomes smaller than the rotational driving force required when starting the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492. In other words, it can be said that after the movement of the operation members 491 and 492 is started, the drive motor 430 whose maximum output is unnecessarily large is in use.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, first, the rotation (driving force) is utilized by utilizing the slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Is not transmitted to the rotation second gear 462 (a cutoff state, a state during the transition from FIG. 30B to FIG. 30A), the drive motor 430 can be rotationally driven, and the drive motor 430 Momentum (inertial force on the rotating first gear 461 side) can be given to the driven state. After that, the rotating first gear 461 is meshed with the rotating second gear 462 (that is, a transmission state is formed) (see the state of transition from FIG. 29C to FIG. 29B), The rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 can be started in a state in which the rotational drive of the drive motor 430 is given momentum. Accordingly, even if the drive motor 430 is downsized, the movement members 491 and 492 can start moving. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 is started.

  In particular, in this cutoff state, the operation members 491 and 492 are opened and closed, but in the opening and closing operation, only the operation members 491 and 492 are the objects to be moved (moved or displaced) by the driving force of the drive motor 430. As in the case of the rotation operation, it is not necessary to move the moving member 491, 492 as well as the entire mechanical part including the arm members 471, 472. Therefore, the load of the drive motor 430 is small, and it is possible to give sufficient momentum (inertial force to the rotating first gear 461 side) to the driving state thereof.

  The cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 are formed on both sides with the teeth 461c and 462c sandwiched between them, and at the two positions of the ascending position U and the descending position D, the cylindrical surface is formed. A state (blocking state) in which the non-formation surface 462a is in contact with the surface 461a1 can be formed. Therefore, not only when the movement of the operating members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D to the raised position U is started, but also when the movement of the operating members 491 and 492 in the raised position U is started to the lowered position D. Also, it is possible to give momentum (inertial force) to the drive state of the drive motor 430.

  From the state of the rotation angle θ1 shown in FIGS. 27B, 28B, and 29A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ0. .. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, the sliding (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is used. Then, while stopping the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 (that is, while holding the operating members 491, 492 in the raised position U), by the clockwise (clockwise) rotation of the opening/closing second gear 452, The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be shortened to the distance L2 so that the operating members 491 and 492 that have been closed can be brought into the opened state. That is, it is possible to open and close the operating members 491 and 492 that are closed while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the raised position U and performing the opening/closing operation.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) that are rotated (rotationally operated) about the second shaft 427, and those back arms. Operating members 491 and 492 (second moving members) that are provided on the arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and that are opened and closed (opening and closing operations) in the directions of approaching and separating from each other, and operating members 491 and 492 (second moving member). While the rotating operation of the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is stopped (see FIGS. 28 and 30), the operating members 491, 492 (second moving member) The drive motor 430 can perform a combined operation of rotating the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) (see FIG. 29) while the opening/closing operation of (1) is stopped.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the moving operation of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by the one drive motor, there are a state where the drive motor generates a driving force and a state where the generation of the driving force is stopped. Since the two moving states are formed to switch the operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. However, it is impossible to stop one of the first moving member and the second moving member while moving the other. Therefore, in order to move one of the first moving member and the second moving member while stopping the other, a drive motor for moving the first moving member and a drive motor for moving the second moving member are used. It was necessary to provide each individually, that is, two drive motors in total.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, one of the operation members 491 and 492 (second moving member) or the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is operated while the other is operated. Since the operation mode to be stopped can be achieved by the one drive motor 430, while reducing the required number of drive motors 430 while enhancing the effect of moving and stopping the operation members 491 and 492, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

  Next, the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 32 is FIG. 10 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. The arrangement positions (opposing intervals) of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 are in a state where both units 500 and 600 are accommodated in the rear case 210. It corresponds to the arrangement position (opposing interval).

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a first engagement member 539 that is vertically movable via a slide mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 includes a link. A pair of second coupling members 630 are formed so as to be swingable to the left and right via the mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 is disposed below the first coupling operation unit 500 at a predetermined interval. The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the back side (the back side of the paper surface of FIGS. 31 and 32) of the space located between the facing of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600. Is set up.

  The first combination operation unit 500 and the second combination operation unit 600 move up and down and swing the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second connection members 630, respectively, to show the retracted position shown in FIG. 31 or shown in FIG. Place it at the joining position. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 31, the first engaging member 539 is raised, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated left and right by tilting of the link mechanism, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). The front side is opened (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 32, the first engaging member 539 is lowered and the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other due to the standing of the link mechanism. The 2 coupling members 630 are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and are coupled to each other (see FIG. 12).

  In this case, according to the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the first engagement member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged side by side on the left and right, and The lower surface 539e of the first engaging member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surface 630a of each of the pair of second coupling members 630, so that a force in the direction of bringing them closer to each other is applied to the pair of second coupling members 630. Accordingly, not only the lower surface 539e of the first engagement member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be brought into close contact with each other, but also the facing surfaces of the pair of second coupling members 630 adjacent to each other on the left and right sides are brought into close contact with each other. Can be made. As a result, the respective coupling members 539 and 630 can be coupled while suppressing the formation of a gap between them. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of effect by combining a plurality of members.

  First, the first combination operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 41.

  33A is a front view of the first combination operation unit 500, and FIG. 33B is a bottom view of the first combination operation unit 500 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXb in FIG. 33A. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500. Note that in FIG. 35, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a substrate member 510, a driving unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 and generating a driving force, and a driving unit 520 thereof. And a slide mechanism portion 530 disposed on the front side of the base member 510, and the driving force of the drive portion 520 is transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530. And a second link member 541 disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510, and a second link member disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 in a posture symmetrical to the first link member 541. 542, a pair of raising members 550 arranged on the left and right sides of the slide mechanism unit 530 on the front side of the substrate member 510, a decorative portion 560 arranged on the front side of the pair of raising members 550, and a substrate. A biasing spring 571, which is disposed on the front side of the member 510 and applies a biasing force to the second link member 542, is mainly provided.

  The raising member 550 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side, and the drive unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 can be housed in the inner space of the raising member 550. Accordingly, as will be described later, even when the driving unit 520 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, the dead space formed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530 is effectively used. This can be utilized, and the first coupling operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

  The board member 510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and includes a pair of guide grooves 511 and a rack portion that is arranged in parallel along one of the pair of guide grooves 511. 512, connecting grooves 513 and 514 formed on the left and right with a pair of guide grooves 511 sandwiched therebetween, a shaft support hole 515 formed on the side of the connecting groove 513, and a front side and a rear side of the substrate member 510, respectively. A supporting shaft 516 that is provided so as to protrude is mainly provided.

  The guide groove 511 allows the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 to be inserted from the front surface side to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 so that the insertion shaft 531c and each of the link members 541 and 542 can be connected on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510. Is a groove-shaped opening, and the pair extends linearly along the up-down direction while maintaining parallel to each other substantially at the center in the width direction of the substrate member 510. The groove width of the guide groove 511 is set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530, and the insertion shaft 531c can be moved only along the extending direction of the guide groove 511. That is, the slide mechanism portion 530 can be moved (elevated) in the vertical direction along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 by the insertion shaft 531c being guided by the guide groove 511.

  The rack portion 512 is a portion formed as a rack gear in which a plurality of teeth 512a are engraved on a plane along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, and is fixed to the front side of the substrate member 510. When the slide mechanism 520 is assembled to the board member 510, the pinion gear 537 (see FIG. 38) of the slide mechanism 530 meshes with the teeth 512 a of the rack 512. Therefore, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is moved (elevated) along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, the pinion gear 537 is rotationally driven along with the movement of the slide mechanism unit 530.

  The connection groove 513 is a groove shape for inserting the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510 and connecting the connection shaft 526 and the first link member 541 on the back side of the substrate member 510. And is curved and extended in an arc shape that is convex toward the guide groove 511. Specifically, the connection groove 513 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting out a part of an annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 515. The groove width of the connecting groove 513 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520, and the connecting shaft 526 is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  The shaft support hole 515 is an opening for inserting the support shaft 527 that supports the base end side of the first link member 541, and is arranged on the opposite side of the guide groove 511 with the connection groove 513 sandwiched therebetween. As will be described later, the support shaft 527 is fixed to the case body 521 of the drive unit 520, and the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 so that the tip of the support shaft 527 is a shaft support hole. It is projected to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 via 515. The first link member 541 is pivotally supported at its base end side by a support shaft 527 protruding through the shaft support hole 515, and is rotated about the support shaft 527.

  The connecting groove 514 allows the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 to be inserted from the back side to the front side of the substrate member 510, and the locking claw 542b has the end portion of the biasing spring 542 formed on the front side of the substrate member 510. It is a groove-shaped opening for allowing it to extend, and is curved and extended toward the guide groove 511 in a convex arc shape. That is, the connection groove 514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows the locking claw 542b to move when the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516.

  The support shaft 516 is a shaft body for pivotally supporting the second link member 542 and the biasing spring 571, and as described above, is provided so as to project from the front surface side and the back surface side of the substrate member 510, respectively. The support shaft 516 is arranged at a position line-symmetrical to the shaft support hole 515 with a virtual straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a symmetry line. The second link member 542 is pivotally supported at the base end side (shaft support hole 542a) on a support shaft 516 protrudingly provided on the back surface side of the substrate member 510, and is rotated about the support shaft 516. Further, the biasing spring 571 is held by a support shaft 516 that is provided so as to project on the front side of the substrate member 510.

  The biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, the coil portion thereof is held (guided) by the support shaft 516, and one arm portion of the pair of arm portions is engaged with the second link member 542. It is locked by the locking claw 542b, and the other arm is locked by the locking claw 517 of the substrate member 510. The biasing spring 571 is arranged in a state where the pair of arms are elastically deformed in a direction in which they approach each other, and the elastic recovery force pushes the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 upward (see FIG. 34 and the upper side of FIG. 35). That is, the urging force of the urging spring 571 acts in the direction of holding the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. 35 (the posture in which the tip end side is located at the upper end side of the guide groove 511).

  The driving unit 520 is a unit for generating a driving force for slidingly displacing (elevating) the slide mechanism unit 530 in the vertical direction, and is provided on the front side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530. It is arranged. Here, the drive unit 520 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 36 is a rear view of the drive unit 520. Note that, in FIG. 36, the positions of the connecting groove 513 and the shaft support hole 515 of the substrate member 510 in a state where the drive unit 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510 are schematically illustrated by using a chain double-dashed line.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the drive unit 520 is provided with a case body 521 and a drive motor 522 disposed on the front side of the case body 521 and projecting the drive shaft toward the back side of the case body 521 (FIG. 34 and FIG. 34). 35), a pinion gear 523 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a rotation shaft 524a that meshes with the pinion gear 523 and that protrudes from the back surface of the case body 521. A crank gear 524, a connecting rod 525 whose one end is rotatably supported by the crank gear 524 via a rotary shaft 525a, a connecting shaft 526 protruding from the other end of the connecting rod 525, and a case body 521. And a support shaft 527 protruding from the back surface of the. The drive shaft of the drive motor 522, the rotary shafts 524a and 525a, the connecting shaft 526, and the support shaft 527 are arranged in parallel.

  A rotating shaft 525a that rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 525 to the crank gear 524 is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524, and is connected so as to project from the other end of the connecting rod 525. As described above, the shaft 526 is inserted into the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510 and is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Therefore, the crank gear 524, the rotating shaft 525a, and the connecting rod 525 form a crank mechanism that converts the rotational movement of the crank gear 524 into the reciprocating movement of the connecting shaft 526 via the connecting rod 525.

  That is, when the pinion gear 523 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 and the crank gear 524 is rotated in one direction (for example, the arrow A1 direction) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 526 is extended along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Is displaced in one direction (arrow B1 direction) while the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the crank gear 524 is rotated in the other direction (arrow A2 direction), the moving direction of the connecting shaft 526 is reversed. Then, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the other direction (arrow B2 direction) along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  In the state where the drive unit 520 (case body 521) is assembled to the front side of the substrate member 510, the connecting shaft 526 and the supporting shaft 527 are respectively connected to the connecting groove 513 and the supporting hole 515 of the substrate member 510, as described above. After being inserted, the tip ends of the connecting shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are projected to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

  In this case, the connection shaft 526 is rotatably connected to the longitudinal intermediate portion (connection hole 541b) of the first link member 541 and the support shaft 527 is rotatably connected to the base end portion (shaft support hole 541a) of the first link member 541. Therefore, by rotatively driving the drive motor 522, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced along the connecting groove 513 (arrow B1 direction or arrow B2 direction) so that the first link member 541 is moved to the supporting shaft. It can be rotated around 527.

  It returns to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35 and demonstrates. The first link member 541 is a member for connecting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism unit 530. It is formed in a scale plate shape. The first link member 541 is formed with a shaft support hole 541a at a base end portion, a connection hole 541b at a longitudinal middle portion, and a sliding hole 541c at a tip end portion opposite to the base end portion.

  The shaft support hole 541a and the connection hole 541b are formed as through holes having a circular shape in a front view, and the shaft support shaft 527 and the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 are rotatably inserted therein. On the other hand, the sliding hole 541c is formed as a through hole having a long hole shape in a front view, which is along the long diameter direction of the first link member 541 and is slidable along the long hole shape (long diameter direction). The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is inserted.

  Therefore, when the first link member 541 is rotated around the support hole 541a in the direction in which the sliding hole 541c is raised (arrow B1 direction, see FIG. 36), the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 causes the insertion shaft 531c of the substrate member 510 to move. A direction in which the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved upward along the guide groove 511 and the first link member 541 lowers the sliding hole 541c around the support hole 541a (arrow B2 direction, see FIG. 36). When the slide mechanism unit 530 is rotated to, the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is displaced downward along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the slide mechanism unit 530 is lowered (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the connecting rod 525 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510 and the first link member 541 is arranged on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510, and the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are arranged. Since they are connected (connected) to each other through the connection groove 513 of the substrate member 510, the driving force transmission path formed by the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (that is, the rotation shaft 524a of the crank gear 524 is connected. The length dimension of the portion connecting the shaft 526 (connecting rod 525) and the portion connecting the connecting shaft 526 and the insertion shaft 531c (the portion from the connecting hole 541b to the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541). ) Becomes longer. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 may be deformed, and the driving force may not be stably transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530 (insertion shaft 531c).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base end side (the shaft support hole 541a) of the first link member 541 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 527 on the back surface of the substrate member 510, so that the support thereof is supported. Utilizing the rigidity of the case body 521 of the drive unit 520 to which the shaft 527 is fixed and the substrate member 510 to which the case body 521 is fastened and fixed, to increase the rigidity of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 as a whole. You can As a result, when the driving force of the drive motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are suppressed from being deformed, and the driving force is stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). can do.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (the shaft supporting hole 541a) of the first link member 541 are rotatably supported by the substrate member 510, the connecting rod 525 is supported by the substrate member 510. As compared with the case of rotatably rotatably supporting the drive member, the transmission path of the drive force from the position rotatably supported by the substrate member 510 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be shortened. Transmission to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be further stabilized.

  The second link member 542 is a member for connecting the urging spring 571 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to transmit the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530. Formed into a shape. Similar to the first link member 541, the second link member 542 has a shaft support hole 542a and a slide hole 542c formed in the base end portion and the tip end portion, respectively. The support shaft 516 of the substrate member 510 is rotatably inserted in the shaft support hole 542a, and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is inserted in the slide hole 542c. In addition, a locking claw 542b is formed at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the second link member 542. As described above, the locking claw 542b is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 via the connecting groove 514 and locks the arm portion of the biasing spring 571.

  Therefore, since the second link member 542 holds the slide mechanism portion 530 symmetrically with the first link member 541, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed. Further, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts on the slide mechanism portion 530 via the second link member 542 in the ascending direction (the direction in which the tip end side of the second link member 542 (sliding hole 542c) is raised). Therefore, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is raised, the driving force of the drive unit 520 can be assisted. This can prevent the drive motor 522 from increasing in size.

  A retaining ring E formed as an E ring is attached to the support shafts 527 and 516 inserted into the shaft support holes 541a and 542a of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542, respectively, as a retaining device. , The insertion shaft 531c inserted through the sliding holes 541c, 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 has a seating surface having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding holes 541c, 542c as a retaining member ( A fastening screw having a head or washer is fastened (see FIG. 35).

  Here, regarding the first link member 541, the mounting of the retaining ring E or the fastening of the fastening screw as a retainer is omitted with respect to the coupling shaft 526 that is inserted into the coupling hole 541b of the first link member 541. That is, by preventing the two of the three shafts (the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c) from coming off, the remaining one can be omitted (the connecting shaft 526), and It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for retaining. In particular, the first link member 541, which has a long length, is prevented from coming off from the two shafts on the base end side and the tip end side, and is prevented from coming off from the shaft at an intermediate position between the base end side and the tip end side. With the structure in which the first link member 451 is omitted, it is possible to stably rotate the first link member 451 while suppressing the shaft (the connecting shaft 526) that is omitted from being prevented from coming off from the connecting hole 541b.

  As described above, the slide mechanism portion 530 is a mechanism portion that slides (moves up and down) in the vertical direction along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and lowers the first engaging member 539 to a predetermined position. Then, it is coupled to the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 (see FIG. 32). Here, the slide mechanism unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39.

  FIG. 37A is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530, and FIG. 37B is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530. 38 is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 in which the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 in which the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the rear. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the slide mechanism unit 530 includes an A layer base plate 531, a B layer base plate 532 and a B layer decorative body 533, a C layer base plate 534 and a C layer decorative body 535, and The first pinion gear 537, the second pinion gear 538, and the first coupling member 539 are provided, and the first coupling member 539 is slid up and down by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit 520 via the first link member 541 ( Raise and lower).

  According to the slide mechanism unit 530 of the present embodiment, two sets of double rack and pinion structures are interposed between the A layer base plate 531 and the first coupling member 539, and the first link member 541 to the A layer base. The driving force received by the plate 531 is transmitted to the first coupling member 539 via the two sets of double rack and pinion structures, thereby increasing the sliding displacement (elevation) of the first coupling member 539. Is configured so that

  The A-layer base plate 531 includes a main body portion 531a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long in a front view, and a guide groove 531b that is a groove-shaped opening linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 531a. , A plurality of insertion shafts 531c (a total of six in this embodiment) that are provided in a protruding manner from the rear surface of the main body portion 531a and are arranged in parallel on the left and right with a guide groove 531b interposed therebetween, and are provided in front of the main body portion 531a. And a support shaft 531d that rotatably supports the first pinion gear 537.

  The A-layer base plate 531 inserts a plurality of insertion shafts 531c into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and has a collar C having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide grooves 511 at the tip of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. By fastening and fixing as a retaining member, the substrate member 510 is held so as to be capable of sliding displacement (elevation) (see FIG. 35). In this case, the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the support shaft 531d is meshed with the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510.

  In the present embodiment, the two insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 as described above. At the top, tighten the fastening screw to prevent it from coming off.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively located on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 39) than the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39) of the A-layer base plate 531. Therefore, as will be described later, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is in the forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is set to the collar C, the first link member 541, and the first link member 541. It can be effectively regulated by the 2 link member 542, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid and displaced (elevated) in a stable state.

  The B layer base plate 532 includes a main body portion 532a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long in a front view, a plurality of insertion holes 532b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 532a, and a plurality of projections provided from the rear surface of the main body portion 532a. And a rack portion 532d having a plurality of teeth formed as rack gears on the side surface of the main body portion 532a along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 532a.

  In the B layer base plate 532, a plurality of insertion shafts 532c are respectively inserted into the guide grooves 531b of the A layer base plate 531 and the fastening shafts 532c are fastened with fastening screws at the tips thereof so as not to come off. It is held by the A layer base plate 531 so as to be capable of sliding displacement (elevation).

  In this case, the rack portion 532d disposed on the side surface of the B layer base plate 532 (main body portion 532a) is meshed with the first pinion gear 537 that is axially supported by the A layer base plate 531 (support shaft 531d). That is, the first pinion gear 537 is meshed with both the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 and the rack portion 532d of the B layer base plate 532, whereby a first set of double rack and pinion structure is formed. Therefore, when the A layer base plate 531 is slid with respect to the substrate member 510 (moved up and down), the B layer base plate 532 is moved relative to the A layer base plate 531 via the first double rack and pinion structure. Slide displacement (elevation). That is, the B layer base plate 532 is slid with respect to the substrate member 510 (moved up and down) in a state where the speed is higher than that of the A layer base plate 531.

  The B layer decorative body 533 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the B layer base plate 532, and slides together with the B layer base plate 532 (up and down). To be done. Specifically, the B layer decorative body 533 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 533a protruding from the back surface thereof, and the fastening shafts 533a are fastened to the fastening screws inserted in the insertion holes 532b of the B layer base plate 532. By doing so, it is fixed to the front surface side of the B layer base plate 532.

  The plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are fixed to the B layer base plate 532 after being inserted into the guide grooves 539b of the first coupling member 539 and the guide grooves 534b of the C layer base plate 534. .. In this case, one insertion shaft 532a of the plurality of insertion shafts 532a of the B layer decorative body 533 rotatably supports the second pinion gear 538. Therefore, when the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the A layer base plate 531, the second pinion gear 538 is also slidably displaced (elevated with respect to the A layer base plate 531). ) Will be done.

  The C-layer base plate 534 includes a main body portion 534a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long in a front view, and a guide groove 534b that is a groove-shaped opening linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 534a. , A plurality of insertion holes 534c penetratingly formed in the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 534d having a plurality of teeth formed as rack gears along the guide groove 534b on the front surface side of the main body portion 532a.

  The C layer decorative body 535 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the C layer base plate 534, and slides together with the C layer base plate 534 (up and down). To be done. Specifically, the C-layer decorative body 535 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 535a protruding from the back surface thereof, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 534c of the C-layer base plate 534 is fastened to the insertion shaft 535a. By doing so, it is fixed to the front surface side of the C layer base plate 534.

  The first coupling member 539 is a member for forming a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and abutting against the pair of second coupling members 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 to form a coupled state. Yes (see FIG. 32), a main body portion 539a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape in a front view, and a guide groove 539b which is a groove-shaped opening linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 539a. The main body portion 534a includes a decorative portion 539c that is continuously provided below the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 539d in which a plurality of teeth are formed as rack gears along the guide groove 539b on the back side of the main body portion 532a.

  The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed by combining two flat surfaces that descend and incline toward the center. That is, the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed in an inverted V-shape in which the center thereof protrudes in the downward direction (downward direction in FIG. 38) when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 40 and 41). ). The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is in contact with the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position as described above (see FIG. 32).

  Further, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is provided with a recess 539e1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view at the center thereof. The convex portion 630a1 protruding from the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 is housed (concave-fitted) in the concave portion 539e1 at the coupling position. By this concave-convex fitting, relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position.

  The C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539 are configured such that the plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 534b and 539b of the C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539, respectively. Thus, it is held between the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 so as to be capable of sliding displacement (elevation).

  In this case, the second pinion gear 538 pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 533a of the B layer decorative body 533, the rack portion 534d disposed on the front side of the C layer base plate 534 (main body portion 534a), and the first coupling member. 539 (main body portion 539a) and the rack portion 539d arranged on the back side are meshed with each other, whereby a second set of double rack and pinion structure is formed. Therefore, when the B-layer base plate 532 (and the B-layer decorative body 533) is slid with respect to the A-layer base plate 531 (moved up and down), the first coupling member is moved through the second double rack and pinion mechanism. 539 is slid with respect to the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decorative body 533). That is, the first coupling member 539 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the B layer base plate 532.

  It returns to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35 and demonstrates. As described above, in the first coupling member 500, the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510, and a plurality of the slide mechanism portions 530 (A layer base plate 531) are projected (the present embodiment). 6 insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, and a collar C is attached to some (4) insertion shafts 531c of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. The remaining (two) insertion shafts 531c are connected to the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 while being attached as a retaining member (see FIG. 35).

  Here, also in the conventional game machine, a plurality of insertion shafts (corresponding to the insertion shafts 531c) are provided in the moving member (corresponding to the slide mechanism portion 530), and the plurality of insertion shafts are made to correspond to the substrate member (corresponding to the substrate member 510). ) Is inserted into the guide groove (corresponding to the guide groove 511), and the moving member is slid and displaced along the guide groove by the driving force of the driving unit (corresponding to the driving unit 520).

  In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding displacement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of insertion shafts that are inserted into the guide grooves. On the other hand, if the number of insertion shafts is increased, the number of parts (corresponding to the collar C) for holding the insertion shafts (preventing their removal from the guide groove) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing the cost while stabilizing the slide displacement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) is provided on the front side where the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged. The first link member 541 is disposed on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 opposite to the above, and the first link member 541 is attached to one insertion shaft 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. Since they are connected, one collar C of the plurality of collars C for preventing the plurality of insertion shafts 531c from coming off from the guide groove 511 can also be used as the first link member 541. As a result, the number of the insertion shafts 531c is ensured, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized, and the component of the component (color C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c. The number of points can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, the second link member 542 is provided with the guide groove 511 with respect to the first link member 541 on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510, which is the side opposite to the front surface side on which the slide mechanism section 530 is disposed. Since the second link members 542 are arranged symmetrically with respect to each other and are connected to one insertion shaft 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, the first link member Not only can the effect (stabilization of the slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530) by making the supporting reaction force that the slide mechanism unit 530 receives from the 541 and the second link member 542 symmetric be achieved, but also among the plurality of collars C Since the color C of No. 1 can also be used by the second link member 542, it is possible to secure the number of the insertion shafts 531c and stabilize the slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530 (A layer base plate 531). At the same time, the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c can be reduced, and the cost can be further reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 on the back surface side of the substrate member 510, it is possible to stabilize the slide displacement and reduce the cost. Further, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 520 is configured with the crank mechanism (the crank gear 524, the connecting rod 525, and the connecting shaft 526), and the connecting groove 513 is formed in the substrate member 510, so that the connecting groove 513 is interposed. By connecting the connecting shaft 526 to the first link member 541, the drive unit 520 can be arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510. As a result, the constituent elements of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be concentrated on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the limited space can be effectively utilized and the constituent elements can be efficiently arranged. As a result, the size of the first combined operation unit 500 can be reduced.

  Particularly, in the first combination operation unit 500, the decoration portion 560 is arranged on the front surface side of the slide mechanism portion 530, so that the slide mechanism portion 530 and the decoration portion 560 are in the front-back direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B). And the dimension in the front-back direction increases accordingly. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, since the driving unit 520 can be arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, the driving unit 520 can be arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510. It can be arranged in a dead space formed on the side of the slide mechanism portion 530. That is, it is possible to arrange two elements of the slide mechanism portion 530 and the driving portion 520, which have relatively large dimensions, side by side in the left-right direction. Thereby, the dead space of the limited space can be effectively utilized, and the first coupling operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

  Further, in this case, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the first link member 541 is formed on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510 with the support shaft 527 as the center. Since the structure is rotated, the space for moving the first link member 541 can be made flat. That is, a space for moving the first link member 541 can be secured in a planar space on the back side of the substrate member 510, and it is necessary to secure a large space in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). There is no. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the size of the first coupling operation unit 500, particularly in the front-rear direction.

  The same applies to the second link member 542. By utilizing the connecting groove 514, the biasing spring 571 is disposed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, and the dead space described above is effectively utilized. The space for the movement of the second link member 542 can also be made planar, and as a result, the first coupling operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-back direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). it can.

  Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In this description, FIGS. 34 to 39 will be referred to as appropriate.

  40A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 40B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st combination operation unit 500 in the state where it was made. 41A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 41B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st combination operation unit 500 in the state where it was made. 40 and 41, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), in the state where the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, in the drive unit 520, the crank gear 524 is rotated in the direction of the arrow A1 so that the connecting rod 525 is interposed. The connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B1 (see FIG. 36), and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 raise the sliding holes 541c, 542c about the shaft support holes 541a, 542a. It is arranged in a posture rotated in the direction (upward in FIG. 40B). Therefore, the A-layer base plate 531 (FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is arranged on the upper end side (upper side of FIG. 40B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised. The open state (the retracted position is arranged) is formed.

  In this case, as described above, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts on the second link member 542. The urging force of the urging spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to be the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, the posture rotated in the direction of raising the sliding hole 542c around the shaft support hole 542a). ) Is operated in the direction of holding. Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or rocking a game machine) acts on the first coupling member 539 that should be in a stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 moves vertically. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction can be quickly converged by utilizing the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), in the drive unit 520, when the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the arrow B2 direction via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the arrow A2 direction. (Refer to FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are rotated around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a in the direction in which the sliding holes 541c and 542c are lowered (downward in FIG. 40B). .. As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms act (FIG. 38 and 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

  As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are moved downward in the sliding holes 541c, 542c about the shaft support holes 541a, 542a. Further rotation, the A layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 539c) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is arranged at the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 41(b)) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, so that the first coupling member A state in which 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged) is formed.

  41(a) and 41(b), in the drive unit 520, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the arrow B1 direction via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the arrow A1 direction. By doing so (see FIG. 36 ), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move in the direction (upward in FIG. 41( b )) in which the sliding holes 541 c, 542 c are raised around the shaft support holes 541 a, 542 a. Is rotated. As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism unit 530 is lifted along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms act (FIG. 38 and 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the first coupling member 539 is arranged (returned) to the retracted position.

  According to the present embodiment, since the slide mechanism unit 530 has a structure for slidingly displacing the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction via the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms, the sliding displacement of the first coupling member 539 can be prevented. It can speed up. On the other hand, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41(a) to the retracted position of FIG. 40(a), not only the first coupling member 539 but also the slide mechanism portion 530 Since it is necessary to raise each of the components described above against the action of gravity, the load on the drive motor 522 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to change to the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, centering around the shaft support hole 542a). The sliding hole 542c is caused to act in a direction in which the sliding hole 542c is held in a posture in which the sliding hole 542c is rotated. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41(a) to the retracted position in FIG. 40(a) against the action of gravity, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is assisted. Since it can be used as force, the drive force required for the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 520 can be reduced accordingly, and the capacity can be reduced.

  Here, the board member 510 is arranged such that the extending direction of the guide groove 511 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 40 and 41). In detail, the lower end side of the guide groove 511 is projected to the front side (front side, front side of FIG. 40A) of the substrate member 510 (the upper end side of the guide groove 511 is the rear side of the substrate member 510. It is disposed in a posture in which the rear side is retracted to the rear side of FIG. 40A). As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 has a forward tilted posture due to its own weight (a tilted posture so as to collapse in a direction away from the front face of the base member 510 (front side)). Since it can be suppressed, the load on the color C can be reduced accordingly, and the durability thereof can be improved.

  However, since the slide mechanism unit 530 is configured by stacking the respective elements thereof (for example, the A layer base plate 531, the B layer base plate 532, the C layer base plate 534, etc.), the substrate member 510 with respect to the vertical direction described above. If the inclination is made too large, the respective elements of the slide mechanism unit 530 are likely to come into close contact with each other, and the sliding resistance at the time of the slide displacement becomes large. Therefore, the above-mentioned inclination cannot be made sufficiently large, so that a relatively large load is applied to the color C.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the substrate member 510 is interposed between the slide mechanism portion 530 and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 that are connected (connected) to the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. Therefore, the forward tilted posture of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be regulated not only by the collar C but also by the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. As a result, the load on the collar C can be suppressed, the durability thereof can be improved, and the slide mechanism portion 530 can be slid (moved up and down) in a stable state.

  In particular, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively located above the center of the A layer base plate 531 in the longitudinal direction as described above (see FIG. 39). Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is in the forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is changed by the collar C, the first link member 541, and the second link member 542. This can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid and displaced (elevated) in a stable state.

  Next, the second combination operation unit 600 arranged below the first combination operation unit 500 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45.

  FIG. 42 is a front perspective view of the second coupling operation unit 600. 43A is a front view of the second combined movement unit 600, and FIG. 43B is a rear view of the second combined operation unit 600. The front case body 612 is not shown in FIG. 43(a). 42 and 43 show a state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the second coupling operation unit 600 includes a back case body 611 and a front case body 612, and a rear end of each of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 is rotatably supported. Link means (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622), a second coupling member 630 rotatably supported on the respective tip ends of the inner link member 621 and outer link member 622, and the inner link member 621. And a drive motor 640 that generates a drive force for displacing the outer link member 622, and a transmission unit (a pinion gear 651 and a transmission gear) for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 640 to the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. 652) and mainly.

  In the present embodiment, a pair of the link means, the second coupling member 630, the drive motor 640, and the transmission means is provided on each of the left and right sides of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, for a total of one pair. .. In this case, the set provided on the left side and the set provided on the right side of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are the width direction of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 (see FIG. 43(a) left and right). (Direction) The configuration is substantially the same, except that it is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line passing through the center and the shape of the decorative portion is different, and will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are members made of a resin material and formed in a plate shape. The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) and the transmission means (pinion gear 651 and transmission gear 652) are housed.

  In the back case body 611, a pair of guide grooves 611a formed by curving in an arc shape are formed. The guide groove 611a is curved in an arc shape centered on a base end shaft 621a described later (that is, formed in a shape in which a part of an annular shape centered on the base end shaft 621a is cut off), and the inner link member 621 is formed. A collar 621d that is rotatably supported is internally fitted to the back surface of the. The groove width of the guide groove 611a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the collar 621d. Therefore, as will be described later, when the inner link member 621 is rotated about the proximal shaft 621a, the collar 621d is guided along the extending direction of the guide groove 611a, so that the inner link member 621( It is possible to stabilize the rotation of the outer link member 622). As a result, the positional accuracy of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position can be improved.

  The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 have their proximal ends rotatably supported by the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 through the proximal shafts 621a and 622a, while the distal ends thereof have the distal shafts 621b, It is rotatably supported by the second coupling member 630 via 622b.

  In this case, in the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622, the distance between the proximal shaft 621a and the proximal shaft 622a and the distance between the distal shaft 621b and the distal shaft 622b are equal, and the proximal shaft 621a. And a distance between the tip end shaft 621b and a distance between the base end shaft 622a and the tip end shaft 622b are equalized to form a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, when the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotated about the base shafts 621a and 622a, the second coupling member 630 does not have a rotation center and is parallel (that is, shown in FIG. 43(a)). It will be moved while maintaining the posture.

  The second connecting member 630 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and is connected to the first connecting member 539 at the connecting position (see FIG. 32), and the lower surface of the first connecting member 539. An upper surface 630a with which the 539e abuts and an opposing surface 630b with which the other second joining member 630 abuts each other when adjacent to each other are formed.

  Note that the upper surface 630a is formed as a flat surface that is inclined downward toward the facing surface 630b in the front view of the second coupling member 630 shown in FIG. 43, and the facing surface 630b is formed as a flat surface parallel to the vertical direction. To be done. Therefore, when the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 are in contact with each other at the coupling position, the front view shape of the pair of second coupling members 630 on the upper surface 630a side is a V-shape with the center recessed. It is formed in a shape (see FIG. 44(b)). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is in contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 (see FIG. 32).

  Further, on the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, convex portions 630a1 each having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view are provided so as to protrude on the side of the facing surface 630b. The convex portion 630a1 is housed (concave-fitted) in the concave portion 539e1 which is provided in the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. By this concave-convex fitting, as described above, the relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position. Here, the convex portion 630a1 has a thickness dimension that becomes smaller toward the protruding tip. Therefore, when the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 is coupled (contacted) to the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539, it is easy to insert (internally fit) the convex portion 630a1 into the concave portion 539e1. it can.

  A gear portion 621c is integrally formed on the base end side of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is a fan-shaped portion that projects outward in the radial direction around the base shaft 621a, and a plurality of teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the fan-shaped portion. A transmission gear 652, which will be described later, is meshed with the gear 621c.

  The drive motor 640 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 611, and the pinion gear 651 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 640 protruding to the front side of the back case body 611. The transmission gear 652 is meshed with the pinion gear 651, and the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621 is meshed with the transmission gear 652 as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the operation of the second combined operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 43(a) will be referred to as appropriate.

  44(a) and 44(b) are front views of the second coupling operation unit 600, and the illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. Note that, in FIG. 44(a), the state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the middle of the retracted position and the coupling position is shown in FIG. 44(b), and the pair of second coupling members 630 is arranged in the coupling position. The respective states are shown.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 43(a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are tilted in the directions in which they are separated from each other, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated in the left and right directions. When the left and right drive motors 640 are rotationally driven from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 43A and the pinion gear 651 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted via the transmission gear 652 to the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is rotated about the base shaft 621a. As a result, the left and right inner link members 621 are respectively rotated around the base end shaft 621a, and the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) come close to each other, as shown in FIG. It stands up in the direction.

  When the left and right drive motors 640 are further driven to rotate from the state shown in FIG. 44(a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) come close to each other as shown in FIG. 44(b). Further, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. That is, the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the opposing surfaces 630b are in contact with each other. On the other hand, when the drive motor 640 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above case from the state shown in FIG. 44B, the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are separated from each other. 43A, the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position, as shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the combined operation of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 45 will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45 is a model view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a front view when the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position.

  As described above, the first coupling member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are coupled to each other from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. The coupling members 630 are arranged close to each other by the standing of the link mechanism so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right sides, and the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged on the left and right sides thereof, As shown in 32, this is performed by bringing the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, respectively.

  Here, in the first combination operation unit 500 and the second combination operation unit 600, as shown in FIG. 45, the inclination angle of the lower surface 539e of the first connection member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second connection member 630 with respect to the horizontal plane is an angle θ. It is said that. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is lowered (slide displaced) along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 45), the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. The vertical force F is a force component Fv (=F×cos θ) perpendicular to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a, and a force component Fp (=F×sin θ) parallel to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a. Can be disassembled. Here, the force F is approximated as a concentrated load that acts on the center of the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 in the width direction.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the angle θ of the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a with respect to the horizontal plane is set to be smaller than the angle α of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 with respect to the vertical direction. Further, in the present embodiment, when the action direction of the force component Fv is extended with the center in the width direction of the upper surface 630a as the starting point, the extension line is inside the base end shaft 622a of the outer link member 622 (the inner link member 621). Is formed so as to pass through the base shaft 621a).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a direction (vertical direction) substantially orthogonal to the direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other. Direction (FIG. 45 up and down direction), the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the second coupling member 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Then, it is possible to form a force in a direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other in the adjacent direction. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 can be coupled, but also the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled, and a plurality of members ( It is possible to secure the effect produced by joining the first joining member 539 and the pair of second joining members 630).

  That is, even in the conventional gaming machine, a pair of members are movably provided, the pair of members are retreated to different retracted positions, and the pair of members are moved from the different retracted positions to be arranged at the coupling position. There is one that connects the members of (1) to each other (see, for example, JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, at the joining position, when the joining is not performed properly, such as when a gap is formed between the pair of members, the effect produced by joining the pair of members is impaired. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the pair of members are symmetrically shaped, it is relatively easy to join the pair of members face to face, but three or more members should be properly connected ( That is, it was difficult to bond them while suppressing the generation of gaps.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 in the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 contact each other. Since it is possible to form a force in the direction in which the second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other, a gap is generated between the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. Not only can this be suppressed, but also the formation of a gap between the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second connecting members 630 can be suppressed, and these members can be connected to each other. That is, three or more members can be properly combined, and the effect of the combination can be secured.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 has a front view shape (see FIGS. 32 and 45) on the upper surface 630a side (FIG. 32 and FIG. 45 upper side). The shape shown in the drawing is a concave shape in which the center is recessed downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45), while the first coupling member 539 is a front view on the lower surface 539e side (lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape (the shape illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 45) is a protruding shape in which the center projects downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45) corresponding to the shape of the pair of second coupling members 630.

  Therefore, as described above, at the reference position, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is located at the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. When brought into contact with each other, the first coupling member 539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 630 due to the concave shape and the protruding shape, and the first coupling member 539 causes the pair of second coupling members 630. The player recalls a mode in which the two are expanded in a direction in which they are separated from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, so that the pair of second coupling members is in contact. It is possible to form a force in a direction in which the 630 are brought close to each other to couple the pair of second coupling members 630 while suppressing a gap from being generated between the facing surfaces 630 b. As a result, it can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the operation can be enhanced.

  Next, the annular motion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57.

  46 is a front perspective view of the ring operation unit 700 in a state where the ring forming member 790 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 47 is a ring in the state where the ring forming member 790 is arranged in the coupling position. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 700.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the circular ring operation unit 700 includes a pair of circular ring forming members 790 that are moved up and down and rotated via a link member 770, and as described above, the opening 211a (third symbol display). Below the device 81 (see FIG. 2)), the rear case 210 is disposed at a position on the rear side of the rotary operation unit 300 (see FIGS. 6 to 9). The circular ring operation unit 700 moves the pair of circular ring forming members 790 up and down while rotating them, and arranges them in the retracted position shown in FIG. 46 or the coupling position shown in FIG. 47.

  At the retracted position shown in FIG. 46, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are moved downward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is opened (FIG. 6). reference). On the other hand, at the connecting position shown in FIG. 47, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are rotated upward in the direction of approaching each other, and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are connected to each other to cause the third symbol display device. An annular shape is formed on the front side of 81 (see FIG. 10).

  In this case, according to the circular ring operation unit 700, when the pair of circular ring forming members 790 are raised upward and are arranged at the coupling position, the circular ring forming member 790 is mechanically moved to the coupling position (elevated position). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the pair of annular ring forming members 790 at the coupling position.

  48 is an exploded front perspective view of the annular operation unit 700 in which the exploded annular operation unit 700 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded view of the annular operation unit 700 in which the exploded annular operation unit 700 is viewed from the rear. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the annular operation unit 700 includes an intermediate case body 710, a rear case body 720 disposed on the back side of the intermediate case body 710, and an opposite side of the rear case 720. The front case body 730 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, the drive motor 740 disposed in the intermediate case 710 and generating the rotational drive force, and the rotational drive force of the drive motor 740 are transmitted. Gear group (first gear 751 to sixth gear 756), a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762) for converting the rotational movement transmitted through the gear group into a linear movement, and A pair of link members 770 whose base ends are rotatably supported by a pair of racks 762 in the rack and pinion mechanism, an elevating base body 780 in which the tips of the pair of link members 770 are axially supported, and its elevating base. The body 780 is mainly provided with a pair of ring-forming members 790 whose base ends are rotatably supported.

  The intermediate case body 710 holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism rotatably and slidably with the rear case body 720 arranged on the rear side, and at the same time, the front case body arranged on the front side. 730 is a member that holds the base end of the link member 770 so that it can be slidably displaced between the link member 730 and the main body 711 that is formed in a flat plate shape of a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and an insertion groove 712 that is formed as an opening in the main body 711. And a projecting part 713 projecting upward from the upper edge of the main body part 711.

  The insertion grooves 712 respectively allow the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body 711) to be inserted, and the insertion shafts 772 of the inserted pair of link members 770 to be inserted. The back side of the main body 711 is a groove-shaped opening for inserting into each of the insertion holes 762c of the pair of racks 762, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body 711. The width of the insertion groove 712 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The overhang portion 713 is a portion for coming into contact with the back surface of the link member 770 to suppress the swing of the link member 770 in the front-back direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 56), and the center of the main body portion 711 in the longitudinal direction. Is formed to have a substantially triangular shape in a front view that widens toward the upper edge of the main body 711 from the protruding end (widens), and its front surface 713a is the front surface 711a of the main body 711. They are formed so as to be flush with each other (smoothly connected without any step and parallel to each other).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) toward the upright state, the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 abuts the back surface of the link member 770 (FIGS. 47 and 56). Further, when the link member 770 is in the upright state, the link member 770 can be sandwiched between the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 and the column portion 732 of the case body 730 (see FIG. 47). . As a result, the link member 770 can contact the link member 770 in an upright state where the attitude of the link member 770 is particularly likely to be unstable and in the vicinity thereof, so that the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

  The edge of the overhang portion 713 is curved and formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. Therefore, as the link member 770 is erected (that is, as the posture thereof tends to become unstable), the area of the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 that can contact the back surface of the link member 770 can be increased, While the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed, it is possible to reduce the area in which the overhanging portion 713 is visually recognized from the front and prevent the appearance from being impaired.

  Further, in the overhanging portion 713, a head portion 713b formed at the tip end in the overhanging direction (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49) is projected to the front (front), and this head portion 713b of the front case body 730 described later. It is connected to the top of the pillar portion 732. Therefore, as will be described later, when the pair of link members 770 is erected upright, the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713 is provided between the pair of link members 770 facing each other.

  The rear case body 720 is a member that rotatably and slidably holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism between the rear case body 720 and the intermediate case body 710. An insertion groove 722 formed in the main body portion 721, a front end guide groove 723 and a rear end guide groove 724 arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722, and a gear group (second gear 752 to sixth gear 756). And a plurality of shafts 725 that rotatably support the pinion gear 761.

  The insertion groove 722 is formed by inserting the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 protruding from the back surface of the rack 762 (that is, the insertion shaft 772 inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710). It is a groove-shaped opening for receiving and is linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body 721. That is, the insertion groove 722 is formed at a position overlapping the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710 in a front view in the assembled state. The width of the insertion groove 722 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The front-end guide groove 723 and the rear-end guide groove 724 are groove-shaped openings for inserting the front-end guide piece 762a and the rear-end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762, respectively, and restricting the moving direction thereof. They are arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722 with a predetermined space therebetween. The front end guide groove 723 has a groove width set to be smaller than the rear end guide groove 724, and the rear end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 is formed in the front end guide groove 723 such that the rear end guide shaft 762b cannot be inserted therethrough. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress an assembling failure when assembling the rack 762 to the rear case body 720, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembling work.

  The front case body 730 is a member that slidably holds the pair of link members 770 between the front case body 730 and the intermediate case body 710, and includes a main body portion 731 formed in a flat plate shape of a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the main body portion 731. And a columnar column portion 732 that is disposed on the front surface of the column and that extends along the vertical direction.

  The back surface 731a of the main body portion 731 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711 and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 in the intermediate case body 710, and the link member 770 is in a tilted state as described later. When rotated (displaced) between the upright state, the back surface 731a of the main body portion 731, the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711, and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 are opposed to the front surface and the back surface of the link member 770. Abut. Thereby, the link member 770 can be rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54 ). it can.

  The column portion 732 is a portion for holding the guide rod 733 inside and for sandwiching the link member 770 between the guide member 733 and the projecting portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710, and the front surface (the front left side in the drawing of FIG. 48) is opened. It is formed in a box shape. The guide rod 733 is a member for guiding the lifting/lowering of the lifting/lowering base body 780, and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section from a metal material, and is provided inside the pillar portion 732 in a posture with its axis aligned in the vertical direction. Retained. In this way, by forming the pillar portion 732 in a box shape with an open front surface and housing the guide rod 733 inside the pillar portion 732, the guide rod 733 can be arranged using the dead space. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the ring operation unit 700 as a whole.

  As will be described later, the guide rod 733 is inserted into the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780, so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is set in the vertical direction (the guide rod 733 Guide in the axial direction). In this case, the guide rod 733 is arranged in front of the tooth surface of the rack 762 (on the front side) and behind the elevating base body 780 (main body 781) (on the back side), and will be described later. Thus, it is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the lifting base body 780 on the front side with respect to the rack 762 in an offset manner and ensuring a smooth lifting operation of the lifting base body 780.

  The drive motor 740 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, and has its drive shaft projected to the back side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711). A first gear 751 is fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 740, and the first gear 751 has a second gear 752 to a sixth gear 756 axially supported by a plurality of shafts 725 of the rear case body 720. Are sequentially meshed with each other, and the sixth gear 756 is meshed with a pinion gear 761 pivotally supported by a shaft 725 of the rear case body 720.

  As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism includes the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762. The pinion gear 761 is rotatably supported by the shaft 725 of the rear case body 720, and the pair of pinion gears 761 are sandwiched therebetween. Racks 762 are arranged so as to face each other with their tooth surfaces facing each other.

  The rack 762 has a front end guide piece 762a and a rear end guide shaft 762b protruding from one end and the other end of the rack 762 in the longitudinal direction, and an insertion hole 762c penetrating the side of the rear end guide shaft 762b. .. The front end guide piece 762a is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped projection, and the rear end guide shaft 762b is formed as a shaft body having a circular cross section. As described above, the front end guide piece 762a and the rear end guide shaft 762b are inserted into the front end guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 of the rear case body 720, so that the slide displacement (linear movement) of the rack 762 is performed. The direction is restricted to the extending direction of both guide grooves 723 and 724.

  The pair of link members 770 is a member for forming a link mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the rack and pinion mechanism to the elevating base body 780 and the ring forming member 790, and is a longitudinal direction. One side (base end) is connected to the rack 762, and the other longitudinal side (tip) is connected to the elevating base body 780 and the ring-forming member 790. Here, the detailed configuration of the link member 770 will be described with reference to FIG.

  50(a) is a front perspective view of the link member 770, FIG. 50(b) is a rear perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50(c) is a portion Lc of FIG. 50(a). FIG. 50D is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member 770 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld of FIG.

  The link member 770 includes a long plate-shaped main body 771, an insertion shaft 772 projecting from the back surface of the main body 771 at one longitudinal side (base end) of the main body 771, and the insertion shaft 772. A protruding wall portion 773 protruding from the front surface of the body portion 771 on the other side (tip) in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 771 on the opposite side, and a gear portion arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding wall portion 773. 774 and.

  As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is a shaft member having a circular cross section that is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion shaft 712 of the intermediate case body 710. The protruding wall portion 773 is a portion for offsetting the arrangement position of the gear portion 774 to the front (front) side of the main body portion 771, and is protruded from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at a protruding height h. The gear part 774 includes a shaft support hole 774a formed through the center thereof and a plurality of teeth 774b engraved on the outer periphery of the shaft support hole 774 as a center. 782 is inserted (axially supported) and meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the annular ring forming member 790 via the teeth 774b.

  In the present embodiment, the gear portion 774 (tooth 774b) is formed as a spur gear whose tooth lines are parallel to the axial direction, and the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 extend over the entire wall surface of the protruding wall portion 774. Then engraved. Therefore, even when the gear portion 774 is relatively displaced with respect to the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 which is the object of meshing due to the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) (FIG. 48 and FIG. 49), the tooth 774b extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 774 can be meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring-forming member 790, and the gears 792b and It is possible to prevent the meshing of the portion 774 and the gear portion 792 from coming off. Further, even when the relative displacement due to the bending or the twist described above occurs and the gear parts 774 and 792 are relatively displaced in the axial direction, the teeth extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall part 774 are engraved. Since the meshing area between the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) and the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) can be secured by the amount of 774b, uneven wear of these teeth 774b, 772b is suppressed and its durability is improved. Can be planned.

  Here, for example, if the body portion 771 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outward in the radial direction) of the gear portion 774, it is easy to secure the area of the seat surface at the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. However, in this embodiment, since the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (the end surface in the axial direction) of the gear portion 774, the protruding wall portion 773 can be secured to the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. The seating area is reduced.

  In this case, in the protruding wall portion 773, a wall surface (a wall surface on the axial center side of the shaft support hole 774 a) opposite to the wall surface on which the teeth 774 b of the gear portion 774 are formed by being extended and carved is the shaft support hole 774. Since it is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape centered on the axis, even if the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the shaft of the gear portion 774 is The seating surface area can be secured on the direction end surface, and the diameter of the collar C (see FIG. 49) arranged on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 can be increased by that amount. Furthermore, when the link member 770 (the main body 771, the protruding wall 773, and the gear 774) is integrally molded from a resin material, the protruding wall 773 is provided on the opposite side of the wall surface where the teeth 774b are formed. By forming the wall surface as a concave curved surface, not only the protruding wall portion 773 but also the entire wall thickness including the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 can be made uniform, and the moldability thereof can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the teeth 774b are engraved on the entire surface of the protruding wall 773 (that is, up to the connecting portion with the front surface of the main body 771), the area where the teeth 774b are formed is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the disengagement of the ring forming member 790 with the gear portion 792 (see FIGS. 48 and 49). Further, as described above, when the link member 770 (the main body portion 771, the protruding wall portion 773, and the gear portion 774) is integrally molded from a resin material, the teeth 774b extend only partway through the protruding wall portion 773. In the case where it is not performed, the wall thickness of the projecting wall portion 773 can be made uniform over the entire thickness, and the formability thereof can be further improved.

  As described above, in the link member 770, the protruding wall portion 773 is protruded from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at the protruding height h, and the gear portion 774 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding wall portion 773. Since it is provided, the gear portion 774 can be separated from the main body portion 771 by the protruding height h of the protruding wall portion 773. That is, in the assembled state, the disposition position of the elevating base body 780 can be separated (offset) from the rack 762 to the front (front) by the protrusion height h of the protrusion wall 773 (FIG. 55). And FIG. 57). The effect of this offset will be described later.

  It returns to FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, and demonstrates. The elevating base body 780 is a member that is vertically moved up and down between the retracted position and the coupling position by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770, and the main body 780 and the rear surface of the main body 780. A pair of shafts 782 that project from the shaft and pivotally support the gear part 774 (the shaft support hole 774a) of the link member 770, and the gear part 792 (the shaft support) of the ring-forming member 790 that is arranged in parallel below the pair of shafts 782. A pair of shafts 783 that pivotally support the hole 792a), and a pair of shafts 783 that are disposed on the back surface of the main body portion 781 below the pair of shafts 783 and that are vertically guided by the pillar portions 732 (guide rods 733) of the front case body 730. The guided portion 784 and the cover body 785 arranged on the back surface of the main body portion 781 are mainly provided.

  A plurality of insertion holes through which the guide rod 733 can be inserted are formed in the guided portion 784, and the guide rod 733 is inserted through the insertion holes, so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is the axial direction of the guide rod 733. It is restricted only to the direction along.

  The cover body 785 is a member that is disposed so as to face the axial end surfaces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 (see FIG. 51), and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. A portion 785a and an extending portion 785b that extends downward from the lower edge of the head portion in a strip shape and has a width narrower than that of the head portion 785a are integrally formed from a thin metal plate. . As will be described later, when a relative displacement occurs in the gear parts 774, 792, the cover body 785 (the head part 785a and the extension part 785b) should be in contact with the axial end faces of the gear parts 774, 792. Thus, the relative displacement can be suppressed, and the meshing state between the gear portions 774 and the meshing state between the gears 774 can be appropriately maintained.

  The gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 are inserted through the shafts 782 and 783 through the shaft support holes 774a and 792a of the gear portions 774 and 792, respectively. The collar C having a larger diameter than the shaft support holes 774a and 792a is provided at the tip of the shafts 782 and 783, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed, so that the shafts 782 and 783 are held rotatably supported. It

  The pair of circular ring forming members 790 are members that are rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770 and that form a circular ring shape at the coupling position. Mainly includes a main body portion 791 formed in a shape divided into two, and a gear portion 792 arranged on one side (base end) in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 791. The gear portion 792 is a portion that is axially supported by the elevating base body 780 and meshes with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. The gear portion 792 has a shaft supporting hole 792a formed through the center and a center of the shaft supporting hole 792a. And a plurality of teeth 792b engraved on the outer periphery thereof.

  A magnet (not shown) is embedded on the other side (tip) in the circumferential direction of the main body 791 on the side opposite to the side on which the gear 792 is arranged, forming a ring shape at the coupling position. When doing so (see FIG. 47 ), the tips of the ring-forming member 790 can be brought into close contact with each other using the magnetic force of the magnet. As a result, the annular shape can be reliably formed by the pair of annular forming members 790.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a connection state of the link member 770 with the elevating base body 780 and the ring-forming member 790 will be described. FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged rear view of the annular motion unit 700. Note that FIG. 51 illustrates a state where the elevating base body 780 is arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 54 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the elevating base body 780, the tip ends (gear portions 774) of the pair of link members 770 are pivotally supported by the pair of shafts 782 (see FIG. 49), respectively, and the pair of shafts 783 (see FIG. 49), the base ends (gear portions 792) of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are pivotally supported, and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 are meshed with each other.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 drives the gear portion 774 (the shaft 782, see FIG. 49). The center of rotation is rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780, and the rotation is transmitted to the circular ring forming member 790 via the meshing of the gear portions 774, 792, so that the circular ring forming member 790 is rotated. (783, see FIG. 49) as a center with respect to the gear unit lifting base body 780. At the same time, the pair of link members 770 are erected or tilted with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730, so that the elevating base body 780 is moved up and down with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730 (FIG. 52). To FIG. 57).

  Here, the elevating base body 780 is connected to the tip of a link member 770 formed in the shape of a long plate, and ascends and descends with respect to each case body 710, 720, 730 via the link member 770, the elevating operation is performed. At times, due to the bending and twisting of the link member 770 (main body 771), the lifting base body 780 is likely to vibrate or shake in the front-back direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 51). Also, the ring-forming member 790 itself is formed in a long plate shape, and the tip end opposite to the base end connected to the elevating base body 780 is a free end, so during the elevating operation, It is easy to generate vibration or shaking with respect to the lifting base body 780. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the magnet is embedded in the tip of the ring-forming member 790, the weight of the tip becomes heavier, and the ring-forming member 790 is more likely to generate vibration and shake accordingly.

  Such longitudinal vibration or shaking of the elevating base body 780 causes relative displacement between the link member 770 and the elevating base body 780. That is, a relative displacement is caused between the gear portion 774 integrally formed with the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790. Similarly, vibration or shaking of the ring-forming member 790 with respect to the elevating base body 780 causes relative displacement between the gear portion 792 integrally formed with the ring-forming member 790 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. .. Therefore, the meshing state of the gear parts 774, 792 becomes unstable, and the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790 and the elevating/lowering operation of the elevating base body 780 are not properly performed due to poor transmission of the driving force. , 792 is accelerated and the durability is lowered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cover body 785 is arranged on the back surface of the elevating base body 780, and the cover body 785 is provided on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. It is placed facing the. As a result, the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) causes vibration or shaking in the elevating base body 780 or the ring-forming member 790, and even if relative displacement occurs between the gear portions 774 and 790. , The cover body 785 (the head portion 785a and the extension portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774, 790, thereby suppressing the relative displacement between the gear portions 774, 792, and the meshing thereof. The state can be maintained properly. As a result, the transmission failure of the driving force can be suppressed, the rotating operation of the annular ring forming member 790 and the elevating operation of the elevating base body 780 can be properly performed, and the wear of the gear parts 774, 792 can be suppressed, The durability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the head portion 785a of the cover body 785 is arranged above the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the extended portion 785b of the cover body 785 is arranged in the link member 770. It is arranged between the gear parts 774 and between the gear parts 792 of the annular ring forming member 790. Therefore, of the axial end faces of the gear parts 774 and 792, the main body part 771 of the link member 770 and the main body part 791 of the ring-forming member 790 are opposite to each other with the shaft 782 and the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) interposed therebetween. The head portion 785a and the extended portion 785b of the cover body 785 are brought into contact with the axial end surface of the gear body 774 and the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be effectively restricted.

  For example, when the link member 770 is in the upright state or in a state close to the upright state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 51), the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is sandwiched between the main body 771 of the link member 770. Since the head portion 785a of the cover member 785 is arranged on the opposite side, the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 can be more effectively performed by the head portion 785a of the cover body 785. Can be regulated. Similarly, for example, when the link member 770 is in the tilted state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 52) or in a state close to the tilted state, the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is attached to the main body 771 of the link member 770. ), the extending portion 785b of the cover member 785 is disposed on the opposite side, and therefore, the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 is prevented. It can be regulated effectively by 785b.

  On the other hand, regarding the ring-forming member 790, regardless of its rotational position (that is, whether the link member 770 is in the upright state or the tilted state), the left and right of the gear portion 792 (left and right in FIG. 51). Since the main body portion 791 of the annular ring forming member 790 is disposed in the main body portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790, the extending portion of the cover member 785 is provided on the opposite side of the main body portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 with the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) interposed therebetween. By disposing 785b, the displacement of the gear portion 792 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 791 of the annular ring forming member 790 can be effectively restricted by the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, each gear portion 774 of the pair of link members 770 is not only meshed with the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 located therebelow, but also the gear portions 774 that are adjacent to each other on the left and right sides are connected to each other. Is also meshed. Similarly, each gear portion 792 of the pair of ring-forming members 790 is not only meshed with each gear portion 774 of the link member 770 located above it, but also the gear portions 792 adjacent to each other on the left and right are meshed with each other. To be done.

  As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the rotational operation of the pair of ring-forming members 790. That is, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and further transmitted from the pair of link members 770 to the pair of annular ring forming members 790 (FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). In this case, the pair of racks 762 of the rack and pinion mechanism are independent of each other with respect to the pinion gear 761. Therefore, when the pair of rack members 770 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are also independent of each other, the phase shift amount of the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 (for example, backlash amount or dimensional tolerance) is paired with the rack 762. , The phase shift amount of the link member 770 with respect to the rack 762 (for example, the amount of rattling of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c) differs between the pair of link members 770, and the ring forming member with respect to the link member 770. The phase shift amount of 790 (for example, the amount of rattling of the shafts 782, 783 with respect to the shaft support holes 774a, 792a, or the amount of rattling of the teeth 792b with respect to the teeth 774b) differs between the pair of annular forming members 790. Due to the accumulation of the phase shifts, the phase shifts occur in the rotational operation of the pair of ring-forming members 790, and the synchronization accuracy deteriorates.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are meshed with each other and the gear portions 792 of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are meshed with each other, so that the above-mentioned phase shift causes the driving force. Even if it occurs in the transmission path of the above, the phase shift is not expressed in the rotation operation of the annular ring forming member 790 (that is, the phase shift can be absorbed in the most downstream of the drive force transmission path). As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy in the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790.

  Next, the operation of the annular motion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57. In this description, FIGS. 46 to 51 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 52 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 700 schematically illustrating the annular motion unit 700 in which the pair of circular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 53 is the LIII- of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 700 in a LIII line. FIG. 54 is a schematic rear view of the circular ring operation unit 700 schematically showing the circular ring operation unit 700 in which the pair of circular ring forming members 790 is arranged at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the coupling position. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit 700 taken along the line LV-LV in FIG. 54. 56 is a schematic rear view of the circular ring operation unit 700 schematically showing the circular ring operation unit 700 in which a pair of circular ring forming members 790 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 57 is a view of LVII- of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 700 in a LVII line.

  52 to 57, the outer shell structure including the intermediate case body 510, the rear case body 520, and the front case body 530, the drive motor 740, and the gear group (first group) are shown in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. Illustration of the drive structure including the first gear 751 to the sixth gear 756) or the cover body 785 is omitted. However, in FIGS. 52, 54, and 56, the positions of the upper edges of the main body portion 711 and the overhanging portion 713 (front surfaces 711a and 713a) of the intermediate case body 710, and the main body portion 731 (back surface 731a) of the front case body 730. The position of the upper edge in () is schematically illustrated using a chain double-dashed line.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the state where the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are developed in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the tip side thereof (tip guide piece 762a). The tooth surface of the side) is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, the pair of link members 770 whose base end sides (insertion shafts 772) are pivotally supported by the rear end sides (insertion holes 762c) of the pair of racks 762 are in a tilted state, and the pair of link members 770 are The elevating base body 780 having the tip side (gear portion 774) axially supported is arranged at the lowermost position. In addition, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are expanded (distributed to the left and right) in the directions away from each other.

  When the drive motor 540 is driven from this state (the state where the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position), and the rotational drive force thereof is transmitted to the pinion gear 761 via the gear group (FIGS. 48 and 49). 52), the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52, and as the pinion gear 761 rotates, the pair of racks 762 shortens the expanded length thereof (the insertion holes 762c on the rear end side are brought closer to each other). It is moved linearly in the direction of letting. As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually erected by displacing the base end sides (insertion shafts 772) toward the center (that is, toward the directions toward each other).

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, relative rotation of the pair of link members 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780 is formed, and the rotation is transmitted via the gear portions 774 and 792 to the pair of annular ring forming members. By being transmitted to 790, the pair of ring-forming members 790 is relatively rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780, and the tips of the pair of ring-shaped members 790 are brought close to each other. At the same time, the elevating operation of the pair of link members 770 forms a relative displacement of the elevating base body 790 with respect to the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and rack 762), and the elevating base 790 is raised.

  As described above, in the ring operation unit 700, the lifting base body 780 is pivotally supported by the tips of the pair of link members 770 whose base ends are pivotally supported by the rack and pinion mechanism, so that the pair of link members 770 is erected or tilted. While allowing the elevating base body 780 to move up and down by further engaging the gear part 792 of the ring-forming member 790 whose base end is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 with the gear part 774 of the link member 770, The ring member 790 can be rotated by the relative rotation of the link member 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780.

  That is, means for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 740 to the elevating base body 790 (elevating means) and means for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 740 to the ring-forming member 790 (rotating means) are individually provided. Since the link member 770 can be used as the link member 770, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. Further, the rotational movement of the ring-forming member 790 and the linear movement in the vertical direction can be performed in parallel, that is, the ring is not formed in a fixed position but the position is changed in the vertical direction. Since the rings are formed in order, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 are engaged with each other, and the link member 770 is engaged through the engagement of these gears 774 and 792. Is transmitted to the ring-forming member 790. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, when the pair of link members 770 is erected, the position of the center of gravity becomes higher. Due to the bending and twisting of the member 770 (main body 771), vibration and shaking of the elevating base body 780 (and a pair of ring-forming members 790) in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 54, horizontal direction in FIG. 55) occur. It becomes easier (the amount of displacement in the front-back direction increases).

  The bending and twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) or the annular ring forming member 790 (main body portion 791) or the vibration and shaking in the front-back direction are integrally formed on the link member 770 and the annular ring forming member 790. By affecting the gear portions 774 and 792 and relatively displacing the gear portions 774 and 792, there is a risk that the gear portions 774792 will be out of mesh. Even if it is possible to avoid the disengagement of the gear portions 774 and 792, the meshing state (meshing area) becomes unstable, and the surface pressure concentrates on a part of the tooth surface. , 792b may be unevenly worn, resulting in a decrease in durability.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the link member 770 has the tooth 774b extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 that connects the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 (see FIG. 50). ) Even when the above-described relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 occurs, it is possible to easily maintain the meshing of the gear portions 774 and 792 by the extension of 774b. As a result, not only can the disengagement be suppressed, but also the meshed state can be stabilized, uneven wear of the teeth 774b, 792b can be suppressed, and the durability thereof can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of ring-forming members 790 is arranged at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the combined position (specifically, the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 is disposed). When the rack is arranged at an intermediate position of the relative movable range) and the standing angle of the pair of link members 770 reaches a predetermined angle, the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 and the teeth engraved on the protruding wall portion 773 are formed. The tooth 774b connected to 774b (see FIG. 50) starts meshing with the tooth 792b in the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790.

  Therefore, the range from the state shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 to the state shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 described later (that is, the rising angle of the link member 770 becomes large, so that the vertical movement of the elevating base body 790 and In the range in which the shaking easily occurs and the meshing of the gears 774 and 792 is most likely to be disengaged), the tooth 774b extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 can be effectively used. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent disengagement of the gears 774 and 792 or improve durability of the teeth 774b and 792b.

  From the state shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, the pinion gear 761 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52 by the drive of the drive motor 740, and the pair of racks 762 are further shortened in the deployment length (rear end). When linearly moved in the direction in which the side insertion holes 762c come close to each other), the pair of link members 770 are erected substantially vertically. That is, the direction connecting the shaft 782 of the elevating base body 780 (see FIG. 49) and the insertion shaft 782 of the link member 770 is substantially vertical. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and the tips of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are brought into contact with each other, so that the ring shape is changed. It is formed.

  In this case, when the pair of ring-forming members 790 is arranged at the coupling position (that is, when the pair of link members 770 is erected to the upright state (the posture along the vertical direction)), the pair of link members is formed. Between the facing surfaces of 770, the connecting portion between the pillar portion 732 of the front case body 730 and the protruding portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 (in the present embodiment, the head portion 713b of the protruding portion 713, see FIGS. 48 and 49). Are provided, and the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion (the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713) are brought into contact with the facing surfaces of the pair of link members 770 (see FIG. 56 ), so that the pair having the annular shape is formed. The postures of the circular ring forming member 790 and the lifting base body 780 supporting the pair of circular ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

  That is, at the coupling position, the pair of link members 770 are erected upright and the center of gravity is increased, so that the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right (left and right in FIG. 56) about the insertion shaft 772. In addition, the rack 762 is easily moved in the direction of the linear movement (left and right direction in FIG. 56) by the left and right rotation of the pair of link members 770. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the postures of the link member 770 and the rack 762, and as a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 arranged at the tip of the link member 770 are also unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting portion (overhang portion) between the front case body 730 (column portion 732) and the intermediate case body 710 (overhang portion 713) is provided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770. Since the head portion 713b) of 713 is provided, the connecting portion (head portion 713b) causes the pair of link members 770 to rotate about the insertion shaft 772 in the left-right direction and the rack 762 to move linearly. Can regulate the movement of. Accordingly, the pair of link members 770 can be maintained in the upright state, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

  Further, since the pair of link members 770 are arranged so as to face each other substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction (the left-right direction of FIGS. 52, 54, and 56), the link member 770 is tilted relatively downward (for example, FIG. 52 to FIG. (Up to 55), the pair of link members 770 face to each other while the pair of link members 770 try to rotate to the left and right (the left and right direction in FIGS. 52 and 54) about the insertion shaft 772. 770 can cancel each other and maintain their posture.

  On the other hand, since the link member 770 may be formed in a flat plate shape, it is difficult to maintain its posture with respect to the displacement in the front-back direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). In this case, in the present embodiment, the base end side (insertion shaft 772 side) of the link member 770 is sandwiched by the facing surfaces of the intermediate case body 710 and the front case body 730. That is, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state, the front case body 730 (main body portion 731) is attached to the front surface and the back surface on the base end side of the link member 770. The back surface 731a and the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) can be brought into contact with each other. Thus, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-back direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). You can As a result, the elevation base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be raised and lowered while stabilizing their postures.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a bulge portion 713 is formed to bulge upward in the widthwise central portion of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the bulge portion 713 is As shown in FIG. 56, as the widthwise central portion is approached (that is, as the link member 770 is erected), the position of the upper edge of the front surface 713a is increased (that is, abutted on the back surface of the link member 770). The possible area is increased).

  As described above, the position of the upper edge of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) is raised not by raising the position of the upper edge of the front surface 711a entirely, but by raising only the central portion. The closer the link member 770 is to the standing state, the more the appearance is impaired by the wall surface of the intermediate case body 710 (or the area where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed is reduced), while the extension 713 of the protruding portion 713 is reduced. It is possible to increase the contactable area between the front surface 713a and the back surface of the link member 770 to enhance the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member 770 (suppressing the swinging in the front-rear direction). As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) in the vicinity of the upright state while suppressing the deterioration of the appearance. That is, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be stably maintained in a stopped state at the combined position, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 near the combined position. It is possible to raise and lower while stabilizing.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the projecting portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 has its front surface 713a retracted to the retracted position (that is, tilted to the lowermost position). The shape is set so that it can come into contact with the back surface of the 770 (see FIG. 46). Accordingly, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are stably maintained in a stopped state at the combined position, and the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are provided near the combined position. For the purpose of raising and lowering while stabilizing the posture of the robot, the portion (overhanging portion 713) in which the height position of the upper edge thereof is raised is used to raise and lower the base 780 disposed at the retracted position (lowermost) and The effect of stably maintaining the posture of the pair of ring-forming members 790 in the stopped state can be obtained at the same time.

  When the drive motor 740 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above case from the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pinion gear 761 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 56, and the pinion gear 761 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the pair of racks 762 are deployed (that is, linearly moved in the direction in which the rear end side insertion holes 762c are separated from each other). As a result, the pair of link members 770 is gradually tilted, and the pair of ring-forming members 790 is retracted to the retracted position as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53.

  Here, in the ring operation member 700, the weight of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts on the rack and pinion mechanism (the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762) via the pair of link members 770. To be done. That is, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of circular ring forming members 790 act in the direction in which the pair of racks 762 are deployed via the pair of link members 770. Therefore, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of circular ring forming members 790 may be lowered from the combined position. In this case, the descent of the elevating base body 780 is restricted by opposing the driving force of the drive motor 740 against the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 (that is, the elevating base body 780 is coupled. In the structure (holding in position), the consumed energy required for the drive motor 740 increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the protruding wall portion 773 is provided between the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the protruding height of the protruding wall portion 773 is increased. The gear portion 774 is offset from the main body portion 711 to the front (front) side by the amount of h (see FIG. 50(d)). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the elevating base body 780 is parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack 762 (that is, the paper surface of FIGS. 54 and 56). The thickness dimension of the link member 770 (that is, the total dimension of the thickness dimension of the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 and the projecting height h of the projecting wall portion 773) is shown on the front side, the left side of FIGS. 55 and 57). It is offset (separated) from the rack 762 by the amount.

  As a result, the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 acts on the rack 762 via the link member 770 even in the offset direction described above. That is, as the force component applied from the link member 770 to the rack 762, a force component in the direction in which the elevating base body 780 is offset can be generated, and a force component for moving the rack 762 in the movement direction can be generated accordingly. Can be made smaller. As a result, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, at the coupling position, the link member 770 is erected in a posture along the vertical direction, and the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the elevating base body 780 and the link member 770 are inserted. The direction connecting the shaft 772 is substantially orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack 762. Therefore, when the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 act on the rack 762 via the link member 770, the rack 762 is used as a force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction of developing (i.e., the direction of tilting the link member 770 in the standing state). Accordingly, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be held at the coupling position, and as a result, the consumed energy required by the drive motor 740 can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In detail, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the distance T1 between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 56) is the insertion axis of the pair of link members 770. It is made smaller than the horizontal distance T2 between 772 (T1<T2). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are erected in a posture in which each of the link members 770 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (that is, the posture in which the pair of link members 770 has a V shape). In this way, by placing the pair of link members 770 in a V-shape, the drive motor 740 is moved to the above-described position in order to start the operation from the state (coupling position) shown in FIG. 56 to the retracted position. When rotationally driving in the opposite direction to the case, the deployment of the pair of racks 762 (that is, the tilting of the pair of link members 770) due to the rotational driving can be started easily and reliably.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since a magnet is embedded in the tip of the main body 791 of the ring-forming member 790 and the tips of the main body 791 are magnetically attached, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the elevating base body 780 and the pair of circular ring forming members 790 at the coupling position. On the other hand, when starting the operation from the coupling position to the retracted position, it is necessary to release the magnetic force of the magnet. In this case, it is necessary to keep the pair of link members 770 in a V-shape (that is, to set T1<T2) so as to maintain the coupled state at the coupled position and start the operation from the coupled position to the retracted position. This is particularly effective in satisfying both securing of releasing the coupled state at the time.

  Here, the magnet embedded in the tip of the main body 791 of the ring-forming member 790 may be omitted. In this case, the distance T1 between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 56) and the distance T2 between the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 in the horizontal direction are substantially equal to each other. It is preferable to make them the same (T1=T2) or to make the former larger than the latter (T2<T1). Accordingly, even when the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position.

  In this embodiment, the guide rod 733 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and on the rear side (right side in FIG. 57) of the lifting base body 780 (main body 781). To be done. The guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780, through which the guide rod 733 is inserted, is arranged at the lowermost part of the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781). That is, in the direction of the forward offset of the elevating base body 780 with respect to the rack 762, the portion where the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762, the elevating base body 780, and the pair of annular forming members. A guide rod 733 is arranged at a position between the center of gravity of the structure composed of 790 and the elevation base body 780 is guided up and down through the guide rod 733 and the guided portion 784. With this arrangement, it is possible to achieve both the effect of offsetting the elevating base body 780 on the front side with respect to the rack 762 described above and ensuring a smooth elevating operation of the elevating base body 780.

  Next, the swing motion unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64.

  The rocking motion unit 800 includes the two arm members 820 as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 11), and is composed of two units for moving (displacement) the both arm members 820. That is, the rocking motion unit 800 is composed of two units which are disposed above and below the rear case 210 in the front view of the rear case 210, and are arranged on the left and right sides with the opening 211a interposed therebetween. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) the arm member 820 is the same in the two units, in the following, one of these two units (on the left side of the opening 211a) will be described. The provided unit (see FIGS. 7 and 11) will be described as a swing motion unit 800.

  58 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 800 when the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 59 is a swing motion unit when the arm member 820 is extended to the projecting position. 8 is a front perspective view of 800. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the swing motion unit 800 includes an arm member 820 whose base end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 830 which applies a rotational driving force to the arm member 820. The arm member 820 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 58 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of hanging vertically downward, and is retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 6), while being stretched. At the projecting position, the arm member 820 is in a posture in which the tip is lifted upward and is tilted obliquely downward, and the tip is projected to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5).

  In this case, in this embodiment, when the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position shown in FIG. 59, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the projecting position as described later. Therefore, it is not necessary to oppose the driving force of the drive motor 830 so that the arm member 820 does not rotate toward the retracted position due to the action of gravity (weight of itself). It is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 830 required to hold the drive motor 830. This detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking motion unit 800, which is a front view of the rocking motion unit 800 that has been disassembled. Further, FIG. 61A is a rear view of the swing motion unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a swing view in the portion LXIb of FIG. 61A. 9 is a partially enlarged rear view of the operation unit 800. FIG. 61(a) and 61(b), the swing motion unit 800 with the mounting base 810 removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in the swing motion unit 800, a mounting base 810 arranged in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7) and a proximal end of the mounting base 810 are rotatably supported. An arm member 820, a drive motor 830 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the arm member 820, and a front case body 840 in which the drive motor 830 is provided and in front of the mounting base 810. , Is mainly provided.

  The mounting base 810 is a member for accommodating the base end of the arm member 820 and the drive motor 830 between it and the front case body 840, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view. The mounting base 810 is provided with a shaft 811 projecting from the front surface thereof and rotatably supporting the arm member 820.

  The arm member 820 has a main body 821 formed in an elongated shape, a groove 822 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the proximal end side of the main body 821, and a main body 821 opposite to the groove 822. A decorative portion 823 which is provided on the front surface of the distal end side of the main body portion 821 and is formed as a decorative body, and a shaft supporting hole 824 which is formed through the main body portion 821 at a position between the decorative portion 823 and the groove portion 821. Mainly prepared for.

  The groove portion 822 includes a first groove 822a extending linearly and a second groove 822b connected to one end of the first groove 822a and curved and extending in an arc shape. The groove 822b is formed as an L-shaped groove when viewed from the front. In other words, in the groove portion 822, the recessed portion provided in one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other is the second groove 822b.

The arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that the protruding pin 833 is arranged at the end point of the first groove 822a (the connection position between the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) (see FIG. 63(b)). In, the shape is matched with an arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Further, the groove widths of the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b are set to have the same size as each other. The arm member 820 has its shaft support hole 824 inserted with the shaft 811 of the mounting base 810 so that the base end thereof is inserted. Is rotatably supported by the mounting base 810. In this case, the contact surface portion 841 of the front case body 840 is brought into contact with the arm member 820 on the front surface of the main body portion 821 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 824 (FIG. 61(b)). reference). As a result, the arm member 820 is held such that its base end is rotatable between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840 facing each other.

  The drive motor 830 has a plate-shaped drive arm 832 having a base end fixed to the drive shaft 831 and extending radially outward from the drive shaft 831, and a protrusion provided at the tip of the drive arm 832. The mounting pin 833 is mainly provided, and the protruding pin 833 is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the front case body 840 by a fastening screw.

  As described above, the projecting pin 833 is a portion that is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and is the same or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 822 (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) of the arm member 820. It is formed as a cylindrical body having a diameter. Therefore, when the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, the protruding pin 833 is moved within the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820 along the extending direction of the groove portion 822, and as a result, the arm member 820. Is rotated about the axis 811.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, the swing motion of the swing motion unit 800 will be described. In this description, FIG. 61 will be referred to as appropriate.

  62 to 64 are views for explaining a process of moving the arm member 820 of the swing motion unit 800 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series, and FIGS. 62(a), 63(a) and 63(a) and FIG. 64(a) is a rear view of the swing motion unit 800, and FIGS. 62(b), 63(b) and 64(b) are portions LXIIb and 63(a) of FIG. 62(a), respectively. 64] is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit 800 in a portion LXIIIb in FIG. 64A and a portion LXIVb in FIG. 64A.

  Note that, in FIG. 62, the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, and the arm member 820 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position. In FIG. 63, the arm member 820 is in the extended position. FIG. 64 illustrates a state immediately after the arm member 820 reaches the extended position and a state in which the drive motor is further rotationally driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), when the arm member 820 is arranged at the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a downwardly hung posture, and the protruding pin 833 is The groove 822 is located at the starting point of the first groove 822a (the end opposite to the side connected to the second groove 822b, the right side in FIG. 61(b)).

  In this retracted position, the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 821a protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 821 of the arm member 820 faces the restriction surface 812 on the side wall of the mounting base 810 at a predetermined interval. Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated about the shaft 811 in response to an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player hitting or rocking the game machine), the protrusion 821a contacts the restriction surface 812. The rotation of the arm member 820 can be regulated by bringing them into contact with each other, and the rotation can be quickly converged.

  The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) (the state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the retracted position), and the drive arm 832 is moved to the left in FIG. 61(b). When it is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise), the protruding pin 833 is moved toward the end point of the groove portion 822 in the first groove 822a (the side connected to the second groove 822b, the left side in FIG. 61B). .

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the arm member 820 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the shaft support hole 824 in FIG. 61B. The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is further rotationally driven, and the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 62B. As a result, the protruding pin 833 is the end point of the groove portion 822 in the first groove 822a. 63A and 63B, the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position as shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B.

  Here, also in the conventional gaming machine, the first shaft (corresponding to the shaft 811), the moving member (corresponding to the arm member 820) rotated about the first shaft, and the driving force applied to the moving member. There is also a drive motor (corresponding to the drive motor 830) for rotating the moving member about the first axis as the center of rotation by the driving force of the drive means (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position (corresponding to the projecting position), it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. In this case, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the driving force of the drive motor is opposed to the gravity (the weight of the moving member) to restrict the movement (lowering) of the moving member (that is, the moving member is held at the raised position). Energy consumption necessary for holding the moving member is large.

  On the other hand, according to the swing motion unit 400 of the present embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 830 can be released by mechanically holding the arm member 820 in the extended position, and the arm member 820 is extended. It is possible to suppress the energy consumption required to hold the position.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the state shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b) (the protruding pin 833 reaches the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822, and the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position). Immediately after the start), the drive motor 830 is further driven to rotate. As a result, the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 62( b ), and as shown in FIGS. 64( a) and 64 (b ), the projecting pin 833 causes the groove 822 to move. To be moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second groove 822b is connected to the end point of the first groove 822a (a concave portion is provided on one inner wall surface of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). In the state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position, the projecting pin 833 is moved into the second groove 822b (on one inner wall surface of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). Since the protruding pin 833 is received in the recessed recess, the arm member 820 is mechanically held in the projecting position (the arm member 820 is centered on the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811)). Can be regulated to be rotated). That is, even if the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the extended position, and the amount of the drive motor 830 required to hold the arm member 820 in the extended position is consumed accordingly. Energy can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, with respect to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833, the projecting pin 833 and the shaft supporting hole 824 (the shaft 811) are connected. ) Is substantially orthogonal to each other, and the inner wall surfaces of the second groove 822b of the portion where the projecting pin 833 is located are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Is formed as.

  Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft support hole 824 (the shaft 811), the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b moves in a direction that coincides with the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Since the projecting pin 833 is pressed, even if the arm member 820 is rotated and the projecting pin 833 is pressed by the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b, the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 cannot be rotated. That is, the arm member 820 cannot be rotated.

  Therefore, even when the arm member 820 is rocked by the player hitting or rocking the game machine in a state where the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 is pivotally supported. Rotation around the shaft 824 (the shaft 811) can be restricted, and as a result, it can be reliably held in the extended position.

  In this case, as described above, in the arc shape of the second groove 822b, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the projecting pin 833 is the end point of the first groove 822a (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b). In the state of being arranged at the connection position), it is matched with an arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Therefore, when the projecting pin 833 arranged at the end point of the first groove 822b is moved (received) into the second groove 822b (that is, when the state shown in FIG. 63 is changed to the state shown in FIG. 64). In addition, since the movement locus of the projecting pin 833 and the shape of the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b are matched, it is possible to prevent the posture of the arm member 820 arranged at the projecting position from changing. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 63, after the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position, the posture of the arm member 820 at the projecting position is prevented from changing (while being kept in the stopped state). The protruding pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b, and the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the projecting position.

  Here, the groove portion 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the side opposite to the shaft supporting hole 824 (the side away from the shaft supporting hole 824) (of the first groove 822a). Even if the inner wall surfaces of the inner wall surfaces facing each other on the side opposite to the shaft support hole 824 have a recessed portion), mechanical holding of the arm member 820 can be performed similarly to the case of the present embodiment. It is possible. However, in this case, it is necessary to switch the rotation direction of the drive motor 830 when moving (accepting) the projecting pin 833 into the second groove 822b after the arm member 820 is arranged at the extended position. Occurs, the control becomes complicated, and the operation reliability decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove portion 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the shaft support hole 824 side (the side close to the shaft support hole 824). The concave portion is formed on the inner wall surface on the shaft support hole 824 side of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other.) Therefore, the arm member 820 can be moved to the retracted position without switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 830. Can be placed in the extended position and the recessed pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 in the extended position. As a result, the control can be simplified and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 are formed as through holes in the main body portions 451a and 462a in the combined operation unit 400 has been described. However, the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 may be recesses having a bottom. Even in the case of a bottomed recess, by inserting a jig into the recess by the same method as in the above embodiment, the mounting position and the like can be positioned, while comparing with the case of forming a through hole. Then, since the rigidity of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 can be secured, the durability thereof can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the combined operation unit 400, by making the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 different, the opening/closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 is performed as a non-parallel opening/closing operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first and second pinion leg members 482 and 483 have the same length, and the opening and closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 are non-parallel. Of course, it is possible.

  In the above embodiment, in the combined motion unit 400, the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the rack portion 481b and the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c of the second pinion leg member 483 and the rack portion 481b. Although the case where the ratio is the same has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the rack portion 481b and the gear ratio of the second pinion leg member 483 are not limited thereto. The gear ratio between the portion 483c and the rack portion 481b may be different. This makes it possible to open and close the operation members 491 and 492 in a non-parallel manner to enhance the effect.

  In the above embodiment, the case where both the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are meshed with the rack portion 481b in the combined motion unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only one of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 meshes with the rack portion 481b, and the other does not mesh with the rack portion 481b, and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can rotate. It may be supported only on the. This makes it possible to open and close the operation members 491 and 492 in a non-parallel manner to enhance the effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the combined operation unit 400, as the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491 and 492, the operation of continuously rotating the rotating first gear 461 and the opening/closing first gear 451 from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ4. However, the operation unit is not limited to this, and it is naturally possible to divide the unit of operation within the range of the rotation angles θ0 to θ4.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the first combination operation unit 500, the case where the insertion shafts 531c are arranged in two rows in a row on the back surface of the A-layer base plate 531 is described, but the invention is not limited thereto. The number of insertion shafts 531c in each row may be two or less, or may be four or more.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are attached to the central insertion shaft 531c of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically on the back surface of the A-layer base plate 531. Although the case of connecting the first link member 541 and the first insertion member 531c to the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically is described above. The two link members 542 may be connected.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the retaining ring E is provided as a retainer for the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c that are inserted into the shaft support hole 541a and the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541. While the mounting or fastening screw is fastened, the case where the mounting of the retaining ring E as a retaining member or the fastening of the fastening screw is omitted for the coupling shaft 526 inserted into the coupling hole 541b has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and it suffices that the retaining ring E as a retaining member or the fastening screw is fastened at least at one of these three locations.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. Referred to as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

  A moving member movably formed between a first position and a second position, a driving unit for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit for the moving member. In a gaming machine provided with a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and a transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member. And a transfer state is formed after the cut-off state is formed when at least the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmission means. The driving force required for the driving means to start the movement can be suppressed, and as a result, the driving means can be downsized.

  That is, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the stationary object is moved. Therefore, a force exceeding the inertial force generated in the moving member at the start of the movement is applied. Since it is necessary to act on such a moving member, the driving force required for the driving means becomes large. As a result, the size of the driving means has been increased (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). On the other hand, after the movement of the moving member is started, the action of inertia that acts to maintain the motion state of the moving member acts, so that the driving force required for the driving means does not move the moving member. It is small compared to the driving force required at the start. In other words, it can be said that, after the movement of the moving member is started, the driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is being used.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the interruption state is formed by the transmission means, and thus the driving state is achieved. Even if the driving force that can be generated by the means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started. That is, since the transmission means first forms the cutoff state, it is possible to generate a driving force in the driving means in a no-load state, and to give momentum (inertial force) to the driving state of the driving means. .. Then, the transmission state is formed by the transmission means (switching from the cutoff state to the transmission state), so that the driving means drives the driving force to the moving means in a state in which the driving state is energized (inertial force is large). Can be transmitted. With this, even if the driving unit is downsized, the movement of the moving member can be started. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used.

  In the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is formed so that the teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed on at least a part or the entire circumference thereof, and the drive means-side member can be meshed with the teeth. A moving member side member having teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the driving means side member to the moving member at least partly or entirely, and at least the driving means side member or the moving member side member. One is provided with a non-forming part in which the teeth are not formed and which cannot be meshed with the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the transmission means is formed so that the driving means side member and the moving member side member can mesh with each other. Therefore, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the driving means side The moving member side member meshed with the member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the moving member (transmission state is formed) through the rotation of the moving member side member. In this case, since the non-forming portion in which the teeth are not formed is formed on one of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member, the driving unit side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit and the driving unit side member is rotated. When the non-formation portion is arranged at the meshing position of the member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member cannot mesh with each other, and the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is blocked. (A cutoff state is formed).

  Therefore, when the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the non-formation portion is first used to form the cutoff state, so that the driving means side member can be idly rotated. Therefore, it is possible to drive the drive means in a no-load state, and to give momentum to the drive state of the drive means (inertial force on the drive side member). After that, the idling driving means side member is engaged with the moving member side member (that is, a transmission state is formed), so that the driving means starts the driving of the moving means in a state where the driving state is energized. be able to. Thus, the movement of the moving member can be started even if the driving unit is downsized.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the transmission means includes the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and at least one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. Since the non-formation part is formed so that the teeth are not formed, the disconnection state and the transmission state are determined according to the relative rotational position (rotational position of the non-formation part) between the driving unit side member and the moving member side member. You can switch between and. That is, an actuator device is not required in the configuration for achieving such switching of states, and only the gears can be used. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, the teeth formed on the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are mechanical elements used for transmission of power through meshing with the teeth of the mating member. In this case, the shape of the tooth trace is not limited. For example, the teeth of the gears illustrated below can be applied to the teeth of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member. Examples of gears include spur gears, helical gears, bevel gears, bevel gears, spiral bevel gears, screw gears, crown gears, miter gears, internal gears, hypoid gears, and worm gears. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

  In the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member face each other, A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a cutoff state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes a non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the driving member side member Since the cut-off state is formed by the forming portions facing each other, the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is improved. It is possible to improve.

  That is, in the case where only one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has the non-forming portion (that is, the other of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has teeth formed over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction). It is necessary that the non-formation portion is retracted to a position where meshing with the other tooth of the driving unit side member or the moving member side member can be avoided. Specifically, the non-forming portion needs to be set back toward the rotation shaft side with respect to the root of one of the teeth of the driving unit side member or the moving member side member. As a result, since the amount of retreat in the non-forming portion increases, the outer diameter of the non-forming portion of one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member decreases, and the one portion of the driving means side member or the moving member side member decreases accordingly. Causes a decrease in rigidity.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A3, each of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member has a non-forming portion, and thus both non-forming portions are retracted to a position where they do not interfere with the facing non-forming portion. It's enough if there is. Specifically, both the non-formation portions can be located between the roots and the peaks of the teeth of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member, and it is not necessary to retract them to the rotary shaft side from the roots. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-forming portion can be reduced, so that the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member is reduced. It is possible to improve.

  In the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion of one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. The non-formation portion on the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is separated from the other tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member in the circumferential direction, so that the driving means side member or the moving member side member A gaming machine A4, which is shaped so as to project toward a non-forming portion on one side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion provided in each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is a non-forming portion in one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. The drive means side member or the moving member side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis, and the non-forming portion on the other side of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is the drive means side member or the moving member side member. A shape protruding toward a non-forming portion formed on one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member as it is separated from the other tooth of the member side member in the circumferential direction (that is, the driving means side member or the moving member side member Of the driving means side member or the moving member side member while avoiding the interference between these two non-formation portions and enabling the formation of the cutoff state. By increasing the outer diameter of the other non-forming portion, the rigidity of the other of the driving unit side member or the moving member side member can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the drive unit side member and the moving member side member are respectively the drive unit at the first phase position and the second phase position which is a phase position different from the first phase position. The gaming machine A5, wherein the non-formed portion of the side member and the non-formed portion of the movable member side member face each other to form the cutoff state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member form a cutoff state at two positions of the first phase position and the second phase position. Therefore, by making the first phase position and the second phase position correspond to the first position and the second position of the moving member, the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started. Not only when the moving member in the second position starts to move to the first position, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed, so that the driving state of the driving unit is changed. Momentum (inertial force) can be given. That is, even if the driving force that can be generated by the driving unit is small, the movement of the moving member can be started both when the moving member is at the first position and when it is at the second position.

  A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmitting unit transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the second moving member, and the transmitting unit transmits the driving force to the second moving member. A gaming machine B1 capable of simultaneously forming a blocking state in which transmission of a driving force to the first moving member is blocked.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member move. To be done. In this case, the transmission means can simultaneously form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member and a shut-off state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is shut off. Therefore, the operation mode in which the first moving member is stopped while the second moving member is moved can be achieved by the one driving unit.

  That is, when the movement of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by one driving means, in the conventional product, there are two driving states, that is, the driving means generates the driving force and the driving force is stopped. By forming the structure, since the operation mode of the first moving member and the second moving member is switched, only the operation mode in which both the first moving member and the second moving member both move or both stop However, it was impossible to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member, a driving means for moving the first moving member and a driving means for moving the second moving member are separately provided. It was necessary (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-139766).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, as described above, the operation mode in which the first moving member is stopped while the second moving member is moved can be achieved by the one driving means, so the first moving member and the second moving member It is possible to reduce the number of driving means and reduce the product cost while making it possible to exert the effect of moving and stopping the members.

  In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means transmits a driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member and a driving force generated by the driving means to the second moving member. A second transmission member, wherein the first transmission member has a first driving means-side member in which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the first driving means. A first moving member side member having teeth formed on the side member so as to be meshable with each other and at least partly or wholly having teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the first driving means side member to the first moving member; And at least one of the first driving member side member and the first moving member side member is incapable of meshing with the other of the first driving member side member or the first moving member side member because the teeth are not formed. A gaming machine B2, which is provided with a non-forming part.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmitting member and is transmitted to the second moving member by the second transmitting member. The first moving member and the second moving member are moved respectively.

  In this case, since the first transmission member side member and the first moving member side member are formed so that the first transmission member can mesh with each other, when the first driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, The first moving member side member meshed with the first driving means side member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member via the rotation of the first moving member side member, and the first moving member is Will be moved. Further, since one of the first driving unit side member and the first moving member side member includes a non-forming portion in which teeth are not formed, the first driving unit side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, When the non-formation portion is arranged at the meshing position of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member are unable to mesh with each other, and the driving means The transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is blocked (a blocking state is formed). That is, the formation of the blocking state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Accordingly, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the one driving unit.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the first transmission member includes the first driving unit side member and the first moving member side member, and the first driving unit side member or Since the tooth is not formed on at least one of the first moving member side members and the non-forming portion is provided, the relative rotational position between the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member (of the non-forming portion). It is possible to switch between the cutoff state and the transmission state according to the rotational position). That is, an actuator device is not required in the configuration for achieving such switching of states, and only the gears can be used. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, the second transmission member is moved from the drive means to the second transmission member when the transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. A gaming machine B3, which is capable of forming a shut-off state that shuts off the transmission of the driving force to the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member is moved from the drive means to the second movement member when the transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first movement member is formed by the first transmission member. Since it is possible to form the cut-off state that cuts off the transmission of the driving force, the operation mode of stopping the second moving member while moving the first moving member can be achieved by the one driving means. That is, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 (that is, the effect that the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means), while moving the first moving member The operation mode in which the second moving member is stopped can be achieved by the one driving means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of driving means and reduce the product cost, increase the variation of the operation modes of the movement and stop of the first moving member and the second moving member, and enhance the effect of the production. it can.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member includes a groove-shaped groove portion and a pin portion formed so as to be movable along the groove portion, and the groove portion and the pin portion extend from the drive means to the second moving member. The pin portion is moved along the groove portion so as to form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member. The gaming machine B4, wherein the pin portion is stopped with respect to the groove portion so that a blocking state for blocking the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the pin portion is moved along the groove portion, so that it is possible to form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member. On the other hand, by stopping the pin portion with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a blocking state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked, so that the driving force of the driving means is moved by the first movement. When the transmission state to be transmitted to the member is formed by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is moved), the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked. , The second moving member is stopped, while the driving force from the driving unit to the first moving member is blocked by the first transmitting member (that is, the first moving member is stopped), the driving unit. It is possible to move the second moving member by transmitting the driving force of the above to the second moving member.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member in which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the second driving means side member. At least a part or the entire circumference of the teeth that are formed to be meshable and that transmits the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member is formed, and one of the groove portion and the pin portion is arranged. A second moving member side member, the second driving means side member is disposed coaxially with the first driving means side member of the first transmission member, and the second moving member side member is provided. Is provided coaxially with the first moving member side member of the first transmission member, and the gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the second driving member side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmitting member are the first driving member side member and the first moving member of the first transmitting member. Since they are arranged coaxially with the member-side members, backlash between the second driving member-side member of the second transmission member and the second moving member-side member, and the first driving member-side member of the first transmission member and Backlash between the first moving member-side members can be generated in the same direction, and thus, it is possible to prevent the production timing of the first moving member and the second moving member from deviating from each other.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second driving member side member of the second transmitting member may be fixed to the first driving member side member of the first transmitting member. According to this, the second driving member side member of the second transmitting member is fixed to the first driving member side member of the first transmitting member, so that both the first driving member side member and the second driving member side member are provided. A member for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit is not required, and a member for transmitting the driving force to either the first driving unit side member or the second driving unit side member is sufficient. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced or the parts can be downsized to reduce the product cost.

  Here, fixing the first driving means side member to the second driving means side member means that it is sufficient if the rotations of the first driving means side member and the second driving means side member are synchronized. Therefore, the first driving means side member and the second driving means side member may be formed separately and fixed to each other, or may be integrally formed. When they are formed separately, as a method for fixing the two, for example, adhesion with an adhesive, ultrasonic welding, fastening with screws, or a method of fitting a protrusion provided on one side into a recess or hole provided on the other , A combination of these, and the like are exemplified.

  A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means is formed with at least a part or the entire circumference of teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and the drive means-side member is formed so as to be meshable with the drive means-side member. A moving member side member in which teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the means side member to the moving member are formed at least partially or entirely around the moving member side member and the moving member side member, When the non-forming portions are respectively provided at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the moving member side is provided. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a non-forming portion of the member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the moving member side member meshed with the driving means side member is rotated, and with the rotation of the moving member side member. The moving member is moved. When the driving means side member is further rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are Is unable to mesh. As a result, the transmission of the driving force from the driving unit to the moving member is blocked (a blocked state is formed), and the moving member is stopped. That is, the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range. In this case, since the non-formed portion of the moving member side member is formed so as to be able to contact the non-formed portion of the driving means side member, the non-formed portion of the moving member side member contacts the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. The rotation of the moving member side member in the contact direction can be restricted. That is, the movement of the moving member can be restricted.

  In this case, the stopping of the moving member has conventionally been performed as follows. That is, a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is provided, and when the rotation of the driving means side member or the moving member side member to a predetermined rotational position is detected by the sensor device, When it is judged that the moving member has reached the end of the moving range, the driving of the driving means is stopped. Alternatively, the drive amount of the drive unit (for example, the number of steps when the drive unit is configured by a step motor) is detected (counted), and when the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the moving member ends the movement range. The driving of the driving means is stopped when it has been reached (see JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, for example, due to poor detection of the rotational position or drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise, the drive means may not be stopped even though the moving member reaches the end of the moving range. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper when the driving means is not stopped properly. However, in the structure in which the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper as described above, when the moving member collides with the stopper, not only the moving member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the driving means. There is also a risk that the driving means may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are unable to engage with each other, so that the driving unit Since the transmission of the driving force to the moving member is cut off, the moving member can be stopped even when the driving force of the driving means is continuously generated. Therefore, damage due to the collision between the moving member and another member can be avoided. Further, even if the moving member collides with another member, the moving member is separated from the driving means and the driving means is idling, so that an excessive load acts on the driving means. It can be avoided.

Further, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is provided with a movable member that is formed so as to be movable, and a drive unit that applies a drive force to the movable member, and the drive member moves the movable member within a predetermined movement range. There is a game machine that allows it (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120640).
In this case, for example, when the end of the moving range of the moving member is set to the raised position and gravity acts on the moving member arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member moves (falls) by the action of gravity. You need not to. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted by opposing the driving force of the driving means against the gravity (weight of the moving member) (that is, the moving member is at the end of the moving range). Since it is a structure for holding), energy consumption required for holding the moving member is large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member. Thus, the rotation of the moving member side member (movement of the moving member) can be restricted. That is, in the gaming machine C1, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member and the driving means are separated from each other, and thus the driving force of the driving means cannot be used to hold the moving member at the end. Using the contact of the non-forming portion, the moving member can be mechanically held at the end of the moving range. As a result, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C1, the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member and abutted against each other. In this case, the gaming machine C2 is formed in a shape capable of restricting rotation of the moving member side member in both directions.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. When the moving members are brought into contact with each other (that is, when the moving means is arranged at the end of the moving range), the moving member side member is formed into a shape capable of restricting rotation in both directions. Compared to the case where the rotation of the side member is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation in only one direction (for example, only the direction in which the moving member is moved by the action of gravity), the moving member when the end of the moving range is reached Since the vibration can be converged and the moving member can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range, and the moving member can be held in a stable state at the end of the moving range, the moving member that should be in a stopped state is affected by an external force (for example, a game It is possible to suppress vibration or displacement due to an external force generated by a person hitting or shaking the game board.

  In the gaming machine C2, the non-forming part of the driving means side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape with the rotation axis of the driving means side member as the center, and the non-forming part of the moving member side member is the driving part. When arranged at the meshing position of the device side member and the moving member side member, it has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member and has the same diameter as the arc of the non-forming portion of the drive means side member. Alternatively, the gaming machine C3 is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a slightly larger diameter.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and is on the moving member side. The non-formation part of the member is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member and is not formed when the drive means side member and the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position. Since the curved portion is formed in an arc shape having the same diameter as or slightly larger than the circular arc of the portion, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member can be smoothly brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member, and Both can be easily brought into contact with each other by surface contact. As a result, the non-forming portions can be smoothly brought into contact with each other, the impact when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range and is stopped can be moderated, and the contact pressure between the non-forming portions can be reduced. The durability of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member can be improved.

  In addition, since the non-formed portion of the driving unit side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member are curved in a concentric arc shape, the moving member side member is not affected by the rotational position (phase) of the driving unit side member. The non-forming portion can be brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving unit side member, and the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions can be restricted. That is, even if the drive-side gear is further rotated after the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the rotation of the moving member-side member can be restricted in both directions, and as a result, the moving member is held at the end of the moving range. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the moving member side member includes a plurality of fastened portions, and the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side gear through the plurality of fastened portions. A gaming machine C4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C4, since the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side member through the plurality of fastened parts, one structure is formed by the moving member side member and the moving member connected at these plural points. it can. That is, the rigidity of the moving member side member can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the moving member. That is, since the moving member side member receives a reaction force from the driving means side member when the non-formation portion is brought into contact with the non-formation portion of the driving means side member, the rigidity for resisting the reaction force is secured. On the other hand, for example, when the wall thickness is increased, the weight is increased, and when the material having high rigidity is adopted, the material cost is increased. However, according to the gaming machine C4, the rigidity of the moving member is used (that is, the moving member is moved). Since the rigidity of the moving member side member is increased by being integrated with the member), it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the moving member side member or adopt a high rigidity material. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the durability of the moving member side member while reducing the weight and cost of the moving member side member.

  In the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is arranged at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means side member with a non-forming portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member moves because the fastened portion is arranged at a position facing the driving means side member with the non-forming portion of the moving member side member being sandwiched therebetween. It is possible to effectively increase the rigidity of a portion that receives a reaction force from the driving unit side member when the non-forming unit member-side member is brought into contact with the driving unit side member non-forming unit. As a result, both weight reduction and cost reduction of the moving member side member and improvement in durability of the moving member side member can be further achieved.

  It is more preferable that the fastened portion of the moving member gear is arranged at a position facing the rotating shaft of the driving means side member with the non-forming portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. The reaction force received by the moving member side member when the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is the rotation axis of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member. Since it is acted along the line connecting between the driving means side member and the fastening portion arranged at the position facing the rotation axis of the driving means side member, the rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the driving means side member is increased. This is because it can be exhibited even more.

  A gaming machine comprising: a moving member rotatably formed around a first axis between a first position and a second position; and a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating the moving member. The moving member includes a rotating member that is rotated about the second shaft by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit, and a pin member that is disposed on the rotating member and is eccentrically located with respect to the second shaft. The member includes a groove-shaped guide groove portion that guides the pin member along the inner wall surface, and the guide groove portion is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and formed so as to receive the pin member. At least in the first position, the pin member is received in the recess, so that the moving member is mechanically held in the first position.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the rotating member is rotated about the second axis by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the pin member is arranged on the rotating member. Are guided along the guide groove of the moving member. Since the pin member is located eccentrically from the second axis of the rotating member, the moving member moves between the first position and the second position as the pin member is guided along the inner wall surface of the guide groove. It is rotated about one axis.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft, a moving member that is rotated about the first shaft, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the moving member, and the driving force of the driving unit. There is a gaming machine that rotates the moving member between the first position and the second position with the first axis as the center of rotation (for example, see JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, for example, when the first position is the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member arranged at the first position from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted by counteracting the driving force of the driving means against the gravity (weight of the moving member) (that is, the moving member is held at the first position). However, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position by receiving the pin member in the recess formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove. .. That is, even if the driving force of the driving unit is released, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position, and accordingly, the energy consumption of the driving unit can be suppressed.

  Further, since the pin member is received in the concave portion provided on the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion to mechanically hold the moving member at the first position, the moving member is mechanically moved to the first position only by the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. The degree of freedom in arranging the guide groove portion and the rotary member can be increased as compared with the structure in which the guide groove portion and the rotating member are held in a static manner.

  Note that the recess does not have to have a bottom and may penetrate. That is, it suffices to have inner wall surfaces that communicate with the guide groove portions and that face each other. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

  In the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, and the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being substantially orthogonal to.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is arranged in a direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, In addition, since the second member and the pin member are arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the connecting direction, the moving member rotates about the first shaft even when the driving force of the driving unit is released. Since the inner wall surface of the concave portion presses the pin member in the direction parallel to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, the rotation of the rotating member may be affected by the pressing of the pin member accompanying the rotation of the moving member. A rotation about the second axis cannot be formed. Accordingly, the holding of the moving member at the first position can be performed more firmly. Therefore, for example, even if the moving member is shaken by the player hitting or rocking the game machine, the moving member can be reliably held at the first position and moved downward in the gravity direction ( Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved and formed in an arc shape centered on the second axis of the rotating member when the moving member is arranged at the first position. Gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved in an arc shape with the second axis of the rotating member as the center when the moving member is arranged at the first position. Therefore, after the moving member is arranged at the first position, it is possible to allow the pin member to be received in the recess while suppressing the posture of the moving member from changing.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the concave portion is an inner wall surface of the guide groove portion that opposes, and the pin member slides when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine D4, which is provided on the inner wall surface on the side where the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion that faces each other, and when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. Since the pin member is recessed in the inner wall surface on the sliding side, the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position without switching the driving direction of the driving means (rotating direction of the rotating member), and It is possible to hold the moving member in the first position by allowing the recess to receive the pin member.

  The gaming machine D5 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, characterized in that the recessed portion is provided on an inner wall surface of the guide groove portion facing each other, and the inner wall surface on a side closer to the first axis.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recessed portion is provided on the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion facing each other on the side closer to the first axis. The recess can be arranged in the dead space between the guide groove and the first shaft, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by disposing the concave portion on the side of the first shaft in this way, the distance between the first shaft and the pin member in the state where the moving member is arranged at the first position can be further shortened. With the rotation about the first axis, the force with which the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member can be reduced. Accordingly, the holding of the moving member at the first position can be performed more firmly.

  A moving member that is slidably movable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member; and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the gaming machine described above, a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member is provided, and the moving member is inserted into the slide holes of the base member. The transmitting means is arranged on the other surface side of the base member opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged, and the transmitting means moves the driving force of the driving means. A link member for transmitting to the member, the link member projecting to the other surface side of the base member through a slide hole of the base member; A gaming machine E1 characterized by being connected to.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the driving force of the driving unit is generated, the link member of the transmitting unit is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit, and the displacement of the link member is transmitted to the protrusion of the moving member. To be done. As a result, the protrusion of the moving member is moved along the slide hole, so that the moving member is slid.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is slidably movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a driving force that the driving unit generates are moved. There is a game machine provided with a transmission means for transmitting to a member, and transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the moving member by the transmitting means to slide the moving member (for example, refer to JP-A-2004-229885). .. In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding movement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of protrusions to be inserted into the slide holes. On the other hand, if the number of protrusions is increased, the number of parts for holding the protrusions (preventing slipping out of the slide hole) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing the cost while stabilizing the sliding movement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a link member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and the link member is opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged. And is connected to at least one protrusion of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that is disposed on the other side of the base member that is the side and is protruded to the other side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Therefore, at least one of the components for holding the protrusion can be used as the link member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions, enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, reduce the number of components for holding the protrusions, and reduce costs.

  In the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the link member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the drive means to the link member, and the base member has a connection hole formed as an opening. The driving means and the connecting member of the transmitting means are disposed on one surface side of the base member, and the connecting member is connected to the link member via a connecting hole of the base member. A gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the link member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the link member, and the connection formed as an opening. Since the base member is provided with the hole and the connecting member is connected to the link member through the connecting hole of the base member, it is possible to dispose the connecting member of the driving means and the transmitting means on the one surface side of the base member together with the moving member. it can. Thereby, the constituent members can be concentrated on one surface side of the base member (that is, the arrangement of the constituent members on the other surface side of the base member can be suppressed), and as a result, the space can be efficiently used, It is possible to reduce the size as a whole.

  The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the link member of the transmission means is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, in the transmission means, the connection member is arranged on one surface side of the base member, and the link member is arranged on the other surface side of the base member, and these connection member and the link member are connected through the connection hole of the base member. Therefore, the drive force transmission path formed by the connecting member and the link member becomes long. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted, the connecting member and the link member may be deformed, and the transmission force may not be stably transmitted to the moving member. On the other hand, since the link member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, the rigidity of the connecting member and the link member as a whole is increased by utilizing the rigidity of the base member. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connecting member and the link member.

  Particularly, in the gaming machine E3, the link member among the connection member and the link member is rotatably supported on the base member, so that the base member is rotatably supported on the base member as compared with the case where the connection member is rotatably supported on the base member. The distance from the shaft supporting point to the projecting portion of the moving member can be shortened, and as a result, the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member can be stabilized with fewer shaft supporting points.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is vertical, and the moving member is arranged along the slide hole of the base member. The game machine E4 is characterized in that is slid in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is perpendicular to the base member. Since the moving member is slid in the vertical direction along the slide hole, the structure in which the link member is disposed on the other surface side of the base member is effective, and the moving member can be stably slid. That is, when the base member is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is the vertical direction, the moving member is inclined forward in a direction away from the one surface side of the base member due to the action of gravity. Since the base member is interposed between the link member connected to the moving member and the moving member, the forward tilting posture of the moving member is regulated not only by the component for holding the protrusion but also by the link member. As a result, the moving member can be slid in a stable state.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the link member is connected to a protruding portion located at least above a center of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine E5, since the link member is connected to the projecting portion located at the upper side of at least the center of the moving member, the attitude of forward tilting toward the direction of separating from the one surface side of the base member by the action of gravity. With respect to the moving member, the forward tilting posture of the moving member can be effectively restricted by the link member, and as a result, the moving member can be slid in a more stable state.

  A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means has a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a tooth surface meshed with the pinion is arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane, and is horizontally displaced with rotation of the pinion. And a link member that has one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the moving member and is erected or tilted as the rack moves in the horizontal direction. The moving member is arranged in a raised position and the moving member is arranged in a lowered position by tilting the link member. At the rising position of the moving member, the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is the rack. A gaming machine F1 located in a plane orthogonal to the tooth surface and the moving direction of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the rack is displaced to the one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the link member is moved along with the displacement of the rack to the one side in the horizontal direction. When the rack is tilted and the link member is tilted, the moving member is moved downward (downward) toward the lower position, and when the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is moved to the other side in the horizontal direction. The link member is erected with the displacement to the side, and as the link member is erected, the moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the raised position.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force applied to the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member. There is a game machine in which the transmission means is formed by including a rack and pinion in a part of the transmission path of the driving force (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-065923). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the driving force of the driving means is opposed to the gravity (the weight of the moving member) to restrict the movement (lowering) of the moving member (that is, the moving member is held in the raised position). ), the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is high.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, at the rising position of the moving member, the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is located in the planes orthogonal to the tooth flanks of the rack and the moving direction of the rack. As a force component acting on the rack from the link member, it is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction of moving the rack in the horizontal direction. Accordingly, even if the driving force of the drive unit is released, the moving member can be held at the raised position, and as a result, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1, a pinion and a rack of the transmission means include a base member rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and a link member, and the link member includes The base members are arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base members are provided between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, and the pair of links are provided. A gaming machine F2, which is provided with an interposition portion that is formed so as to be capable of abutting on the facing surface of the member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, the gaming machine F2 is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members and also the facing surfaces of the pair of link members. Since the base member is provided with the interposition portion formed so as to be able to contact, the posture of the moving member can be stabilized in the raised position. That is, at the raised position, since the pair of link members are erected, it is difficult to maintain the posture thereof, and the posture of the moving member is likely to be unstable, and the interposition portion is provided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members. By doing so, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the pair of link members in the facing direction (that is, the moving direction of the rack) by the interposition portion. Accordingly, the pair of link members can be maintained in the upright state, and the posture of the moving member can be stabilized at the raised position.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a pinion and a rack of the transmission means are provided with a base member rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means is provided with at least a pair of the rack and the link member and the link member. Are arranged so as to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member has a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that one end sides of the pair of link members are respectively provided between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member is provided with a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. Therefore, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture. That is, since the pair of link members are arranged facing each other along the moving direction of the rack, the displacement of each pair is canceled by the pair of link members arranged facing each other in the moving direction of the rack. They can fit and maintain their posture. On the other hand, since the moving member of the link member is offset in the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack, the position of the center of gravity is likely to change due to the input of disturbance, and it is difficult to maintain its posture. However, since one end sides of the pair of link members are respectively interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions, a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack of the pair of link members is formed by the pair of facing wall portions. Can be regulated. Accordingly, the postures of the pair of link members can be maintained and the moving member can be moved in a stable posture.

  In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member has a standing height that is increased as the moving member approaches the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, as the moving member approaches the rising position (that is, as the link member is erected), the standing height of the facing wall portion is increased (that is, one end of the link member with respect to the facing wall portion). Since the area facing the side becomes large), it is possible to stabilize the movement of the moving member while improving the appearance. That is, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the opposing wall portion from being impaired and to erect the link member by raising the standing height of the facing wall portion partially instead of raising it (that is, The more difficult it becomes to move the moving member in a stable posture, the more the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member by the facing wall portion can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to move the moving member in a stable posture while suppressing the deterioration of the appearance.

  In this case, in at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member, the portion where the standing height is increased is in a state where the moving member is arranged in the lowered position (that is, the link member is laid down). It is preferable that the height is set so that the other end of the link member (the side connected to the moving member) can face the link member. According to this configuration, the effect of maintaining the posture of the moving member arranged in the lowered position can be obtained at the same time by using the portion where the standing height is increased in order to stabilize the posture of the moving member during movement. You can

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extension member extending in a direction orthogonal to a tooth surface of the rack is provided, and the moving member is slidably connected to the extension member and the extension member is provided. A guide portion that is guided along the extending direction of the member, wherein the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack; The gaming machine F5, wherein the moving member is arranged between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in a direction in which the moving member is offset.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extending member that extends in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and guides the guide portion of the moving member along the extending direction is provided. Since the extension member is disposed between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset, the effect of offsetting the moving member (that is, necessary for holding the moving member) is provided. It is possible to secure smooth movement of the moving member while exhibiting various energy consumption suppressions).

  When a pair of link members is provided and an interposition portion is provided between the pair of link members facing each other, it is preferable to dispose the extension member inside the interposition portion. The extension member is arranged in the central portion where the pair of link members face each other, and while enhancing the guide effect of the movement of the moving member, the inside of the interposing portion that becomes the dead space is effectively used, and the overall size is reduced. Because you can

  A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission member has a tooth in at least a part thereof, and a first transmission member to which the moving member is coupled, and a second transmission member having a tooth engageable with the tooth of the first transmission member in at least a part thereof. A transmission member; and a connection member that is connected to the second transmission member and that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission member. The connection member is continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine G1, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second transmission member via the connecting member, the second transmission member is rotated, and the rotation of the second transmission member is meshed with each other. Is transmitted to the first transmission member via the, and the first transmission member is rotated. As a result, the moving member connected to the first transmission member is moved along with the rotation of the first transmission member.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member that is formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. A first transmission member having a transmission member for transmitting the transmission member, and a first transmission member meshed with the first transmission member; and a second transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the first transmission member through the meshing. There is a game machine in which a part of the driving means is formed by the transmission member (for example, see JP 2011-110376 A). In this case, the second transmitting member is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member is rotated, so that the moving member connected to the first transmitting member is moved. The first transmission member is moved along with the rotation. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member, the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move the moving member. When the moving member shakes while moving, the first transmitting member may be displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, and the meshing with the second transmitting member may be lost. Even if it is possible to avoid the disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the meshing area with the teeth of the second transmission member is reduced by the amount of displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member. When the surface pressure is reduced and the surface pressure is concentrated on a part of the tooth surface, uneven wear of the teeth may be caused and durability may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member are formed in the connecting member, even when the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, The teeth of the first transmission member can be meshed with the teeth formed on the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Further, when the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, the meshing area between the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member and the connection member can be ensured, so that the deviation of each tooth It is possible to suppress wear and improve durability.

  The teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed in a part of the circumferential direction. The same applies to the following. The same applies to other gears.

  In the gaming machine G1, the connection member is erected from the axial end surface of the second transmission member along the axial direction of the second transmission member, and the tooth forming portion in which the teeth are formed, and the tooth formation thereof. A main body portion connected to the standing tip of the tooth portion, and the tooth forming portion has a surface opposite to the side on which the teeth are formed curved in an arc shape with the axis of the second transmission member as the center. A gaming machine G2, which is formed as a concave curved surface.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is erected from the axial end surface of the second transmitting member along the axial direction of the second transmitting member, Since the surface of the transmission member opposite to the side where the continuous teeth are formed is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape with the axis of the second transmission member as the center, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is Even when connecting to the axial end surface of the second transmission member, the area of the axial end surface of the second transmission member can be secured, and the fixing member mounted on the axial end surface of the second transmission member can be increased by that much. The diameter can be reduced. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from a resin material, the tooth forming portion is formed by forming the surface opposite to the surface on which the teeth are formed as a concave curved surface as described above. The thickness can be made uniform, and the moldability thereof can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member, the teeth are formed over the range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion, the gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over the range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion. It is possible to sufficiently secure the area to be covered and more reliably prevent the meshing of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from being disengaged. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from the resin material, the teeth are formed over the entire tooth forming portion as described above, so that the thickness of the tooth forming portion is reduced as a whole. It is possible to improve the moldability by making the temperature uniform.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a second moving member in which the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are arranged and is formed so as to be movable, and a guide for guiding the second moving member in a linear direction. A member, the transmission means includes a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a rack that is meshed with the pinion and displaced with rotation of the pinion, and the connecting member is A gaming machine G4, wherein one end is connected to the rack and the other end is connected to the second transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 includes a second moving member on which the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are arranged, and the second moving member is a guide member. The transmission means includes a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a rack which is engaged with the pinion and which is displaced by the rotation of the pinion. Since one end is connected and the other end is connected to the second transmission member, the connecting member is displaced by operating the rack and pinion by the driving force of the driving means, and the second member is moved according to the displacement of the connecting member. The rotation of the transmission member and the linear movement of the second moving member can be performed at the same time. That is, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member, the moving member can be linearly moved together with the second moving member while rotating the moving member. As a result, the staging effect can be enhanced. Further, since the transmission of the driving force of the drive means to the moving member and the transmission to the second moving member can be combined into one member (coupling member), the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine G4, the rack has a tooth surface that is meshed with the pinion arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member horizontally moves the rack. Is guided by the guide member in the vertical direction with the displacement in the direction, and when the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the connecting member causes the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion to have the first transmission. A gaming machine G5, which is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the rack has the tooth surfaces meshed with the pinion arranged substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member moves in the horizontal direction of the rack. Since the pinion is guided by the guide member in the vertical direction with the displacement, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is moved to one side in the horizontal direction. The connecting member is tilted in accordance with the displacement of the rack, and the second moving member is moved downward (downward) toward the lower position as the connecting member is tilted, while the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion. Then, the connecting member is erected with the displacement of the rack to the other side in the horizontal direction, and as the connecting member is erected, the second moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the raised position.

  In this case, in the state in which the second moving member is arranged in the raised position, it is difficult to maintain the posture because the connecting member is erected, and the posture of the second moving member becomes unstable. As a result, the posture of the moving member arranged on the second moving member becomes more unstable. Therefore, the swing of the second moving member makes the swing of the moving member more noticeable, and the displacement of the first transmitting member accompanying the swing of the moving member becomes large. That is, in the state where the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the meshing between the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member is likely to be disengaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, the connecting member causes the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion to perform the first transmission when the second moving member is arranged in the raised position. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member, the displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member becomes large, and in the state where the meshing of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is most likely to be dislocated. The teeth formed in the tooth forming portion can be effectively utilized. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively prevent the meshing of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from being disengaged.

  In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the transmission means includes the rack, a connecting member whose one end is connected to the rack, a second transmitting member whose other end is connected to the rack, and teeth of the second transmitting member. A pair of first transmission members that are combined with each other and a pair of moving members that are connected to the first transmission member are provided, and the first transmission member and the second transmission member of one set are the first transmission of the other set. One set and the other set may be arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack in a state where they are meshed with the member and the second transmission member. According to this, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the moving member in one set and the moving member in the other set. Further, even if only the first transmission members or only the second transmission members are meshed with each other, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the moving member. Therefore, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are By engaging with each other, it is possible to increase the number of meshing points (meshing area) and to disperse the surface pressure of the tooth surface by that amount, so that the durability can be improved.

  A plurality of movable members that are formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to each of the plurality of moving members. A gaming machine in which the plurality of moving members are retreated to different retreat positions, and the plurality of moving members are coupled by being moved from different retreat positions and arranged at a reference position. The first moving member and the second moving member that are moved adjacent to each other at the reference position and the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. A third moving member that is in contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member from a direction substantially orthogonal to the third moving member, and the third moving member moves the first moving member and the second moving member at the reference position. By abutting on each of the members, a force in a direction to bring the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other is formed, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are combined. A gaming machine H1 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member by the transmitting means, so that the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member. The moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from different retracted positions to be arranged at the reference position.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of movable members that are movably formed, a drive unit that generates a drive force for moving each of the plurality of movable members, and a drive force of the drive unit. A plurality of moving members that are respectively moved to different retracted positions and are moved from different retracted positions to the reference position. There is a game machine to which is connected (for example, see JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, if the plurality of moving members are not properly joined at the reference position, the effect produced by joining the plurality of moving members is impaired. However, as in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is relatively easy to join a pair of symmetrical moving members face to face, but it is difficult to join three or more moving members.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged side by side at the reference position, and are substantially orthogonal to the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. When the third moving member moved from the direction toward the first moving member and the second moving member contacts the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively, the first moving member and the second moving member are moved. Since a force is generated in the direction of bringing them close to each other, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be appropriately combined. As a result, it is possible to ensure the effect produced by combining a plurality of moving members.

  In the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are respectively provided with a first contact portion and a second contact portion, and are brought into contact with the first contact portion and the second contact portion, respectively. The third moving member is provided with a third abutting portion, and the third abutting portion of the third moving member is a first abutting portion and a second abutting portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. By being brought into contact with each other, a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other is formed, and the first moving member and the second moving member face the third moving member. The external shape on the side is a concave shape that is formed by the first contact portion and the second contact portion and is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. The external shape of the third moving member facing the first moving member and the second moving member is formed by the third abutting portion and is the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. A gaming machine H2, which has a projecting shape in which the center projects correspondingly.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged adjacent to each other at the reference position, and the first contact member and the second contact member of the first moving member and the second moving member are opposed to each other. When the third contact portion of the third moving member is brought into contact, a force in a direction of bringing the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other is formed, whereby the first moving member and the second moving member. And the third moving member is coupled.

  In this case, the outer shape of the first moving member and the second moving member facing the third moving member (the combination of the first abutting portion and the second abutting portion) is a concave shape with the center recessed. On the other hand, in the third moving member, the appearance shape (third contact portion) on the side facing the first moving member and the second moving member is centered corresponding to the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member. Has a protruding shape, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are moved from the retracted position to the reference position, and are joined at the reference position to improve the effect of presentation. be able to.

  That is, as described above, the external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member facing each other are the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other. In the configuration in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has the protruding shape, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other when arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. When the player recalls a mode in which the third moving member enters between the members and pushes and expands the first moving member and the second moving member in the direction in which they are separated from each other, according to the gaming machine H2, the third moving member moves at the reference position. The member (third contact portion) is brought into contact with the first moving member and the second moving member (first contact portion and second contact portion), so that the first moving member and the second moving member are separated from each other. It is possible to couple the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member by forming a force in a direction to bring them close to each other. As a result, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the game machine H1 can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are supported by the base member by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, respectively, and the first moving member and the second moving member are at the reference position. In the state where they are arranged side by side, the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism may be arranged in a V shape in which the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member is narrower than the base member side. preferable. By setting the angle formed by the first contact portion and the second contact portion and the third contact portion with respect to the angle formed by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, the first movement is performed at the reference position. This is because it is possible to form a force in a direction in which the member and the second moving member are brought close to each other.

  In the gaming machine H1, the outer shape of the first moving member and the second moving member facing the third moving member is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. While the outer shape of the third moving member facing the first moving member and the second moving member corresponds to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, the third moving member has a concave shape. A gaming machine H3, which has a protruding shape with a center protruding.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member have an outer shape on the side facing the third moving member that is a concave shape with a dented center. The external shape of the third moving member facing the first moving member and the second moving member is a protruding shape in which the center is projected corresponding to the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by moving the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member from the retracted position to the reference position and connecting them at the reference position.

  That is, as described above, the external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member facing each other are the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other. In the configuration in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has the protruding shape, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other when arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. When the player recalls a mode in which the third moving member enters between the members and pushes and expands the first moving member and the second moving member in the direction in which they are separated from each other, according to the gaming machine H3, the third moving member moves at the reference position. By abutting the members, a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other is formed, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are coupled to each other. You can As a result, the operation can be performed in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the operation can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H3, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first contact surface and a second contact surface, and are in contact with the first contact surface and the second contact surface, respectively. The third moving member includes a third contact surface, and at least one of the third contact surface, the first contact surface, and the second contact surface has the third moving member at the reference position. It is formed as an inclined surface which becomes wider toward the advancing direction side when it is moved toward, and the third contact surface is contacted from both sides of the first contact surface and the second contact surface, whereby A gaming machine H4, wherein the first moving member and the second moving member are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, at least one of the third contact surface, the first contact surface, and the second contact surface has the third moving member directed toward the reference position. Is formed as an inclined surface that becomes wider toward the advancing direction side when moved by moving the third contact surface from both sides of the first contact surface and the second contact surface. Since the second moving member and the second moving member are displaced toward each other, the first moving member and the second moving member can be reliably displaced toward each other. Therefore, the structure that makes the first moving member and the second moving member movable can be simplified, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure can be increased.

  In the gaming machine H4, the first abutting surface and the second abutting surface are respectively arranged on the back side of the portions forming the external shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member, and the third abutting surface. The game machine H5, wherein the contact surface is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the external shape of the third moving member.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, the first contact surface and the second contact surface are arranged on the back side of the portions forming the external shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively. Since the third contact surface is provided on the back side of the portion that forms the external shape of the third moving member, the first contact surface, the second contact surface, and the third contact surface. Can be suppressed from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation.

  A movable member formed so as to be movable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In a gaming machine in which the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the second transmission member of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member is provided. A gaming machine I1 comprising a positioning means for positioning the meshing position at the predetermined phase.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member that is formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. There is a game machine that includes a transmission unit that transmits, and the transmission unit includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase (for example, (See Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-125092). According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, the rotation of one of the first transmission member and the other of the second transmission member is rotated, The moving member is moved by the other rotation. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the second transmission member is not meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the moving range of the moving member is displaced. Therefore, when assembling (engaging) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to position the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase and then assemble. The positioning work was complicated.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine I1 includes the positioning means for positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, so that the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled (tooth). In this case, the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be assembled by utilizing such positioning means. That is, when positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

  As described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, but may be formed in a part of the circumferential direction.

  In the gaming machine I1, a first transmission member and a second transmission member include a base member rotatably supported, and the positioning means includes a first base positioning portion and a second base positioning portion formed on the base member. And a first transmission member positioning portion and a second transmission member positioning portion formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, at positions corresponding to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. A gaming machine I2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed on the base member, and the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are supported. Since the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, at the position to be set, the first transmission member positioning portion is made to coincide with the first base positioning portion, and By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while aligning the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the second transmission member is brought into a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. Can be positioned. As a result, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

  In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion and the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed as a through hole, such one penetration The positioning work for positioning the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member is further simplified by inserting the jig into the hole and abutting (or inserting) the tip of the inserted jig to the other. It can be done accurately and accurately.

  In the gaming machine I2, the base member includes a first shaft and a second shaft that are provided so as to project toward the front surface of the base member and are inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first base positioning is performed. And the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, a gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2, in the case where the base member includes the first shaft and the second shaft that are projected from the front surface of the base member and are inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are positioned while the second transmission member is positioned in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. When the member is assembled to the base member, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved.

  That is, according to the gaming machine I3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted from the back surface of the base member into the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. With this, the jig can be projected from the front surface of the base member together with the first shaft and the second shaft. Thereby, at the same time as the work of assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member from the front surface of the base member to the first shaft and the second shaft, respectively, the tip of the jig is moved to the first transmission member and the second transmission member. It is possible to perform a positioning operation of abutting (or inserting) the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion. As a result, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is made up of a pair of members that coaxially overlap each other in the axial direction, and the first transmission member positioning portions are formed as through holes at positions corresponding to each other of the pair of members. A gaming machine I4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is made up of a pair of members that coaxially overlap each other in the axial direction, and the first transmission member is provided at a position corresponding to each other of the pair of members. Since the positioning portions are respectively formed as the through holes, the positioning work of the pair of gears can be performed at the same time, and the workability of the positioning work can be improved accordingly. Further, since the positioning work of the pair of gears can be performed using a common jig, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to connect the pair of gears to each other, the pair of gears can be rotatably supported on the common shaft so as to be relatively rotatable. The second transmission member may have the same configuration.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member includes a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped with each other in the axial direction, and the pair of members includes a protruding portion protruding from one member and the protruding portion. And a recess formed in the other member for receiving, and the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in a member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members. Gaming machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member includes a pair of members that coaxially overlap each other in the axial direction, and a member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members. Since the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in the second transmission member positioning portion, the member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members can be positioned in a predetermined phase by using the second transmission member positioning portion. .. In this case, the pair of members can position the pair of members in a predetermined phase by receiving the protrusion of one member in the recess of the other member, and cannot relatively rotate (that is, in synchronization with each other). (Rotatable) can be pivotally supported on a common shaft. In particular, since the protrusions of the pair of members are received and fitted in the recesses, the rigidity as a whole can be increased accordingly.

  The concave portion does not need to have a bottom, and may be formed as a through hole. That is, it is sufficient for the recess to be formed so as to be able to receive the connecting projection and be positioned in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) when the pair of members are coaxially stacked.

  A game having a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and an out opening for discharging a game ball that has not flown into the plurality of winning openings and has flowed out of the game area. In the machine, the first winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is close to the lower edge of the game area or to the position where the game ball cannot pass through the lower edge of the game area. The first outlet, which is disposed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, is provided on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, and the first outlet. A gaming machine J1 comprising: a second out opening arranged on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to a winning opening.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning holes arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and a game ball that has flowed without winning the winning holes into the plurality of winning holes. There is a gaming machine provided with an outlet that is discharged from (for example, see JP 2012-143268 A). In recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device in order to enhance the effect. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered downward in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, the position of the winning opening also needs to be lowered accordingly. However, if the position of the winning opening falls too downward, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the gaming ball to flow down below the winning opening (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). That is, the game ball that has not flown into the winning opening and flows down cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning opening downward, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device cannot be made sufficiently large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the out-out port is a first out-out port which is arranged on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to a first award-winning port of the plurality of award-winning ports, and Since the second outlet is arranged on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning opening, the first winning opening is not placed in the first winning opening and is located on the one side in the width direction than the first winning opening. The game ball that has flowed down can be discharged from the game area by the first outlet, while the game ball that has flowed to the other side in the width direction than the first winning port without being awarded to the first winning port is the second. It can be discharged from the game area by the outlet. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning opening (lower edge of the game area, for example, between the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot pass through between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device. Can be upsized.

  In the gaming machine J1, a game board having a game area in which a game area is formed on the front side is light-transmissive, which is provided with an effect member that performs an effect associated with winning a game ball into a second prize hole of the plurality of prize holes. Made of an elastic material, the effect member is arranged on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second winning port, and the second winning port and the effect member are used as the first winning port. On the other hand, a gaming machine J2 which is arranged on one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, it is provided with an effect member for effecting an effect associated with winning a game ball into the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Since the game board is made of a light-transmissive material and is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the game board, the player can see the scene where the game ball is won in the second winning opening. The effect by the effect member can be visually recognized at the same time behind, and the effect accompanying the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening can be effectively performed.

  In this case, the second winning opening and the effect member are arranged on the one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, and thus the positions of the second winning opening and the effect member. Can be lowered, and the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the liquid crystal display device can be upsized even when the effect member is provided.

  That is, arranging the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening interferes with the size increase of the liquid crystal display device because the effect member interferes with the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, by arranging the first out opening and the second out opening on one side in the width direction and on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, Not only can the position of the first winning opening be lowered, but also the degree of freedom of the arrangement position of the first winning opening on the one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction can be secured. It is possible to secure a space for disposing the second winning opening and the effect members. As a result, according to the gaming machine J2, a layout in which the effect members are disposed on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second winning opening. Became possible.

  In the gaming machine J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the second winning opening is arranged substantially in the center of the gaming area in the width direction.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2, the second winning port is arranged substantially at the center in the width direction of the gaming area. By effectively utilizing the space provided, it is possible to secure a wider space for disposing the effect member. That is, with such a layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the effect member. In addition, by arranging the second winning port in the approximate center of the game area in the width direction, it is possible to lengthen the flow path of the game ball to the second winning port. As a result, it is possible to enhance the playability for winning the game ball in the second winning opening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the effect produced by the effect member accompanying the winning in the second winning opening.

  In the gaming machine J2 or J3, a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board is provided, and the second effect member is arranged at a position where at least a part of the second effect member overlaps with the effect member. A gaming machine J4, which is characterized by being installed.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board is provided, and the second effect member is at least one in front view. Since the part is arranged at a position overlapping the effect member, when the game board is made of a light-transmissive material, the player can visually recognize only the necessary part of the second effect member and effect the other part. It is possible to shield the player from the member. Accordingly, the second effect member does not need to be designed on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  The gaming machine J5 according to any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, wherein the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable about the second winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable around the second winning opening, and thus surrounds the second winning opening. It is possible to perform the effect in the entire area, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect associated with the winning of the second winning opening.

  In this case, the second prize hole needs to be arranged at a position where a space for letting the game ball flow down can be secured both above and below the second prize hole, and the game area of the second prize hole is in the game area. Since the first winning port is arranged at one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction and below the game area, the effect member is formed in a circle centered on the second winning port. Thus, the space that can be secured around the second winning opening can be utilized most effectively, and as a result, the area of the effect member can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an actuation port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 Game board 64 1st prize hole (2nd prize hole)
71 1st Out Exit (Out Exit)
72 Second Out Exit (Out Exit)
81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
300 Rotation motion unit (effect member)
410 Mounting base (part of base member)
410a Positioning hole (first base positioning part)
410b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
421 Back case body (part of base member)
421a Positioning hole (first base positioning part)
421b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
426 First shaft 427 Second shaft 430 Drive motor (drive means)
451 Opening/Closing First Gear (Part of Transmission Means, First Transmission Member, Second Transmission Member)
451d Connection protrusion (positioning means, protrusion)
451e Positioning hole (positioning means, first transmission member positioning portion)
452 Opening/closing second gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member)
452d Connection protrusion (pin portion)
452e Positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning portion)
461 rotating first gear (a part of transmitting means, driving means side member, first transmitting member, second transmitting member)
461a1 Cylindrical surface (part of non-forming part)
461d Connection hole (positioning means, recess)
462 rotating second gear (a part of transmitting means, moving member side member, first transmitting member, second transmitting member)
462a1 non-formed surface (a part of non-formed portion)
462d Connection protrusion (fastened part)
462e Positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning portion)
471 Rear arm body (part of the first moving member or the second moving member)
472 front arm body (a part of the first moving member or the second moving member)
481c Connection groove (connection groove part)
491, 492 Operation member (moving member, first moving member, second moving member)
510 substrate member (base member)
511 Guide groove (slide hole)
522 Drive motor (drive means)
524 crank gear (a part of transmission means)
525 Connecting rod (part of transmission means)
526 Connection shaft (part of transmission means, connection member)
530 Slide mechanism part (moving member)
531c Insertion shaft (projection part)
539 First coupling member (part of moving member, third moving member)
539e Lower surface (third contact portion, third contact surface)
541 First Link Member (Part of Transmission Means, Link Member)
600 Second combined operation unit (second effect member)
621 Inner link member (part of transmission means)
622 Outer link member (part of transmission means)
630 Second coupling member (part of moving member, first moving member, and second moving member)
630a Upper surface (first contact portion, second contact portion, first contact surface, second contact surface)
630b Opposing surface (contact surface)
640 Drive motor (drive means)
650a Second special winning opening (first winning opening)
700 ring motion unit (second effect member)
710 Intermediate case body (part of base member)
711a Front (opposing wall)
713a Front (opposing wall)
720 Rear case body (part of base member)
730 Front case body (part of base member)
731a Rear surface (opposing wall)
732 Pillar part (intermediate part)
733 Guide rod (extension member, part of guide member)
740 Drive motor (drive means)
761 Pinion gear (part of transmission means, pinion)
762 rack (part of transmission means)
770 link member (part of transmission means, connecting member)
771 Body 773 Projecting wall (part of connecting member, tooth forming part)
774 Gear part (second transmission member)
774b Teeth 780 Lifting base body (moving member, part of second moving member)
784 Guided part (guide part, part of guide member)
790 Ring forming member (moving member)
792 Gear portion (first transmission member)
811 axis (1st axis)
820 Arm member (moving member)
822a First groove (guide groove portion)
822b Second groove (recess)
830 Drive motor (drive means)
831 Drive axis (second axis)
832 Drive arm (rotating member)
833 Projection pin (pin member)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine having a plurality of winning openings and an outlet for ejecting a game ball that has not flown into the plurality of winning openings and flows down from the gaming area (Patent Document 1).

  In recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device in order to enhance the effect.

JP, 2012-143268, A

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the flow of the game balls in the game area .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the flow of gaming balls .

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this purpose, a multiple inlet ball port, and a guide configured to be capable of guiding part of the game ball toward at least one of the plurality of input spheres port, are those comprising, and out port for discharging the game area a predetermined ball entrance port to the inlet ball Sarezu flow down the game ball of the plurality of input spheres port, a first of said plurality of input spheres port The ball entrance of is arranged in proximity to the lower edge of the game area or in contact with the lower edge of the game area to a position where the game ball cannot pass through between the lower edge of the game area. the out port, wherein a first out-port to the first inlet ball port is disposed in the width direction right side of the game area, the width direction of the game region to said first input sphere port includes a second out-port is disposed on the left side, and the guide portion has a plate-like flow down surface, is disposed at a position which is upstream of the first inlet ball port, The flowing down game ball can be guided toward the first entrance ball side, the first outlet is arranged on the downstream side of the guide section, and the guide section simultaneously displays a plurality of game balls. It is configured with a length that can be guided, and the first ball inlet is arranged in a region on the left side in the width direction of the game region with respect to the center in the width direction of the game region, and the guide portion directs the right side in the width direction. flow down the game ball Ru is configured to be ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 1, it is possible to improve the flow down of the game ball.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of a game board. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled rotary operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled rotary operation unit. (A) is a front view of a case body, (b) is a front view of a fixing member. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the support structure by the case body of a 1st gear, a 2nd gear, and a 3rd gear. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the compound operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled compound operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the compound operation unit in the state which decomposed|disassembled a part of compound operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of an opening/closing first gear, an opening/closing second gear, a rotating first gear and a rotating second gear. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the combined operation unit, which illustrates in time series the process of assembling the opening/closing first gear and the opening/closing second gear and the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear on the first shaft and the second shaft. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the combined operation unit, which illustrates in time series the process of assembling the opening/closing first gear and the opening/closing second gear and the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear on the first shaft and the second shaft. FIG. 6 is an exploded front view of a combined operation unit for explaining a relative displacement state of an opening/closing second gear and a slide rack member with respect to a back arm body. FIG. 7 is a front view of the combined operation unit illustrating the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation member in time series. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound motion unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening/closing 1st gear and the opening/closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotation 1st gear and the rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound motion unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening/closing 1st gear and the opening/closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotation 1st gear and the rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound motion unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening/closing 1st gear and the opening/closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotation 1st gear and the rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st engaging member and a pair of 2nd joint members are arranged at the retracted position. It is a front view of the 1st combined operation unit and the 2nd combined operation unit in the state where the 1st engaging member and a pair of 2nd combining members are arranged at the combined position. 33A is a front view of the first combined movement unit, and FIG. 33B is a bottom view of the first combined operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 1st combined operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st combination operation unit. It is a rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of a slide mechanism part, (b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism part. It is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism part which carried out the front view of the disassembled slide mechanism part. It is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism part which carried out rear view of the disassembled slide mechanism part. (A) is a front view of the 1st combination operation unit in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in a retracted position, and (b) is the 1st combination in the state where a 1st combination member is arranged in a retracted position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st combined operation unit in the state where the 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position, and (b) is the 1st combined state in the state where a 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd combination operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd combined operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a 2nd combined operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd combination operation unit. It is the model figure which looked at the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member and a pair of 2nd joint members were arranged at the joint position. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the annular motion unit in a state in which the annular formation member is arranged at the retracted position. It is a front perspective view of the circular ring operation unit in the state where the circular ring forming member is arranged at the coupling position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the annular motion unit which looked at the disassembled annular motion unit from the front. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the annular motion unit, which is a rear view of the exploded annular motion unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a link member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a link member, (c) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member in the portion Lc of FIG. 50(a). FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member as viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG. It is a partially expanded rear view of a ring operation unit. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the circular ring operation unit which illustrates typically the circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring formation members are arrange|positioned at the retracted position. FIG. 53 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LIII-LIII in FIG. 52. FIG. 6 is a rear schematic view of a circular ring operation unit that schematically illustrates a circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring forming members is arranged at an intermediate position between a retracted position and a coupling position. FIG. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LV-LV of FIG. 54. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a circular ring operation unit which illustrates typically a circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring formation members are arranged at a connecting position. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56. It is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit in a state where an arm member is projected to a projecting position. 9 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position. FIG. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit in a state where the arm member is retracted to the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rocking|swiveling motion unit which looked at the disassembled rocking|swiveling motion unit from the front. 61A is a rear view of the swing motion unit in a state where the arm member is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in the portion LXIb of FIG. 61A. is there. 62A is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and FIG. 62B is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in a portion LXIIb of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in a portion LXIIIb of FIG. 63(a). 64A is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and FIG. 64B is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in the portion LXIVb of FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1 ), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, a general prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structural bodies arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device provides a round of jackpots. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  The "high probability state" is a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot is finished, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (probably changing), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probable change or during the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is generated by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") which performs variable display, and an LED which variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

  In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big hit, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side below the first winning opening 64, and has a circular shape having the same size as the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. The second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a big hit stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 has a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a and a large opening solenoid (for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis). (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the closed state and the closed state of are alternately repeated.

  Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening that is a guide path that guides the sphere to the second specific winning opening 650a and an opening that is opposite to the second specific winning opening 650a side of the guiding path. 651, a driving member 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the driving member 650b to open and close in the left-right direction about the lower side of the opening 651. It has and. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening which is opened and closed separately in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a triggered by the ball winning in the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during a predetermined time, The game state opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, It is not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 and a second outlet 72. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through a first out opening 71 or a second out opening 72. You will be guided to the road. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, while the second outlet 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, the second outlet 72 is arranged on the opposite side of the first outlet 71 with the second specific winning opening 650a interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 2) from the second specific winning opening 650a is the inner rail. 61 or flowed down along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and guided to the ball discharge path through the first outlet 71, while on the left side in front view of the second specific winning port 650a, the lower end of the game area (the inner rail 61). ) Which has reached (), flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second outlet 72.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device, by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are axes. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 340, 430, 522, 640, 740, 830.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the layout (arrangement) of each component of the game board 13 such as the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the outlets 71, 72 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, the respective components such as the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are schematically illustrated, and a part of the game board 13 is partially enlarged and illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the front view of the game area, the inner rail 61 has a portion arranged on the lower right side (a portion on the right side of the first outlet 71) linearly extended and It is formed so as to be inclined upward in the direction away from the 1-out port 71.

  A resin outer edge member 73 that defines the outer edge of the game area together with the rails 61 and 62 is provided between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It The outer edge member 73 is provided with a circular arc wall portion 73a formed by providing a circular arc wall surface extending from the outer rail 62 on the inner surface side, and is continuously provided below the circular arc wall portion 73a in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). A vertical wall portion 73b formed by providing a wall surface extending linearly along the inner surface side, and a vertical wall portion 73b continuously provided below the vertical wall portion 73b and extending linearly while descending and leaning toward the inner rail 61. The inclined wall portion 73c is formed by providing the wall surface provided on the inner surface side.

  In this way, the game area defined by the inner rail 61, the outer rail 62, and the outer edge member 73 has a substantially circular part (the lower right part in FIG. 5) formed in a substantially rectangular shape and expanded outward. Shaped. Specifically, the region defined by the linear portion of the inner rail 61 disposed on the right side of the first outlet 71 and the inclined wall portion 73c and the vertical wall portion 73b of the outer edge member 73 has a substantially rectangular shape. Formed in.

  As a result, as compared with the case where the game area is formed into a substantially circular shape by extending the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, the game area as a whole has a substantially rectangular area (lower right portion in FIG. 5). The area can be expanded. Therefore, the enlarged area is used as a space for arranging the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, and the like. Alternatively, it can be utilized as a space for forming a path for letting the ball flow down, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the respective winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, the flow path of the ball, etc. can be increased. As a result, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered (downward in FIG. 5), and accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 can be increased in size.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, below the third symbol display device 81, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in series along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). Was there. Therefore, the space required below the third symbol display device 81 is increased in the vertical direction, and the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81 is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the enlarged portion of the game area (substantially rectangular area, the lower right portion in FIG. 5) is provided as an installation space such as a winning opening or a flow path for the ball. It can be used as a space. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are not arranged directly under the first winning opening 64, but are arranged in the enlarged portion of the game area described above. Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered to that extent, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  According to the gaming machine 13 of the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but is located on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (variable winning device). The position opposite to 65, the left side in FIG. 5), and the position where the inner rail 61 (the lower edge of the game area) is abutted (that is, the ball cannot pass between the second specific winning port 650a and the inner rail 61). Will be located). Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered by that amount, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In this case, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, by providing two routes (first out port 71 and second out port 72) for discharging the balls from the game area to the ball discharging route, It is possible to further increase the size of the three-symbol display device 81.

  That is, in order to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, so that it is necessary to lower the position of the winning opening accordingly. For example, when the position of the first winning opening 64 is lowered downward, the guide plate member 74 (a member for guiding the ball at the time of right hitting (the ball that has passed the right side of the variable display device unit 80) to the second specific winning opening 650a. In order to secure a space for allowing the ball to flow down between the position) and the first winning port 64, it is necessary to lower the position. As a result, the position of the second specific winning port 650a also needs to be lowered.

  However, if the position of the second specific winning port 650a falls too downward, it becomes impossible to secure a space for letting the ball flow down below the second specific winning port 650a (between the inner rail 61). That is, the ball that has not flown into the winning port and flows down cannot be discharged from the out port arranged below the first winning port 64. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the second specific winning opening 650a, which becomes a factor that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be made sufficiently large.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the first outlet 71, the second outlet 72 sandwiches the second specific winning port 650a, and the first outlet 71. Since it is arranged on the opposite side (that is, the first out opening 71 and the second out opening 72 are respectively arranged on the right side and the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a), the ball flowing down the game area. In addition, the sphere that has reached the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 5) with respect to the second specific winning opening 650a is inclined to the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73. It can be made to flow down along and be discharged to the ball discharge path by the first outlet 71, while the ball reaching the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side in front view from the second specific winning hole 650a is of the inner rail 61. It can be made to flow down along the inclination (curvature) and discharged from the second outlet 72 to the ball discharge path.

  In this way, by providing the paths for discharging the balls from the game area to the ball discharging path at two locations (the first out opening 71 and the second out opening 72), below the second specific winning opening 650a (inner rail It is not necessary to secure a space for allowing the ball to flow down (between 61). Therefore, the position of the second specific winning port 650a can be lowered further (close to or adjacent to the inner rail 61), so that the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered accordingly, and by extension, the position. Since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, the second winning port 640 and the first specific winning port 65a are arranged offset to the right side of the board, and the second winning port 650a is offset to the left side of the board and close to the inner rail 61. By being arranged (or abutting), the effect by the rotary motion unit 300 can be more effectively performed.

  That is, when the player makes a right hit, only the right side of the board on which the ball flows down is noticed by the player, and particularly for a ball that has not been awarded to the second winning opening 640, The flow down is rarely noticed by the player. In this case, in this embodiment, among the spheres that have passed to the right of the variable display device unit 80, the spheres that have passed above the second winning opening 640 from right to left pass above the guide plate member 74, It flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, even if the second winning port 640 is not won, then an opportunity to win the second specific winning port 650a occurs, and from the expectation of winning the second specific winning port 650a, A ball passing from the right side to the left side above the winning opening 640 can be noticed (directed to the player). This allows the player's line of sight to be directed toward the center of the board surface below the variable display device unit 80. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the first winning opening 64, and the rotary operation unit 300 is visible through the game board 13 (through the game board 13). Therefore, when a ball that has not been awarded to the second winning opening 640 flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the player can visually recognize the effect produced by the rotation operation unit 300, and the rotation operation is performed. The staging effect of the unit 300 can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the game board 13, the base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and the rotary operation unit 300 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 is made visible to the player from the front side. Is possible. Here, the rotary operation unit 300 is a device that is operated by the winning of the first winning opening 64 or by the result of the lottery due to the winning, and on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), It is arranged at a position corresponding to the one winning opening 64.

  Therefore, with respect to the player who visually follows the ball flowing down toward the first winning opening 64, especially when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the rotation operation is performed behind the first winning opening 64. Since the effect produced by the unit 300 can be visually recognized, the effect associated with the winning of the ball at the first winning opening 64 can be effectively performed. The detailed configuration of the rotary operation unit 300 will be described later.

  In this case, since the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in the left-right direction (the width direction of the game area, the right direction in FIG. 5) with respect to the first winning port 64, they are arranged accordingly. The positions of the first winning opening 64 and the rotation operation unit 300 can be lowered downward (downward in FIG. 5), and as a result, the rotation operation unit 300 is located at a position corresponding to the first winning opening 64 and at the game board 13 Even when it is arranged on the back side of the (base plate 60), it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, when the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged vertically in series like a conventional pachinko machine, a position corresponding to the first winning port 64. In arranging the rotary operation unit 300 on the rear surface side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the rotary operation unit 300 interferes with the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning a prize device 65. The space required for arranging the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 is increased in the vertical direction, which hinders the third symbol display device 81 from becoming large.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in the left-right direction with respect to the first winning port 64. Since they are arranged to be offset in the (width direction of the game area), it is possible to avoid interference between the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650 and the rotary operation unit 300, and As a result, the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered, and the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In particular, with regard to the first variable winning device 65, by offsetting to the right by utilizing a substantially rectangular area on the lower right side of the game area, a sufficient amount of the offset can be secured, and the second variable With respect to the winning device 650, the second outlet 72 is provided in addition to the first outlet 71, so that the position thereof can be lowered without considering the space below for the ball to flow down. it can. As a result, a wider space for arranging the rotary operation unit 300 can be secured, so that the contradictory problems of increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be solved. As a result, it is possible to enhance both the effect produced by the third symbol display device 81 and the effect produced by the rotary motion unit 300.

  Here, the rotation operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape that is rotatable around the first winning opening 64. As a result, the entire periphery surrounding the first winning opening 64 can be used as an area for effect. That is, the player can visually recognize the effect produced by the rotation operation unit 300 on the back side of the first winning opening 64. Therefore, when the effect is started with the winning of the first winning opening 64 as a trigger, the effect is performed in an area centered on the first winning opening 64 in which the ball has entered, so that the first winning opening 64 It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect associated with winning the prize.

  In addition, when the player starts winning the ball into the first winning opening 64 when the state of the rotary operation unit 300 (for example, the rotating position or the lighting state) becomes a predetermined state, The game ball can be thrown toward the center of the object (rotational movement unit 300 in a predetermined state) visually recognized by the player, and the effect of the effect produced by the rotation operation unit 300 can be enhanced. ..

  Further, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape in this manner, the space around the rotary operation unit 300 can be effectively utilized, and the space for disposing other winning openings and the like can be efficiently used. Can be secured. In particular, the installation space for the second variable winning device 650 can be efficiently secured. That is, the first variable winning device 65 can be offset to the right with respect to the first winning opening 64 by utilizing the substantially rectangular enlarged area on the lower right side of the game area. While it is relatively easy to secure, in the second variable winning device 650, it is difficult to secure a sufficient amount of offset to the left with respect to the first winning port 64 because the inner rail 61 is curved in an arc shape. Become. In this case, since the rotary operation unit 300 has a substantially circular shape, a space for disposing the second variable winning device 650 is efficiently provided between the rotary operation unit 300 and the inner rail 61 on the lower left side of the rotary operation unit 300. Can be secured.

  Further, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape with the first winning opening 64 as the center, the rotary operation unit 300 can be arranged substantially in the center of the game area in the width direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 5). it can. That is, the center of the rotary motion unit 300 can be arranged on the virtual line where the distance between the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and the inner rail 61 (the vertical distance in FIG. 5) is maximum. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the limited space of the game area while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, so that a wider space for arranging the rotary motion unit 300 is secured, and the rotary motion is performed. It is possible to efficiently increase the size of the unit 300.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning opening 640 is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (on the side of the first variable winning device 65). , The right side of FIG. 5). In this case, the second winning opening 640 is arranged such that the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a space for flowing down the ball for winning the second winning opening 640 above the second winning opening 640, and by that much, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81. Can be lowered downwards. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but is located on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (first variable winning). It is arranged offset to the side opposite to the device 65, left side in FIG. In this case, the second specific winning port 650a is arranged such that the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). Thereby, it is not necessary to provide a space for flowing down the ball for winning the second specific winning opening 650a above the second specific winning opening 650a, and accordingly, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81. The position of can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, when the opening 641 of the second winning opening 640 and the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged in a position facing above the game area (upper side in FIG. 5), there is a space for letting the ball flow down. It is necessary to secure it right above the openings 641 and 651, and accordingly, it is necessary to raise the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 upward, which hinders the enlargement of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area as in the present embodiment, a space for letting the ball flow down is obliquely above the openings 641 and 651 (the upper right side in FIG. 5). The position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered downward accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the electric accessory objects 640a and 650b are provided not on the second winning port 640 and the second specific winning port 650a but on the second side. The winning holes 640 and the second specific winning holes 650a can be arranged laterally. That is, it is not necessary to secure a space for disposing the electric auditors' products 640a and 650b right above the second winning port 640 and the second specific winning port 650a, and the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered accordingly. Can be lowered to As a result, it is possible to further increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, since the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is not necessary to provide a pair of electric accessory parts 640a and 650b for opening and closing the openings 641 and 651, and only one side is provided. be able to. As a result, the capacity required for the drive means (for example, the solenoid) for driving the electric accessory 640a, 650b can be reduced, and the cost of parts can be reduced. At the same time, energy consumption can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level of winning the second winning opening 640 from being excessively lowered. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, so that the space for arranging the winning openings and the like is limited, and the arrangement position of the second winning opening 640 and the through gate 67 is limited. The space becomes narrow. Therefore, as compared with a conventional pachinko machine in which the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, the difficulty of putting the ball into the second winning opening 640 is higher. There is a risk that it will deteriorate and impair playability. Therefore, by forming the opening 641 so as to face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning from right above the second winning port 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. It is possible to make the second winning port 640 possible to win. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second winning port 640 from decreasing and improve the game playability.

  Moreover, even if the distance (the horizontal direction in FIG. 5) from the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a to the second specific winning opening 650a is lengthened by the opening 651 facing the other side in the width direction of the game area, It does not affect the distance between the third symbol display device 81 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, a sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of a ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is provided between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. You can As a result, it is possible to increase the speed of detection that the ball has won the second specific winning opening 650a, and thus the player's uplifting feeling associated with winning can be increased.

  In addition to this, it is possible to prevent over-winning into the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in the opened second specific winning opening 650a, the tenth It is desirable that the driving accessory 650b be closed immediately when the ball wins. However, when the sensor device 652 is disposed behind the base plate 60, the distance from the opening 651 to the sensor device 652 increases.

  Therefore, the period from when the tenth sphere passes through the opening 651 to when it reaches the sensor device 652, that is, the period in which the driving accessory 650b is in the open state becomes longer, and the eleventh and subsequent spheres move from the opening 651. A state in which a prize can be won in the second specific winning port 650a is formed for a long period of time, and there is a possibility that fairness of the game may be lost.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is provided between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Since it is arranged in the above, it is possible to shorten the period until the sphere that has passed through the opening 651 is detected by the sensor device 652. This makes it difficult for the 11th and subsequent balls to enter the opening 651 and prevent overwinning.

  Here, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged offset in the left-right direction (one side with the other side) of the gaming board 13, respectively. By doing so, the player can be divided into left and right parts, which contributes to improvement in playability.

  That is, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, it is easier to win the first specific winning opening 65a to the right of the variable display device unit 80, while the second specific winning opening 650a is variably displayed. It is arranged that the player who passes the left side of the unit 80 can easily win the prize. Which of the specific winning openings is to be opened is determined by the jackpot stop pattern at that time, and the player will be divided into left and right in order to aim at the opening of the specific winning opening.

  Which specific winning opening is opened can be set in units of the number (round) for each jackpot stop symbol, so only the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened each time. On the other hand, in some cases, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened alternately for each number of times (rounds).

  Therefore, it is necessary for the player to confirm which specific winning opening is to be opened in units of the number of rounds, and to hit the specific winning opening to be opened separately to the left and right. This has the effect of not only focusing on the other side, but also on the other side. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player pays attention only to one side or the other side of the game board 13, and to create a situation in which the rotary motion unit 300 arranged behind the first winning opening 64 comes into view. Thus, the rotary operation unit 300 can be paid attention, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by making a decision to make a right-and-left hit for each jackpot number (round), and by making the player make a right-and-left hit, in the same posture. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue caused by playing a game.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 13. First, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, a housing structure of the respective units 300 to 800 in the rear case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 7 to 9 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the swing motion unit 800, the ring motion unit 700, and the first combined motion unit 500 are mounted on the rear case 210, and in FIG. 9, in addition to the mounted state illustrated in FIG. Further, a state in which the second combined operation unit 600 and the combined operation unit 400 are mounted on the rear case 210 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, in the operation unit 200, one surface side (front side in FIG. 7) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The rear case 210 is formed in a box shape. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211 a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  The operation unit 200 includes a rotary operation unit 300, a combined operation unit 400, a first combined operation unit 500, a second combined operation unit 600, an annular operation unit 700, and a swinging operation unit 800 in the inner space of the rear case 210. It is housed and is constructed as one unit.

  Specifically, the first coupling operation unit 500 is at a position above the opening 211a, the ring operation unit 700 is at a position below the opening 211a, and the swing operation unit 800 is at a position on the left and right of the opening 211a. , Are respectively disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 8).

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 8, the second combined operation unit 600 is disposed on the front side of the annular operation unit 700, and the combined operation unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the swing operation unit 800 in a stacked state in which they are stacked. Then, it is housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 9). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 9, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged in a stacked state in which the rotary operation unit 300 is superposed on the front surface side of the second combined operation unit 600, and is housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 6).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second combined operation unit 600) and another operation unit (for example, the rotary operation unit 300) are arranged in a stacked state in which they are superposed on the front side. Therefore, in a front view, at least a part of the predetermined operation unit (for example, the front case body 612 of the second combined operation unit 600, see FIG. 42) can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 is made of a light-transmissive material and the operating unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, only a necessary portion of the predetermined operating unit is displayed. Can be visually recognized by the player, and other portions can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13, an outline of an operation mode of each of the units 300 to 800 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 10 to 13, FIGS. 6 to 9 are referred to as appropriate.

  10 to 13 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that, in FIG. 10, a state in which the ring forming member 790 of the ring operation unit 700 is arranged in the coupling position, and in FIG. 11 a state in which the arm member 820 of the swing motion unit 800 is arranged in the projecting position is shown. 12, the state in which the first engagement member 539 of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined member 630 of the second combined operation unit 600 are arranged at the combined position is shown in FIG. The state in which the 492 is arranged in the projecting position is shown in each figure.

  The ring operation unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790, and moves (displaces) the pair of ring forming members 790 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the coupling position shown in FIG. 10. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are distributed to the left and right, are retracted to the back side of the rotary operation unit 300, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 10, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81) and are coupled to each other (pair). The circular ring shape is formed by the circular ring forming member 790).

  The swing operation unit 800 includes a pair of arm members 820 that are swingably (rotatably) formed, and the pair of arm members 820 are disposed between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the extended position shown in FIG. Move (displace) with. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of arm members 820 are retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 11, the pair of arm members 820 project their tips into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81).

  The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 include a first engagement member 539 and a pair of second coupling members 630, respectively, and the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are illustrated. It moves (displaces) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 9 and the coupling position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the first engagement member 539 is retracted to the back side of the combined motion unit 400, and the second coupling member 630 is retracted to the back side of the combined motion unit 400, which are visually recognized by the player. Disabled (see Figure 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 12, the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81), Combined with each other.

  The combined operation unit 400 includes four members (operation members 491 and 492) that are swingably (rotatably) formed, and these four members (operation members 491 and 492) are moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. And the projecting position shown in FIG. 13 is operated (displaced). In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the four members (operating members 491 and 492) are retracted to the side of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the third symbol display device 81), and two pairs are respectively set. They are arranged in a straight line along the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 13, the four members (operating members 491 and 492) have their tips projecting into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81). , Are arranged so as to extend in a radial straight line from the center of the opening 211a.

  The rotary operation unit 300 includes a rotary member 330 that is rotatably formed, and rotates the rotary member 330. As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the rotary member 330 of the rotary operation unit 300 is rotated at a fixed position, and the operation members 491 and 492 of the combined operation unit 400 are at the extended position or the retracted position. Since it is arranged at the forefront in any position, it is always visible to the player via the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

  Each of these operation units 300 to 800 is formed so as to be independently operable, and as described above, the operation units 300 to 800 are arranged in a stacked (stacked) state. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, not only each of the operation units 300 to 800 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The rotary operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the rotary motion unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rotary motion unit 300.

  As described above, the rotation operation unit 300 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) at a position (a position overlapping in a front view) corresponding to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5). A reception member 361 is provided in the center of the front face, and a ball won in the first winning opening 64 is received from the reception port 361 and guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the guide path 380. To do.

  On the front side of the rotary operation unit 300, a rotary member 330 having an annular shape in a front view and a decorative member 370 that is a resin member for decoration are arranged, and a receiving port 361 is provided at a substantially central portion of the rotary member 330. (Fixing member 360) is arranged. The rotating member 330 is rotatably formed of a light-transmissive resin material, transmits the lighting and blinking of the LED arranged on the back side thereof to the front side, and rotates itself, so that the first prize is obtained. A predetermined effect is performed around the mouth 64 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 5).

  16 and 17 are exploded front perspective views of the rotational operation unit 300 in which the exploded rotational operation unit 300 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 16 illustrates a state in which only the rotating member 330 is disassembled. Further, in FIG. 17, the illustration of the decoration member 370 is omitted, and a part of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the rotary operation unit 300 includes a case body 310 that forms a skeleton on the rearmost side thereof, an electric decoration base 320 fixed to the case body 310, and a front surface of the electric decoration base 320. And a plurality of gears (first gear 351, second gear 352, and third gear 353) for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 340 to the rotation member 330, A fixing member 360 for fixing the first gear 351 of the plurality of gears to the case body 310, and a decoration member 370 arranged around the case body 310 are mainly provided and configured.

  The case body 310 includes an electric decoration base mounting portion 311 formed in a substantially annular shape in front view corresponding to the electric decoration base portion 320, and a gear mounting portion formed by retracting rearward from the electric decoration base mounting portion 311. 312, and the illumination base mounting portion 311 and the mounting base 313 that extends outward from the outer edge of the gear mounting portion 312 are mainly provided, and these are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The decoration base 320 is fixed on the front side and the decoration member 370 is fixed on the outer circumference of the decoration base attachment portion 311 by fastening screws. The gear mounting portion 312 is formed by concatenating three recesses each having a substantially circular shape in a front view, which are recessed corresponding to the outer shapes of the first gear 351 to the third gear 353, respectively, and the first gear 351 is formed in each of these recesses. The third gears 353 are housed (disposed).

  An opening 311a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the decorative base mounting portion 311 above the portion of the gear mounting portion 312 in which the first gear 351 is stored. Since the opening 311a is formed in the case body 310, the rotating member 330 (fastened portion 333) is attached to the first gear 351 (fastening seat portion 351d) from the back surface side of the case body 310 by the fastening screw through the opening 311a. Can be fastened and fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being exposed on the front side of the rotating member 330 and improve the appearance thereof.

  In the gear mounting portion 312, a passage opening 314, a fastened portion 315, an insertion portion 316, and a guide convex portion 317 are formed in a concave portion in which the first gear 351 is stored. The passage port 314 is a passage that communicates with the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360, and guides the sphere that has flowed in from the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360 to the guide passage 380 formed on the back side of the case body 310.

  Note that the guide passage 380 is formed as a passage through which a ball can pass between the attached member and the back surface of the case body 310 by mounting a member having a U-shaped cross section on the back surface of the case body 310. (See FIG. 15). The guide passage 380 communicates with the passage opening 314 on the back surface of the case body 310 and extends downward.

  The mounting pedestal 313 is provided with an insertion hole, and the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600, so that the rotary operation unit 300 is second coupled. It is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210 via the operation unit 600 (see FIGS. 9 and 42).

  The fastened portion 315 is a portion (a concave portion having a female screw engraved on the inner circumference) to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear mounting portion 312 is fastened, and the left and right sides with the passage port 314 interposed therebetween. A pair is formed at an asymmetric position (see FIG. 18). The insertion portion 315 inserts a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the gear attachment portion 312 (case body 310) to the front case body 612 (see FIGS. 9 and 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 on the rear side. It is a through hole and is formed above the passage port 314.

  The guide protrusion 317 is a rail-shaped portion for guiding the rotation of the first gear 351 and is provided as a protrusion having an annular shape in front view so as to protrude from the front surface of the gear mounting portion 312. A guide recess 351e, which is annular in a front view and corresponds to the guide portion 317, is provided on the back surface of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 19), and the guide protrusion 317 is fitted into the guide recess 351e. The rotational position of the first gear 351 with respect to the gear mounting portion 312 is defined.

  Here, the gear mounting portion 312 is arranged at a position (eccentric position) where the passage opening 314 is displaced downward from the center in a circular area in front view formed by being surrounded by the guide convex portion 317. The fastened portions 315 are arranged on the left and right sides of the passage opening 314, and the insertion portion 316 is arranged above the passage opening 314. Accordingly, as will be described later, the rigidity of the case body 310 and the fixing member 360 can be secured while efficiently securing a space for fastening and fixing in a limited space.

  In the gear mounting portion 312, a shaft portion 318 is projectingly provided in a concave portion in which the second gear 352 is housed. The shaft portion 318 is a shaft body for pivotally supporting the second gear 352, and is inserted into a shaft hole 352 a formed at the center of the second gear 352. In the present embodiment, it is possible to omit providing the second gear 352 with a retaining member at the tip of the shaft portion 318 inserted into the shaft hole 352a of the second gear 352. Details will be described later.

  On the back surface of the gear mounting portion 312, the drive motor 340 is disposed at a position corresponding to the recess that houses the third gear 353. The drive motor 340 is arranged with its drive shaft 340a projecting to the front of the gear mounting portion 312 (within the recess in which the third gear 353 is housed), and the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a. It

  The illumination base 320 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and has a board portion 321 on which a plurality of LEDs 321a are mounted on the front side, and a front surface of the board portion 321 and a plurality of front surfaces of the board portion 321. And a partition section 322 for partitioning into a region.

  Specifically, the partition portion 322 is provided with a predetermined interval between the inner edge rib 322a and the outer edge rib 322b which are provided along the inner edge and the outer edge of the substrate portion 321 and which are annular in a front view, and the ribs 322a and 322b. An annular intermediate rib 322c formed concentrically in a front view and a plurality of radial ribs 322d extending radially outward from the center of each of the ribs 322a to 322c intersect in a lattice pattern. Is arranged. The plurality of radiating ribs 322d are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (at intervals of about 30 degrees in this embodiment).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the illumination base 320, 12 areas on the inner peripheral side and 12 areas on the outer peripheral side, that is, a total of 24 areas are partitioned by the partitioning section 322, and each of the partitioned areas is respectively One or two LEDs 321a are arranged. Accordingly, when each LED 321a is individually turned on or blinked, the difference in brightness between the region related to the lighting or blinking and the region not related to the lighting or blinking can be increased, and as a result, the staging effect is enhanced. be able to.

  The rotating member 330 includes a rotating main body 331 having an opening in the center thereof and having an annular shape in a front view, and a cylindrical outer wall portion 332 axially extending from an outer edge of the rotating main body 331. Formed integrally with a flexible resin material. The inner diameter of the opening formed in the center of the rotating body 331 corresponds to the outer diameter of the fixing member 360, and in the assembled state, the fixing member 360 is housed in the opening of the rotating body 331 (see FIG. 14 ).

  Fastened portions 333 are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) on the back surface of the rotating body 331. The fastened portion 333 is a portion (a concave portion having an internal thread engraved on the inner circumference) to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the rotating body 331 (rotating member 330) to the first gear 351 is fastened. They are arranged at the same distance from the center of 331 and at positions which are unequal in the circumferential direction.

  On the front surface of the rotary body 331, a plurality of annular projections 331a to 331e that are formed in an annular shape in a front view and are arranged concentrically, and radiate outward from the center of the annular projections 331a to 331e. A plurality of linearly extending radiation projections 331f are provided to project. The plurality of radiating protrusions 331f are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (at intervals of about 30 degrees in this embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, the circumferential spacing of the radiating protrusions 331f is matched with the circumferential spacing of the radiating ribs 322d of the illuminated base 320.

  The rotary main body 331 is formed to have a uniform thickness (thickness dimension) as a whole, and in the portion where the annular protrusions 331a to 331e or the radial protrusion 331f are projected, the thickness corresponding to that protrusion ( The thickness dimension) is made thicker (larger). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for light to pass through at the portions where the protrusions 331a to 331f are provided.

  In this case, in the assembled state of the rotary operation unit 300, the outer edge rib 322b of the partitioning member 322 is located at a position corresponding to the annular protrusion 331e located on the outermost radial direction (a position overlapping in a front view), and the annular protrusion 331d. The intermediate ribs 322c of the partition member 322 are respectively arranged at positions next to the outer side in the radial direction next to each other and at positions corresponding to the annular protrusions 331d and 331c (positions that overlap in a front view). ..

  As described above, since the rotating member 330 has the regions corresponding to the regions partitioned by the partitioning member 322 of the illumination base 320 partitioned by the protrusions 331 a to 331 f, the LEDs 321 a of the illumination base 320. When each is individually turned on or blinked, it is possible to increase the difference in brightness between the region related to the lighting or blinking and the region not related to the lighting or blinking, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  As described above, in the rotating member 330, the division of the region is achieved by projecting the annular protrusions 331a to 331e and the radiation protrusion 331f from the front side and increasing the thickness dimension. Accordingly, for example, it is not necessary to perform printing for partitioning an area on the front surface of the rotating member 330 or to arrange another member, and the entire rotating member 330 can be formed in a single color, so that the product cost can be reduced. In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to enhance the staging effect.

  In the rotating member 330, the inner diameter dimension of the outer wall portion 332 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the partition member 322 (outer edge rib 322b) of the decorative base 320, and in the assembled state, the inner wall dimension of the outer wall portion 332 is reduced. The partition member 322 of the illumination base 320 is fitted in the peripheral side. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light of the LED 321a from leaking from the outer peripheral side of the partition member 322, and to efficiently irradiate the light to the front side. Further, when the rotating member 330 is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351, the partition member 322 is internally fitted to the outer wall portion 332 so that the inner member and the partition member 322 can be aligned with each other. Can be rotated relative to each other. That is, each of the fastened portions 333 of the rotating member 330 can be aligned with the fastening seat portion 351d (insertion hole) of the first gear 351 only by rotating the two relatively, and the position in the radial direction is adjusted. Since there is no need to do so, workability can be improved accordingly.

  The first gear 351 has a first main body 351a that has an opening in the center and allows the fixing member 360 to be inserted into the opening, and a tooth formed on the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a. 351b, a first flange portion 351c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a in a flange shape at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the teeth 351b, and a third flange portion thereof. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening seats 351d protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than 351c, and the first main body 351a. And a guide recess 351e (see FIG. 19) which is provided on the back side of the gear mounting portion 312 and through which the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted, and by fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear mounting portion 312, It is rotatably held between the fixing member 360 and the gear mounting portion 312.

  The first gear 351 is formed by the first flange portion 351c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first body 351a, and thus the rigidity of the first gear 351 can be increased by the first flange portion 351c. In particular, in the present embodiment, the first flange portion 351c is connected to the axial end surfaces of the teeth 351b, so that the rigidity of the teeth 351b can be increased. As a result, the meshing state with the second gear 352 can be made proper, the transmission efficiency can be improved, and the durability of the teeth 351b, 352b can be improved. Further, since the first flange portion 351c also serves as a retainer for the second gear 352, as will be described later, it is possible to reduce the component cost by omitting the retainer component.

  The fastening seat portion 351d is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 333 of the rotary body 331 (rotary member 330), and is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastened portion 333 of the rotary body 331, respectively. That is, each fastening seat portion 351d is formed with an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastened portion 333, and the insertion holes are at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It is a position, and it is arrange|positioned in the position which becomes an unequal interval in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 can be fastened and fixed only at one phase position. Therefore, when the rotating member 330 is assembled to the first gear 351, the operator makes a mistake in the circumferential position. Can be avoided by assembling.

  In order to enable the fastening and fixing of the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 only at one phase position, the insertion holes of the respective fastening seat portions 351 are not necessarily provided at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It need not be provided. The insertion holes of each fastening seat portion 351 may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at different positions from the center of the rotary body 331.

  However, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable to dispose the insertion holes of the respective fastening seat portions 351 at positions at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. That is, since the fastening seat portions 351d can have the same length dimension (overhanging length), when the first gear 351 is injection-molded from a resin material, its moldability can be improved. is there.

Here, in order to fasten and fasten the fastening screw from the back side of the case body 310 to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 through the insertion hole of the fastening seat portion 351d, it is necessary to form the opening 311a in the case body 310. There is. In this case, when the insertion holes of the fastening members 351 are arranged at different distances from the center of the first gear 351, the movement loci of the insertion holes are different, and the opening width of the opening 311a is increased accordingly. However, according to the present embodiment, the movement loci of the respective insertion holes can be made the same, so that the opening width of the opening 311a can be suppressed to the minimum.

The second gear 352 includes a second main body 352a having a circular shape in a front view, teeth 352b formed on the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 352a, and a shaft hole 352c formed at the center of the second main body 352a. When the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c, the gear mounting portion 312 is rotatably held in the state of being meshed with the first gear 351.

  The third gear 353 includes a third main body 353a having a circular shape when viewed from the front, teeth 353b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and the front side of the third gear 353 (rotating member 330 relative to the teeth 353b). Side) and a third flange portion 353c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a in a flange shape, and the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 370 is fixed to the third main body 353a. It is held by the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340 in a state of being meshed with the second gear 352.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 340 is rotationally driven and the third gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 is rotated, and the rotation of the second gear 352 is changed to the first rotation. It is transmitted to the first gear 351 and the first gear 351 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 340 is transmitted to the rotary member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351 via the fastening seat portion 351d and the fastened portion 333, and the rotary member 330 is rotated.

  As in the case of the first gear 351, the third gear 353 is formed by the third flange portion 353c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a. The rigidity of can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, the third flange portion 353c is connected to the axial end surface of the tooth 353b, so that the rigidity of the tooth 353b can be increased. As a result, the meshing state with the second gear 352 can be made proper, the transmission efficiency can be improved, and the durability of the teeth 353b, 352b can be improved. Further, since the third flange portion 353c also serves as a retainer for the second gear 352, as will be described later, it is possible to reduce the component cost by omitting the retainer component.

  The fixing member 360 is a cylindrical member for fixing the first gear 351 to the gear mounting portion 312, and includes a receiving port 361 and an insertion portion 362. The receiving opening 361 is a passage that communicates with the first winning opening 64 in a state of being attached to the game board 13, and guides the sphere that has flowed in from the first winning opening 64 to the passage opening 314 of the gear mounting portion 312. The insertion portion 362 is a through hole for inserting a fastening screw that fastens or inserts the fixing member 360 into the fastened portion 315 or the insertion portion 316 of the gear mounting portion 312.

  18A is a front view of the case body 310, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the fixing member 360. Note that FIG. 18A illustrates a state in which the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353 are arranged in the case body 310, and also shows one of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353. The part is partially sectioned.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the passage opening 314 formed in the gear mounting portion 312 of the case body 310 is downward from the center of the first gear 351 as described above (see FIG. a) Displaced (eccentric) on the lower side. Therefore, in the gear mounting portion 312, in the annular region formed around the passage opening 314, the width dimension above the passage opening 314 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18A) is smaller than the width dimension below the passage opening 314. Widened.

  Similarly, with respect to the fixing member 360 that is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the first gear 351 and is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312, the receiving port 361 formed in the fixing member 360 is located below the center of the fixing member 360 ( The position is shifted (eccentric) in the lower side of FIG. 18B. Therefore, in the fixing member 360, in the annular region formed around the receiving opening 361, the width dimension above the receiving opening 361 (vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) is wider than the lower width dimension. To be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the passage opening 314 and the reception opening 361 are displaced (eccentric), and a wide (enlarged width) portion is formed in a part of the periphery (annular region) thereof. Since the insertion portions 316 and 362 are arranged (drilled) in the widened portions, respectively, the limited space can be effectively utilized to form a large-diameter hole, and even in such a case, the case body 310 can be formed. Also, the rigidity of the fixing member 360 can be ensured.

  That is, the insertion portions 316 and 362 are formed as holes through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the rotary operation unit 300 to the front case body 612 (see FIG. 9 or 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 can be inserted. Since it is a part, and a large-diameter fastening screw is inserted because it supports a large amount of weight, it needs to be formed as a relatively large-diameter hole. By forming the (enlarged) portion, it is possible to efficiently secure a space for forming a large-diameter hole by utilizing such a portion. On the other hand, even when such a large-diameter hole is formed, the rigidity can be secured because the hole is formed in a partially widened region.

  FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the support structure of the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353 by the case body 310, and corresponds to the arrow XIX direction view of FIG. 18. In addition, in FIG. 19, the case body 310 is viewed in cross section, and a part of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 is partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first gear 351 is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 by fitting the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the guide recess 351e provided on the back side. It Further, the first gear 351 is restricted by the fixing member 360 that is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312 from dropping from the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19 ). On the other hand, the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340. Note that, as a method of fixing, for example, a method of press-fitting or a method of using an adhesive is exemplified.

  In the second gear 352, the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c formed in the second main body 352a, so that the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 have teeth 352b of the first gear 351 and the teeth 351b of the third gear 353. , 353b in mesh with each other, are rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312.

  In this case, as described above, the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 have the first flange portion 351c and the third flange 351c that project radially outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the first body 351a and the third body 353a. Each of the portions 353c is formed, and the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c are extended to a position overlapping the axial end surface of the second gear 352. As a result, the second gear 352 can be restricted from coming out of the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19). As a result, it is not necessary to dispose a retaining component at the tip of the shaft portion 318, so the number of components can be reduced and the component cost can be reduced accordingly. In addition, at the time of assembly, for the second gear 352, it is sufficient to insert the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, and the step of mounting the retaining component can be omitted. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the third flange portion 353c of the third gear 353 come into contact with the second gear 352 at two different locations, the second gear 352 moves in the axial direction. Not only is it possible to reliably prevent the second gear 352 from slipping out, but it is possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while being inclined with respect to the shaft portion 318. As a result, the meshing state between the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 and the teeth 351b, 353b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 can be made appropriate, and transmission efficiency and durability can be improved. In particular, the two positions that are in contact with the second gear 352 are set at positions where the phases differ by about 180 degrees, so that the above-described effects can be more remarkably exhibited. The phases at the two locations are preferably set within the range of about 160 degrees to about 180 degrees.

  Here, it suffices for the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 to be protruded toward the mountain peak side from the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353b. This is because if the teeth 351b and the teeth 353 project beyond the valleys, they can contact the crest-side end surfaces of the teeth 352b of the second gear 352. Further, it is possible to suppress the material required for forming the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c, and to reduce the weight and the material cost. However, it is preferable that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c project further radially outward than the crest side of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353. This is because the inclination of the second gear 352 can be suppressed more reliably.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 30.

  The composite operation unit 400 includes the four members (operation members 491 and 492) as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 13), and operates (displaces) each of the members (operation members 491 and 492). It consists of four units for That is, in the front view of the rear case 210, the combined operation unit 400 includes two units that are vertically arranged on the left side of the opening 211a and two units that are vertically arranged on the right side of the opening 211a. It consists of two units. In this case, the structure (technical idea) for moving (displacement) each member (moving member 491, 492) is the same in each of the four units, and therefore, in the following, one unit of these four units will be described. (A unit arranged above the right side of the opening 211a, see FIGS. 7 and 13) will be described as a combined operation unit 400.

  FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. 20, in the composite operation unit 400, operation members 491 and 492 are arranged on the front surface side of the mounting base 410, and the operation members 491 and 492 are made to perform the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation in a combined manner (FIG. 27). That is, the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged so as to face each other in a posture in which the longitudinal directions of the operating members are parallel to each other, and the operation of opening and closing the facing interval (opening and closing operation) and the base side of the mounting base 410 are performed. An operation of rotating as a center (rotation operation) is formed to be executable. A decorative member 411 formed as a decorative body is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 410.

  In this embodiment, two types of operation modes (opening/closing operation and rotating operation) of the operation members 491 and 492 are formed so that one drive motor 430 can execute them. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the drive motor 430 for the two types of operation modes, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. The detailed configuration of this structure will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400 in which the exploded combined operation unit 400 is viewed from the front. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400 in a state where a part of the composite operation unit 400 is disassembled. The configuration illustrated on the left side of FIG. 22 is viewed from the front and illustrated on the right side of FIG. 22. The configuration is viewed from the rear. 21 and 22, the decoration member 411 is omitted, and in FIG. 22, the attachment base 410 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the combined operation unit 400 includes a mounting base 410 arranged on the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7 ), a holding case 420 mounted on the mounting base 410, and a holding case 420 thereof. A plurality of gears that are rotatably supported on the back side, a drive motor 430 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the plurality of gears, and a rear arm whose base end is rotatably supported on a holding case 420. The body 471 and the front arm body 472, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 that are narrowed between the facing surfaces of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and The 1st pinion leg member 482 and the operating members 491 and 492 connected to the tip of the 2nd pinion leg member 483 are mainly provided.

  The holding case 420 includes a back case body 421 that is attached to the mounting base 410 and a front case body 422 that faces the front side of the back case body 421. The back case body 421 and the front case body 422 include A plurality of gears are rotatably supported and housed in an internal space formed between the facing members.

  In the holding case 420, a drive motor 430 is arranged on the back side of the back case body 421, and between the back case body 421 and the front case body 422 facing each other, three rotary shafts (the reduction shaft 425, The 1st shaft 426 and the 2nd shaft 427) are each installed in a posture parallel to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430, and a plurality of gears are rotatably supported by the second shaft 427 from these reduction shafts 425. A pinion gear 431 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430.

  The plurality of gears include a reduction gear 441 pivotally supported by a reduction shaft 425, an opening/closing first gear 451 and a rotating first gear 461 pivotally supported by a first shaft 426, and an opening/closing pivotally supported by a second shaft 427. It comprises a second gear 452 and a rotating second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The reduction gear 441 includes a large-diameter gear 441a and a small-diameter gear 441b that is integrally formed coaxially with the large-diameter gear 441a, and reduces the rotation of the pinion gear 431 and transmits the rotation to the opening/closing first gear 451. .. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening/closing first gear 451, the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461, and the rotating second gear 462 will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the opening/closing first gear 451, the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461, and the rotating second gear 462. The opening/closing first gear 451 has a main body portion 451a, an insertion hole 451b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 451a and having the first shaft 426 inserted therethrough, and the opening/closing first gear 451 is engraved on the outer circumference of the main body portion 451a around the insertion hole 451b. The tooth 451c to be provided, a pair of connecting projections 451d projecting from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body portion 451a and sandwiching the insertion hole 451b, and formed through the main body portion 451a to the side of the insertion hole 451b. The positioning hole 451e is located.

The rotating first gear 461 is a gear that is disposed on the front side of the opening/closing first gear 451 and is pivotally supported together with the opening/closing first gear 451 on the first shaft 426 (see FIGS. 21 and 22 ). And an insertion hole 461b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 461a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, teeth 461c carved in a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 461a around the insertion hole 461b, and the main body portion 451a. A pair of connecting holes 461d that are formed so as to penetrate therethrough and are positioned with the insertion hole 461b interposed therebetween, and a detected portion 461e that is formed to project radially outward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 451a and that is detected by an optical sensor.
In the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461, the outer peripheral surface of the area excluding the area where the tooth 461c is formed (that is, the tooth 461c is not formed) is a cylindrical surface whose center is the axis of the insertion hole 461b (hereinafter "Cylindrical surface 461a1"). The outer diameter of the cylindrical surface 461a1 (the distance from the axis of the insertion hole 461b) is smaller than the outer diameter of the tip circle of the tooth 461c and larger than the outer diameter of the root circle of the tooth 461c. Thereby, as described later, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 and the rigidity of the non-forming surface 462a1 forming portion of the rotating second gear 462 at the same time.

  In addition, a pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 are respectively formed in the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 so as to be internally fittable, and by this fitting, rotation with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451 is performed. The rotation position (phase) of the first gear 461 can be positioned, and both can be connected and integrally rotated in the same phase.

  The opening/closing second gear 452 includes a main body portion 452a, an insertion hole 452b formed through the main body portion 452a and into which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 452a with the insertion hole 452b as the center. The tooth 452c is provided, a connecting projection 452d that projects from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 452a, and a positioning hole 452e that is formed through the main body 452a.

  The opening/closing second gear 452 is arranged with the back arm body 471 being sandwiched between the back case body 421 (that is, on the front side of the back arm body 471), and the pivotal support of the back arm body 471 is provided. An insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by a cylindrical portion provided upright along the hole 471a (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Further, the connecting protrusion 452d of the second opening/closing second gear 452 is connected to the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, and the rotation of the second opening/closing second gear 452 is transmitted to the slide rack member 481 via this connection (FIG. 26).

  The rotating second gear 462 includes a main body 462a, an insertion hole 462b penetratingly formed through the main body 462a and into which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a part of the outer periphery of the main body 462a with the insertion hole 462b as the center. A tooth 462c to be provided, a pair of connecting protrusions 462d which are projected from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 462a and have a hole formed therethrough, and a positioning hole 462e which is formed to penetrate the main body 452a. Equipped with.

  The main body portion 462a of the rotating second gear 462 is provided on both sides of the tooth 462c and has an outer peripheral surface (hereinafter referred to as "non-forming surface 462a1") in a region where the tooth is not formed on the side of the insertion hole 462b. It is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward (that is, has a center of curvature on the radially outer side). Specifically, the curvature of the non-forming surface 462a1 is set to the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or a slightly smaller curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

  Further, the rotating second gear 462 is arranged on the front side of the opening/closing second gear 452 (position that is stacked in the axial direction), but in a state independent of the opening/closing second gear 452 (that is, in a different phase). It is rotatably supported by the second shaft 427 in a relatively rotatable state. Further, the rotating second gear 462 is fastened to the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the hole of the connecting protrusion 462d, so that the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e are mutually connected. The two are connected. Therefore, the second rotating gear 462 and the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471) can be integrally rotated in the same phase via the connection.

  In this way, since the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 is fastened and fixed to the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462, both of them are connected via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e. The rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 can be formed as an integral structure by connecting at a plurality of locations (two locations in this embodiment). As a result, the rigidity of the rotary second gear 462 can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472.

  Here, as described below, the rotating second gear 462 receives a reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 when the non-formed surface 462a1 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (Fig. 28 to FIG. 30), it is necessary to secure rigidity to resist the reaction force. In this case, for example, if the rotating second gear 462 is made thick, the weight increases, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost increases.

  On the other hand, according to the rotating second gear 462 of the present embodiment, the rigidity of the front arm body 472 can be utilized (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472), the rigidity can be increased. It is not necessary to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to use a highly rigid material. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the second rotating gear 462 while reducing the weight and cost of the second rotating gear 462.

  In particular, the rotating second gear 462 has a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the rear surface side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (that is, in the assembled state, faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. 28 to FIG. 30), as described later, when the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the rotating first gear The rigidity of the portion of 461 that receives a reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 can be effectively increased by using the rigidity of the front case body 472 or the like or a fastening screw made of metal. As a result, the weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotating second gear 462 and the improvement in durability thereof can be further achieved at the same time.

  The gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452. Therefore, as will be described later, when the rotating first gear 461 is rotated by a unit rotation angle, the rotating second gear 462 is rotated by the same rotation angle as the opening/closing first gear 451. When the rotation is performed, the rotation angle of the rotation second gear 462 is matched with the rotation angle.

  It returns to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 and demonstrates. In the assembled state, the pinion gear 431 of the drive motor 430 is meshed with the large diameter gear 441a of the reduction gear 441, and the small diameter gear 441b of the reduction gear 441 is meshed with the opening/closing first gear 451. The open/close second gear 451 is meshed with the open/close second gear 452, and the rotary first gear 461 is meshed with the rotary second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, when the drive motor 430 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the opening/closing first gear 451 via the pinion gear 431 and the reduction gear 441, and the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated.

  In this case, as described above, since the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are connected by the inner fitting of the connecting protrusion 451d into the connecting hole 461d, they can be integrally rotated in the same phase. To be done. That is, when the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated, the rotation also rotates the rotating first gear 461, the rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the rotation of the rotating first gear 461 is rotated. Each is transmitted to the second gear 462.

  In the present embodiment, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are independent of each other and can be relatively rotated in different phases (see FIGS. 28 to 30). Therefore, while the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated by the rotating driving force of the drive motor 430, the rotating driving force is transmitted to the opening/closing second gear 452, and A state in which the rotational driving force is cut off can be formed on the second gear 462. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 is stopped and the opening/closing operation is executed. The details of the structure and operation will be described later.

  Positioning holes 421a and 421b are formed through the back case body 421 at the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, respectively. Further, corresponding to these positioning holes 421a, 421b, positioning holes 410a, 410b are also formed through the mounting base 410. That is, when the back case body 421 is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410, the positioning hole 410a is arranged to communicate with the positioning hole 421a and the positioning hole 410b is arranged to communicate with the positioning hole 421b.

  In the present embodiment, by inserting cylindrical jigs into the positioning holes 421a, 421b and the positioning holes 451e, 452e, 462e of the gears 451, 452, 462, the gears 451 and 452 with respect to the back case body 421 are inserted. , 461, 462, and the phase (rotational position) between the rotating first gear 461 and the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 and the opening/closing second gear 452. it can. The method of such positioning will be described later.

  The back arm body 471 is a member for transmitting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 to the operation members 491, 492 together with the front arm body 472, and rotating the operation members 491, 492 (see FIG. 26). A shaft support hole 471a into which the second shaft 427 is inserted, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) insertion holes 471b into which fastening screws (not shown) are inserted, a first pinion leg member 482, and a second pinion. A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) shaft portions 471c that rotatably support the leg members 483, respectively, and linearly extend along the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 as concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section. A guide groove 471d and a positioning hole 471e penetratingly formed laterally of the shaft support hole 471a.

  A collar 427a provided in the back case body 421 is inserted into the shaft support hole 471a, whereby the back arm body 471 is rotatable with respect to the back case body 421 about the second shaft 427. It Further, the cylindrical portion forming the shaft support hole 471a by the inner peripheral surface is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second opening/closing gear 452, and the second opening/closing gear 452 is rotatable by the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. Is pivotally supported by.

  The positioning holes 471e are formed at positions corresponding to the positioning holes 462 of the rotating second gear 462 and the positioning holes 452e of the opening/closing second gear 452, respectively. That is, as will be described later, when the front arm body 472 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the back arm body 471 and the rotary second gear 462 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the front arm body 472, the back arm body 471 is joined. The positioning hole 471e and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462 have the same phase (rotational position about the second shaft 427). On the other hand, in the opening/closing second gear 452, when the insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion of the rear arm body 471, the opening/closing second gear 452 is centered on the pivotally supporting portion. When rotated relative to 471 and arranged at a predetermined rotation position, the positioning hole 452e of the opening/closing second gear 452 is positioned relative to the positioning hole 471e of the rear arm body 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462. , Their phases (rotational positions about the second shaft 427) are matched.

  The front arm body 472 has a shaft support hole 472a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a fastening screw that is protruded toward the back arm body 471 and is inserted through the through hole 471b of the back arm body 471 can be fastened to the tip. (Four in this embodiment) raised fastening portions 472b formed in the above, a plurality (four in this embodiment) receiving recesses 472c which are recesses that can receive the tip of the shaft portion 471c, and a U-shaped cross section. -Shaped guide groove 472d linearly extending along the longitudinal direction of the front arm body 472, and a connecting projection 462d of the rotating second gear 462 which is arranged so as to sandwich the shaft support hole 472a ( And a connecting protrusion 472e that is fastened and fixed).

  A collar 422a arranged on the front case body 422 is inserted into the shaft support hole 472a, so that the front arm body 472 is rotatable about the second shaft 427 with respect to the front case body 422. It That is, since the front arm body 472 is connected to the rotating second gear 462 via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e, the rotating second gear 462 receives the rotational driving force from the rotating first gear 461 to generate the second When rotated about the shaft 427, the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471 connected to the front arm body 472) together with the rotating second gear 462 also rotate about the second shaft 427.

  The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are fastened to the raised fastening portions 472 of the front arm body 472 by fastening screws that are inserted into the insertion holes 471b of the back arm body 471, whereby the front arm of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 471. The body 472 and the back surface of the body 472 are coupled so as to face each other. In this case, a gap (space) corresponding to the protruding height of the raised fastening portion 472b is formed between the opposing surfaces (front surface and back surface) of both. Therefore, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 can be displaceably disposed by using this gap.

  The slide rack member 481 transmits, together with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483, the rotation of the opening/closing second gear 452 to the operating members 491 and 492 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492. It is a member (see FIGS. 26 and 27 ), and is a long body portion 481a, rack portions 481b formed as rack gears on the left and right sides of the body portion 481a, and formed at one longitudinal end of the body portion 481a. The connecting groove 481c is provided with a guide convex portion 481d that is provided so as to project from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 481 in a substantially rectangular cross section and linearly extends along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a.

  As described above, the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is a groove into which the connecting protrusion 452d of the second opening/closing gear 452 is inserted, and has a groove width that allows the connecting protrusion 452d to slide and the main body 481. Is linearly extended along a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the. In the assembled state, the guide protrusion 481d of the slide rack member 481 is inserted into the guide groove 471d, 472d of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, the direction in which the slide rack member 481 can slide with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 is the extending direction of the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472). Direction) (see FIG. 26).

  The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 include body portions 482a and 483a, shaft support holes 482b and 483b formed through one end of the body portions 482a and 483a in the longitudinal direction, and shaft support holes 482b thereof. , 483b as the pinion gears, and gear holes 482c, 483c formed as pinion gears, and connecting holes 482d, 483d penetratingly formed at the other longitudinal ends of the body portions 482a, 483a. The gear portions 482c and 483c are arranged on both left and right sides of the 481 in a state of being meshed with the rack portion 481b of the slide rack member 481.

  The shaft support holes 482b and 483b are holes in which the shaft portion 471c of the rear arm body 471 is inserted and supported in the assembled state, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are It is rotatable with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 about the shaft support holes 482b and 483b (the shaft portion 471c). Therefore, by sliding the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 are provided through the meshing of the rack portion 481b and the gear portions 482c and 483c. The pinion leg member 483 can be rotated.

  A plurality of operating members 491, 492 are formed in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface side thereof and are formed so as to be inserted into the connecting holes 482d, 483d of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 (four in this embodiment). ) The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are provided. The protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed so that fastening screws can be fastened. Therefore, the projecting tips of the raised fastening portions 491a, 492a are inserted into the connecting holes 482d, 483d, and the fastening screws are fastened to the projecting tips from the side opposite to the inserting direction, so that the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 The operation members 491 and 492 are connected to the pinion leg member 483.

  In addition, the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed with a rib-shaped portion projecting on the outer peripheral surface excluding the protruding tip thereof, and the end surface of the rib-shaped portion is formed by the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion. It is brought into contact with the front surface of the leg member 483. Accordingly, the operating members 491 and 492 can be arranged at positions raised from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 by the protrusion height of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. Therefore, even in the structure in which the front arm body 472 is arranged between the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, the second pinion leg member 483, and the operating members 491 and 492, the front arm body 472 interferes with the front arm body 472. It is possible to open and close the operation members 491 and 492 without doing so.

  A bias spring 484 composed of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of first pinion leg members 482 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the bias spring 484 is The first pinion leg members 482 are configured to act in a direction toward each other. Accordingly, when the operating members 491, 492 are closed in the opening/closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491, 492 into close contact with each other to form a gap. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, a method of positioning the opening/closing first gear 451, the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 will be described. 21 to 23 will be appropriately referred to in the description of the positioning method.

  FIGS. 24 and 25 explain the process of assembling the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in a time series. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the combined operation unit 400. 24A, the state where the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction gear 425 is different from the state shown in FIG. 24A in FIG. 24B when the first shaft 426 is opened and closed. In the state in which the first gear 451 is assembled, in FIG. 25(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are further assembled to the second shaft 427 in comparison with the state illustrated in FIG. 24(b). 25B, the state in which the rotating first gear 461 is further attached to the first shaft 426 is illustrated in FIG. 25B with respect to the state illustrated in FIG. 25A.

  Here, as described above, the combined operation unit 400 sequentially transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 to the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 through the reduction gear 441, thereby opening/closing the opening/closing second gear 452. The slide rack member 481 is displaced by the rotation of the gear 452 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 is applied to the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 via the reduction gear 441. By sequentially transmitting the rotation second gear 462, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated, and the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated.

  Therefore, in order to properly perform the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, avoid the interference between the members and the occurrence of the shift of the moving range), the opening/closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451. The rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the second rotational gear and the rotational position of the second rotational gear 462 with respect to the first rotational gear 461 are respectively positioned at predetermined rotational positions, and the respective gears 451-462 are held in the holding case. It is necessary to be attached to each 420.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to assemble these two gears after positioning the rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the other gear with respect to one gear, the operator must rotate both gears. Since it was necessary to visually adjust the position and to assemble the work, the work was complicated and the work efficiency was poor, and there was a risk of defective assembly.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative rotational position (phase, meshing position) of each of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461, and each of these rotational positions. A positioning structure for positioning the mounting positions (phases) of the gears 451, 452, 461, 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is provided, and by using this positioning structure, when assembling each of the gears 451-462 to the holding case 420, While improving the workability, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of assembly failure.

  Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction shaft 425 and meshed with the pinion gear 431. As described above, the positioning holes 410a and 410b (see FIG. 21) of the mounting base 410 communicate with the positioning holes 421a and 421b of the back case body 421, respectively. , 410b are respectively inserted with jigs (not shown), and the jigs are projected from the positioning holes 421a, 421b to the front side of the back case body 421. The jig is formed as a columnar body having a circular cross section having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 410a or the like.

  Next, the opening/closing first gear 451 is assembled (axially supported) to the first shaft 426 while inserting the jig projecting from the positioning hole 421a of the back case body 421 into the positioning hole 451e of the opening/closing first gear 451. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 24B, the opening/closing first gear 451 can be meshed with the reduction gear 441, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening/closing first gear 451 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned. ..

  While maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the opening/closing first gear 451), the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are then moved to the first position. Assemble on the shaft 427 (support it).

  The second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotating gear 462 are operated in a state of being integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. That is, in the opening/closing second gear 452, the insertion hole 452 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion of the rear arm body 471, and in the rotating second gear 462, the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is the connecting protrusion 472e of the front arm body 472. The second opening/closing gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are provided between the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 in a state of being fastened and fixed to the front arm body 472. The jig inserted into the positioning hole 421b of the back case 421 is projected from the surface of the back case 421 to a height position where it can be inserted into the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462.

  In this case, the assembling of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 to the second shaft 427 requires the jig projecting from the positioning hole 421b of the back case body 421 to be positioned in the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 and the opening/closing first gear. The opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are assembled (axially supported) to the second shaft 427 while being sequentially inserted into the positioning hole 452e of the second gear 452 and the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25A, the open/close second gear 452 meshes with the open/close first gear 451 and the rotational position (phase, mesh position) of the open/close second gear 452 with respect to the open/close first gear 451. Can be positioned, and the mounting position (phase) of the second opening/closing gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned.

  Lastly, while maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (at least the state of the jig being inserted into the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471), the opening/closing first pivotally supported by the first shaft 426. The rotating first gear 461 is assembled (axially supported) to the first shaft 426 while inserting the connecting protrusion 451d of the first gear 451 into the connecting hole 461d of the rotating first gear 461. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the rotating first gear 461 is meshed with the rotating second gear 462, and the mounting position (phase) of the rotating second gear 462 to the back case body 421 is positioned. You can

  After the rotating first gear 461 is attached (axially supported) to the first shaft 426, the jig is pulled out from the back side of the back case body 421. As a result, the assembly (shaft support) of the gears 451 to 462 to the back case body 421 (first shaft 426 and second shaft 427) is completed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, jigs are erected parallel to the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 of the back case body 421, and the jigs are inserted into the positioning holes 451e and the like and the gears. Positioning rotational positions (phases, meshing positions) of the gears 451 to 462 with the back case body 421 as a reference by sequentially assembling (supporting) 451 to 462 to the first shaft 426, the second shaft 427, etc. can do. That is, since the jig can be inserted at the same time when the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are inserted into the gears 451 to 462, the assembling work and the positioning work can be performed at the same time, and the workability is improved. Can be planned.

  Particularly, regarding the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, since the positioning hole 452e of the opening/closing second gear 452 is formed as a through hole, the second shaft of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 is formed. Assembly (shaft support) to 427 can be performed at the same time. Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 is formed as a through hole, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Can be assembled (supported) on the second shaft 427. Therefore, it is not necessary to assemble the respective arm bodies 471, 472 and the respective gears 452, 462 while positioning them, and the positioning work can be completed by a single assembly work, and the workability thereof can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated jig for each of the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the front arm body 472, and a common jig is used. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore,
The opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 need to be able to rotate relative to each other independently of each other. However, if the jig is removed to the rear side of the back case body 421, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 452 are removed. 462 can be independently rotatable. Therefore, it is not necessary to individually provide a rotating shaft for each of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, and these opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are used as a common rotating shaft (second shaft 427). Since it can be pivotally supported, the product cost can be reduced also from this point.

  On the other hand, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 need to be connected to each other and integrally rotatable in the same phase. In this case, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are formed by inserting (internally fitting) the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 into the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461. The two gears 451 and 461 are connected to each other to enable positioning of the rotational position (phase) and integral rotation in the same phase at the same time. That is, the rotational position (phase) of the two gears 451 and 461 and the connection of the two gears 451 and 461 for integral rotation can be shared by the coupling protrusion 451d and the communication hole 461d. It is not necessary to separately provide a through hole for positioning (that is, inserting a jig) and a connecting structure for integral rotation. As a result, the shapes of both gears 451 and 461 can be simplified, and the manufacturing yield can be improved. Further, since the number of through holes formed penetrating the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be suppressed, the rigidity can be secured accordingly and the durability can be improved.

  In particular, the rotating first gear 461 is formed with a pair of communication holes 461d as through holes, and the pair of connecting holes 461d is inserted (internally fitted) with the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451. ), the rigidity of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be improved by the fitting structure.

  Here, according to the positioning structure of the present embodiment, as described above, the jig is projected from the front surface of the back case body 421, and the gears 451 to 462 are sequentially positioned while positioning the rotational position using the jig. Assembling (supporting) the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, etc., the jig can be removed from the back surface of the back case body 421 after the assembly of all the gears 451 to 462 is completed. That is, when assembling the gears 451 to 462, respectively, while maintaining the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning holes 451e to 462e of the gears 451 to 462, which are already assembled, of the gears 451 to 462, respectively. The remaining gears 451 to 461 of the gears 451 to 462 can be assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker from inadvertently rotating the gears 451 to 461 already assembled during the work, so that the workability can be improved and the reliability of the positioned rotation position can be improved. It is possible to improve the sex.

  In the present embodiment, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are coaxially arranged on the first shaft 426, and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are coaxially arranged on the second shaft 427, respectively. Therefore, the backlash between the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the backlash between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be generated in the same direction. .. Accordingly, as will be described later, when performing the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491 and 492 (see FIGS. 27 to 30 ), it is possible to suppress the production timing from being deviated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, an opening/closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 will be described. 26(a) to 26(c) are exploded front views of the combined operation unit 400 for explaining relative displacement states of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471. The state where the operation members 491, 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is illustrated. It should be noted that FIG. 26(a) is different from FIG. 26(b) in that the opening/closing second gear 452 is counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and FIG. 26(c) is compared with FIG. 26(b). The second gear 452 corresponds to the rotated state (clockwise direction), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C, the cylindrical portion (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the back case body 271 is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the opening/closing second gear 452. As a result, the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotatable relative to the back case 271 about the second shaft 427.

  As described above, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are urged toward each other by the urging force of the urging springs 484 (see FIG. 22) installed between them. A shaft support hole 482b is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 471c of the arm body 471. That is, by receiving the urging force of the urging spring 484, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the right side in FIG. 26B of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft portion 471c. While being rotated counterclockwise, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the left side of FIG. 26B is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the shaft portion 471c. Therefore, the slide rack member 481 is urged by the urging force of the urging spring 484 acting through the rotation of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 to guide the guide recesses 471d and 472d of the two arm bodies 471 and 472 (see FIGS. 21 and 22). (Refer to FIG. 26B), the slide displacement is performed downward (the direction away from the second opening/closing second gear 452, the lower side in FIG. 26B ).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the second opening/closing gear 452 is not rotated against the urging force of the urging spring 484, the second opening/closing gear 452 has its connecting projection 452d slid. The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the sliding displacement direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 26B) is pulled downward by the rack member 481 (downward in FIG. 26B) and is set to the distance L1. . Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, an interval between the connecting holes 482d is an interval W1.

  When the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d moves the slide rack member 481 upward (upward in FIG. 26A) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace the slide.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the slide displacement direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 26A). The distance between the two is reduced to the distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid and displaced upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. With the upward sliding displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the interval between the connection holes 482d is enlarged to the interval W2. (W1<W2).

  The pair of second pinion leg members 483 is similar to the pair of first pinion leg members 482, and in the state shown in FIG. 26( b ), postures close to each other (interval between the connecting holes 483 d) are used. 26A, and in the state shown in FIG. 26A, with the slide displacement of the slide rack member 481 upward, the postures (the intervals between the connection holes 483d between the connection holes 483d are set to the maximum) are separated from each other. It will be placed in a state).

  When the open/close second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26A, the state shown in FIG. Will be returned to. When the open/close second gear 452 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26B, the connecting protrusion 452d slides. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d slides the slide rack member 481 upward (upward in FIG. 26C) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace. As a result, as in the case shown in FIG. 26A, when the second opening/closing gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position, as shown in FIG. ) The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the vertical direction) is shortened to the distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. It With the upward sliding displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (and the second pinion leg members 483) are rotated in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the space between the connecting holes 482d is increased. The interval is expanded to the interval W2 (W1<W2).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, the rotation operation and opening/closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 by the combined operation unit 400 will be described.

  27A to 27D are front views of the combined operation unit 400 showing the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in time series. 27(a), the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the raised position U and opened, whereas in FIG. 27(b) the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the raised position U and closed. 27(c), the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the lowered position D and are closed. In FIG. 27(d), the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the lowered position D. Each open state is shown.

  28 to 30 are complex operation units schematically showing the meshing state of the open/close first gear 451 and the open/close second gear 452 and the meshing state of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of 400. Note that FIG. 28(a) is in the state of FIG. 27(a), FIG. 28(b) and FIG. 29(a) are in the state of FIG. 27(b), and FIG. 29(b) is in the state of FIG. 27(b). 27(c) and 30(a) correspond to the state of FIG. 27(c), and FIG. 30(b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 27(d). To do. 28(b) and 29(a) and 29(c) and 30(a) show the same state.

  Here, in FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are schematically illustrated using a chain double-dashed line. Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, one connecting projection 451d of the pair of connecting projections 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 and one connecting hole of the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 are illustrated. 461d is shown with hatching, and the hatched connecting projection 451d and connecting hole 461d will be described as a reference of rotation angles θ0 to θ4 described later. That is, in the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 462, the hatched connecting protrusion 451d is inserted (internally fitted) into the hatched connecting hole 461d, and these are arranged at the same rotation position.

  28 to 30, rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 in a state in which the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the raised position U and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27A). The position is the rotation angle θ0, and the rotation positions of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 in the state in which the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the raised position U and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27B). The opening/closing first gear in the state where the rotation angle θ1 and the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged between the ascending position U and the descending position D and are closed (a state between FIGS. 27B and 27C). Opening and closing first gear 451 in the state where the rotation positions of 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are the rotation angle θ2, and the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the lowered position D and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27C). The rotation position of the rotation first gear 461 is the rotation angle θ3, and the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 451 in the state where the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged in the lowered position D and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27D). The rotation position of the first gear 461 is defined as a rotation angle θ4.

  As shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 28(a), when the rotational positions of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are at the rotation angle θ0, the operating members 491 and 492 move to the rising position U. It is placed and opened. That is, the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 to a predetermined rotation position, and the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 are rotated. By shortening the distance between them to the distance L2, the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction close to the second shaft 427) and brought into a state (a state shown in FIG. 26C).

  In this case, in the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, the non-forming surface 462a1 in the body portion 462a of the rotating second gear 462 abuts on the cylindrical surface 461a1 in the body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461. .. As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) is formed as a cylindrical surface centering on the first shaft 426, and the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is not formed. The surface 462a1 is a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 insertion hole 462b side (that is, the center of curvature is on the first shaft 426 side), and has the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or slightly. It is formed as a curved surface having a small curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

  Therefore, the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 causes the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462). Rotation around is impossible. That is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 serve as stopper means for restricting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, holding the operating members 491, 492 at the raised position U). Can be operated.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine, an operating member that is rotatably disposed and a drive motor that applies a rotational drive force to the operating member are provided, and the operating member is rotated by a predetermined rotation force by the rotational drive force of the drive motor. There are things that rotate within a range. In this case, for example, when the terminating end of the rotation range of the operating member is set to the ascending position and gravity acts on the operating member arranged at the end of the rotating range, the operating member rotates (falls) due to the action of gravity. You need not to. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the driving force of the drive motor is opposed to the gravity (the weight of the operating member) to restrict the rotation (lowering) of the operating member (that is, the operating member is held at the end of the rotation range). ), the energy consumption required for holding the operating member is high.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (up position U), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body 461a) and the rotating second gear 461 (main body 461a) are rotated. By making contact with the non-forming surface 462a1 of the gear 462 (main body 462a), the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 (rotational movement of the rotating second gear 462) can be restricted. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (up position U), the operating members 491 and 492 and the drive motor 430 are separated, so that the drive motor When it becomes impossible to hold the operating members 491, 492 in the raised position U by using the rotational driving force, the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 is used to move the operating members 491, 492 to the raised position U. Can be retained. As a result, the energy consumption required to hold the operating members 491 and 492 can be suppressed.

  In this case, when the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) contact each other (that is, the operating member 491, When the 492 is arranged in the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later), the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise) around the second shaft 427 can be restricted. Since the second rotation gear 462 rotates in only one direction about the second shaft 427 (i.e., the movement members 491 and 492 are lowered toward the lowered position D by the action of gravity). Compared with the case of forming a shape that can be regulated by (only), the vibration of the operating members 491, 492 when the end of the movement range (the rising position U (and the lowering position D described later)) is reached is converged. The operating members 491 and 492 can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range. Furthermore, since the operating members 491, 492 can be held in a stable state at the end of the moving range, the operating members 491, 492 that should be in the stopped state in the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later) have an external force (for example, , External force generated by the player hitting or rocking the game machine) can prevent vibration and displacement.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) (that is, the operating member 491). , 492 disposed in the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later) have a shape curved in an arc shape about the rotation axis (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461, The rotary first gear 461 is curved and formed in an arc shape having the same diameter as or a slightly larger diameter than the cylindrical surface 461a1.

  As a result, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be smoothly brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and both can be easily brought into surface contact with each other. As a result, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 are brought into smooth contact with each other, and the operating members 491, 492 reach the end of the moving range (the rising position U (and the lowering position D described later)) and are stopped. It is possible to reduce the impact at the time and reduce the contact pressure between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 to improve the durability of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462.

  Here, the rotating second gear 462 has its rigidity increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472 (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472) as described above. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to use a high-rigidity material, and thus the weight of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced and the cost of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced. It is being improved.

  In particular, as described above, the rotating second gear 462 is positioned such that the connecting protrusion 462d faces the rear surface side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (that is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween). ), the rotation of the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later) The rigidity of the portion of the first gear 461 that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 can be effectively increased. As a result, the weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotating second gear 462 and the improvement in durability thereof can both be further achieved.

  Furthermore, the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is arranged at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. That is, the non-formation surface 462a1 is arranged on the straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426. When the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 is contacted. The reaction force received from the rotary second gear is at a position facing the rotation shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotation first gear 461 because it is applied along a straight line connecting the coupling protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426. By disposing the connecting protrusion 462d of 462, the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 (cylindrical surface 461a1) using the front arm body 472 can be further exerted. Further, since the metal fastening screw is inserted into the rolling convex portion 462d, the rigidity can be increased in that respect as well.

  When the open/close first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1 from the state shown in FIGS. Since the first gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 slide (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462, the first rotating gear Rotational driving force is not transmitted from the rotary second gear 462 to the rotary second gear 462, and the rotary second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. As a result, the operating members 491, 492 can be held in the raised position U without rotating the operating members 491, 492 (that is, in a state where the rotating operation is stopped).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the rotating first gear 461, and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is opposed to the cylindrical surface 461a1, so that the above-described cutoff state (rotation first Since the structure in which the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the first gear 461 to the second rotation gear 462 is formed, the rigidity of the first rotation gear 462 can be improved.

  That is, even when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (a region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed on the tooth tip surface of the tooth 461c. The blocking state described above can be formed by sliding (sliding) face to face. However, in this case, since the teeth 461c are formed (recessed), the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed in the area facing the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (the tooth 451c is not formed), the body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is correspondingly formed. The rigidity of can be improved.

  When the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (a region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is different from the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461. It is necessary to be retracted to the second shaft 427 side with respect to the tooth crest surface. As a result, the amount of retreat in the portion where the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed becomes large, and the rigidity thereof is reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating first gear 461 is formed with the cylindrical surface 461a1, and the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed between the tooth crest surface and the tooth bottom surface of the tooth 451c as described above. Therefore, the amount of retreat of the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 can be reduced. Accordingly, the protrusion amount of the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the second rotating gear 462 is secured (the increase of the backward movement amount is suppressed), and the rigidity of the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the second rotating gear 462 is increased. Can be improved.

  In particular, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 side (that is, the center of curvature is on the first shaft 426 side) as described above, and the tooth 462c is formed. The cylindrical surface of the rotating first gear 461 has a shape protruding toward the front (the side of the rotating first gear 461) toward the front side (that is, a shape in which the distance from the second shaft 427 increases) as the distance from the first rotating gear 461 increases. It is possible to increase the amount of protrusion in the portion where the non-formation surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is formed while allowing sliding (formation of a blocking state) with respect to 461a1, thereby further increasing its rigidity.

  Since the teeth 451c and 452c of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 are meshed with each other, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 have the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461. Are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1, the rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the opening/closing second gear 452 causes the rear arm body 471 and It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the front arm body 472 about the second shaft 427.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is expanded to the distance L1, and the slide rack member 481 is slid downward (in the direction away from the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26B). ). As a result, as shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B and FIG. 29A, the operating members 491 and 492 that have been opened can be brought into a closed state. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the raised position U, it is possible to execute the opening/closing operation and close the opened operating members 491 and 492.

  As shown in FIGS. 27B, 28B, and 29A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ1, and the operating members 491 and 492 move to the raised position U. In the state in which the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 reaches the end of the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461, the teeth 461c of the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 are disposed in the closed state. 462c is set to a state immediately before meshing.

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B and FIG. 29A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3. When rotated toward the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462, the teeth of the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 are meshed with each other so that the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 mesh with each other. The rotation of 461 is transmitted to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 rotates integrally with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 in the clockwise direction (clockwise direction) around the second shaft 427. .. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29B, it is possible to perform the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492 from the raised position U to the lowered position D.

  On the other hand, as described above, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the open/close first gear 451 and the open/close second gear 452 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotating angle θ3, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are also the same. It is rotated integrally in phase. That is, the opening/closing second gear 452 is not relatively rotated with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and as shown in FIG. 29B, the rotating second gear 462 and the back arm body 471. The front arm body 472 is integrally rotated about the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped (the operating members 491 and 492 can be held in the closed state).

  Accordingly, when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are further rotated from the rotation angle θ2, the operating members 491 and 492 are held in the closed state, and the rotating operation is performed to open/close the first opening/closing first gear 451. As the gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 reach the rotation angle θ3, as shown in FIGS. 27C and 29C, the operating members 491 and 492 arranged at the ascending position U are moved to the descending position D. Can be placed at.

  As shown in FIGS. 27(c), 29(c), and 30(a), the operating members 491 and 492 are operated when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ3. It is placed in the lowered position D and is in a closed state. In this case, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are disengaged from each other, and the rotating second gear 462 is attached to the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461. The non-formation surface 462a1 of the main body portion 462a is abutted.

  That is, the meshing of the teeth 461c and 462c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 with each other is released (making the meshing impossible), so that the rotating first gear 461 to the rotating second gear 462. The rotation of the rotary second gear 462 (that is, the rotary operation of the operating members 491 and 492) can be stopped by interrupting the transmission of the rotational drive force to the (rotating state).

  Here, in the conventional game machine, the stop of the operating member is provided with a sensor device that detects the rotational position of the gear that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor to the operating member, and the sensor device causes the gear to reach a predetermined rotational position. When the rotation is detected, or when the drive amount (rotation number or step number) of the drive motor is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the operating members move. The drive motor was stopped when it was judged that the end of the range had been reached. In this case, the drive motor may not be stopped even though the operating member reaches the end of the moving range due to, for example, defective detection of the rotational position or the drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper when the drive motor is not stopped properly. However, in the structure in which the movement of the operating member is regulated by the stopper in this way, when the operating member collides with the stopper, not only the operating member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the drive motor. This may cause damage to the drive motor.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the moving range (down position D), the meshing of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is changed. It is possible to release it (to make the meshing impossible) to interrupt the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the operating members 491 and 492 (the second rotary gear 462). As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped even when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 is being continuously generated.

  As a result, it is possible to avoid damage due to collision between the operating members 491 and 492 and other members. Further, even if the operating members 491 and 492 collide with other members, the operating members 491 and 492 are separated from the drive motor 430 (that is, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are separated from each other). Since the drive motor 430 is in the idling state, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the drive motor 430. As will be described later, the same applies when the operating members 491, 492 are rotated from the lowered position D toward the raised position U and reach the raised position U.

  As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are formed as curved surfaces having shapes corresponding to each other. Therefore, the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 causes the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462). Rotation around is impossible. That is, the stopper means that allows the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 to restrict the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, to hold the operating members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D). Can function as.

  From the state shown in FIG. 27C, FIG. 29C and FIG. 30A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in phase with each other from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4. When rotated, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 slide (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the rotating first gear 461 to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. This makes it possible to stop the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, hold the operating members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D).

  On the other hand, since the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 are meshed with the teeth 451c and 452c of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 451. When the gear 461 is integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4, the rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the opening/closing second gear 452 causes the rear arm body to rotate. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to 471 and the front arm body 472.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is shortened to the distance L2, and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction approaching the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26C). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, the operating members 491 and 492 that have been closed can be brought into the opened state. That is, while the operating members 491, 492 are held at the lowered position D, the opening/closing operation can be performed to open the closed operating members 491, 492.

  As shown in FIGS. 27(d) and 30(b), after the operating members 491 and 492 are placed in the lowered position D and are in the opened state, the driving motor 430 (FIGS. 21 and 22) is then moved. By rotating the first opening/closing first gear 451 and the first rotating gear 461 integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ4 to the rotation angle θ0. Operations (opening/closing operation and rotating operation) can be executed in reverse order.

  That is, from the state of the rotation angle θ4 shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ3. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27C, 29C, and 30A, slippage between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is performed. By using (sliding), the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 is stopped (that is, the operating members 491, 492 are held in the lowered position D), and the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise). ), the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be expanded to the distance L1 and the operating members 491 and 492 that have been opened can be closed. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D, the opening/closing operation can be executed to close the opened operating members 491 and 492.

  Next, from the state of the rotation angle θ3 shown in FIG. 27C, FIG. 29C and FIG. 30A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase through the rotation angle θ2. The rotation angle θ1. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 27B and 29A, the rotating second gear 462 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) integrally with the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and the operating member While rotating 491 and 492 from the lowered position D to the raised position U, the opening/closing second gear 452 does not rotate relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and these rotating second gears 462 and The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can be integrally rotated about the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, while the operation members 491 and 492 are held in the closed state, it is possible to perform the rotation operation and arrange the operation members 491 and 492, which are arranged in the lowered position D, in the raised position U.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when starting the rotating operation for moving the operating members 491, 492 from the lowered position D toward the raised position U, only the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 is performed first. After that, the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated. That is, after the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is cut off to prevent the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 from being transmitted to the rotation second gear 462, the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 is changed to the rotation second gear. Since the transmission state is transmitted to 462, it is possible to suppress the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 to start the rotational movement of the operation members 491 and 492, and as a result, the size of the drive motor 430 can be reduced. be able to.

  That is, when starting the rotation operation of the operating members 491, 492 in the stopped state (that is, the raised position U or the lowered position D), the stationary object is moved, so that the operating members 491, 492 are moved. Since it is necessary to apply a force exceeding the generated inertial force to the operating members 491 and 492, the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 becomes large. In particular, the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 992 is not limited to the operating members 491, 492, but a mechanical portion for performing the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 (for example, the slide rack member 481 and each pinion leg member 482, 483). Etc.) and the respective arm bodies 471, 472, etc. that hold the mechanical parts thereof need to be moved, and the inertial force at the time of starting the rotation operation becomes large. Further, when rotating the operating members 491, 492 in the lowered position D toward the raised position D, it is necessary to resist the weight (the action of gravity) of the operating members 491, 492 in addition to the inertial force. .. Therefore, the drive motor 430 is increased in size.

  On the other hand, after the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492 is started, the action of inertia acting to maintain the motion state of the operating members 491 and 492 acts, so that the rotation required for the drive motor 430 is increased. The driving force becomes smaller than the rotational driving force required when starting the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492. In other words, it can be said that after the movement of the operation members 491 and 492 is started, the drive motor 430 whose maximum output is unnecessarily large is in use.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, first, the rotation (driving force) is utilized by utilizing the slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Is not transmitted to the rotation second gear 462 (a cutoff state, a state during the transition from FIG. 30B to FIG. 30A), the drive motor 430 can be rotationally driven, and the drive motor 430 Momentum (inertial force on the rotating first gear 461 side) can be given to the driven state. After that, the rotating first gear 461 is meshed with the rotating second gear 462 (that is, a transmission state is formed) (see the state of transition from FIG. 29C to FIG. 29B), The rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 can be started in a state in which the rotational drive of the drive motor 430 is given momentum. Accordingly, even if the drive motor 430 is downsized, the movement members 491 and 492 can start moving. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 is started.

  In particular, in this cutoff state, the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 is performed, but in the opening/closing operation, the only objects to be moved (moved or displaced) by the driving force of the drive motor 430 are the operating members 491, 492. As in the case of the rotation operation, it is not necessary to move the whole of the mechanism members and the arm bodies 471 and 472 in addition to the operation members 491 and 492. Therefore, the load of the drive motor 430 is small, and it is possible to give sufficient momentum (inertial force to the rotating first gear 461 side) to the driving state thereof.

  The cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 are formed on both sides with the teeth 461c and 462c sandwiched between them, and at the two positions of the ascending position U and the descending position D, the cylindrical surface is formed. A state (blocking state) in which the non-formation surface 462a is in contact with the surface 461a1 can be formed. Therefore, not only when the movement members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D start to move to the raised position U, but also when the movement members 491 and 492 in the raised position U start to move to the lowered position D. Also, the drive state of the drive motor 430 can be given momentum (inertial force).

  From the state of the rotation angle θ1 shown in FIGS. 27B, 28B, and 29A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ0. .. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, the sliding (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is used. Then, while stopping the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 (that is, while holding the operating members 491, 492 in the raised position U), by the clockwise (clockwise) rotation of the opening/closing second gear 452, The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be shortened to the distance L2 so that the operating members 491 and 492 that have been closed can be brought into the opened state. That is, it is possible to open and close the operating members 491 and 492 that are closed while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the raised position U and performing the opening/closing operation.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) that are rotated (rotating operation) about the second shaft 427, and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Operation members 491 and 492 (second moving member) that are arranged on the arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and that are opened and closed (opening and closing operations) in the direction of approaching and separating from each other are provided, and the operation members 491 and 492 (second moving member). While the rotation operation of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is stopped (see FIGS. 28 and 30), the operating members 491 and 492 (second moving member) The drive motor 430 can perform a combined operation of rotating the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) (see FIG. 29) while the opening/closing operation of (1) is stopped.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the moving operation of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by the one drive motor, there are a state where the drive motor generates a driving force and a state where the generation of the driving force is stopped. Since the two moving states are formed to switch the operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. However, it is impossible to stop one of the first moving member and the second moving member while moving the other. Therefore, in order to move one of the first moving member and the second moving member while stopping the other, a drive motor for moving the first moving member and a drive motor for moving the second moving member are used. It was necessary to provide each individually, that is, two drive motors in total.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, one of the operation members 491 and 492 (second moving member) or the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is operated while the other is operated. Since the operation mode to be stopped can be achieved by the one drive motor 430, while reducing the required number of drive motors 430 while enhancing the effect of moving and stopping the operation members 491 and 492, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

  Next, the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 32 is FIG. 10 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. The arrangement positions (opposing intervals) of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 are in a state where both units 500 and 600 are accommodated in the rear case 210. It corresponds to the arrangement position (opposing interval).

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a first engagement member 539 that is vertically movable via a slide mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 includes a link. A pair of second coupling members 630 are formed so as to be swingable to the left and right via the mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 is disposed below the first coupling operation unit 500 at a predetermined interval. The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the back side (the back side of the paper surface of FIGS. 31 and 32) of the space located between the facing of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600. Is set up.

  The first combination operation unit 500 and the second combination operation unit 600 move up and down and swing the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second connection members 630, respectively, to show the retracted position shown in FIG. 31 or shown in FIG. Place it at the joining position. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 31, the first engaging member 539 is raised, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated left and right by tilting of the link mechanism, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). The front side is opened (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 32, the first engaging member 539 is lowered and the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other due to the standing of the link mechanism. The 2 coupling members 630 are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and are coupled to each other (see FIG. 12).

  In this case, according to the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the first engagement member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged side by side on the left and right, and The lower surface 539e of the first engaging member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surface 630a of each of the pair of second coupling members 630, so that a force in the direction of bringing them closer to each other is applied to the pair of second coupling members 630. Accordingly, not only the lower surface 539e of the first engagement member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be brought into close contact with each other, but also the facing surfaces of the pair of second coupling members 630 adjacent to each other on the left and right sides are brought into close contact with each other. Can be made As a result, the respective coupling members 539 and 630 can be coupled while suppressing the formation of a gap between them. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of production by combining a plurality of members.

  First, the first combination operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 41.

  33A is a front view of the first combination operation unit 500, and FIG. 33B is a bottom view of the first combination operation unit 500 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXb in FIG. 33A. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500. Note that in FIG. 35, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a substrate member 510, a driving unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 and generating a driving force, and a driving unit 520 thereof. And a slide mechanism portion 530 disposed on the front side of the base member 510, and the driving force of the drive portion 520 is transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530. And a second link member 541 disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510, and a second link member disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 in a posture symmetrical to the first link member 541. 542, a pair of raising members 550 arranged on the left and right sides of the slide mechanism unit 530 on the front side of the substrate member 510, a decorative portion 560 arranged on the front side of the pair of raising members 550, and a substrate. A biasing spring 571, which is disposed on the front side of the member 510 and applies a biasing force to the second link member 542, is mainly provided.

  The raising member 550 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side, and the drive unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 can be housed in the inner space of the raising member 550. Accordingly, as will be described later, even when the driving unit 520 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, the dead space formed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530 is effectively used. This can be utilized, and the first coupling operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

  The board member 510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and includes a pair of guide grooves 511 and a rack portion that is arranged in parallel along one of the pair of guide grooves 511. 512, connecting grooves 513 and 514 formed on the left and right with a pair of guide grooves 511 sandwiched therebetween, a shaft support hole 515 formed on the side of the connecting groove 513, and a front side and a rear side of the substrate member 510, respectively. A supporting shaft 516 that is provided so as to protrude is mainly provided.

  The guide groove 511 allows the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to be inserted from the front surface side to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 so that the insertion shaft 531c and each of the link members 541 and 542 can be connected on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510. Is a groove-shaped opening, and the pair extends linearly along the up-down direction while maintaining parallel to each other at approximately the center in the width direction of the substrate member 510. The groove width of the guide groove 511 is set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530, and the insertion shaft 531c can be moved only along the extending direction of the guide groove 511. That is, the slide mechanism portion 530 can be moved (elevated) in the vertical direction along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 by the insertion shaft 531c being guided by the guide groove 511.

  The rack portion 512 is a portion formed as a rack gear in which a plurality of teeth 512a are engraved on a plane along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, and is fixed to the front side of the substrate member 510. When the slide mechanism 520 is assembled to the board member 510, the pinion gear 537 (see FIG. 38) of the slide mechanism 530 meshes with the teeth 512 a of the rack 512. Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved (elevated) along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, the pinion gear 537 is rotationally driven along with the movement of the slide mechanism portion 530.

  The connection groove 513 is a groove shape for inserting the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510 and connecting the connection shaft 526 and the first link member 541 on the back side of the substrate member 510. And is curved and extended in an arc shape that is convex toward the guide groove 511. Specifically, the connection groove 513 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting out a part of an annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 515. The groove width of the connecting groove 513 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520, and the connecting shaft 526 is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  The shaft support hole 515 is an opening for inserting the support shaft 527 that supports the base end side of the first link member 541, and is arranged on the opposite side of the guide groove 511 with the connection groove 513 sandwiched therebetween. As will be described later, the support shaft 527 is fixed to the case body 521 of the drive unit 520, and the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 so that the tip of the support shaft 527 is a shaft support hole. It is projected to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 via 515. The first link member 541 is pivotally supported at its base end side by a support shaft 527 protruding through the shaft support hole 515, and is rotated about the support shaft 527.

  The connecting groove 514 allows the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 to be inserted from the back side to the front side of the substrate member 510, and the locking claw 542b has the end portion of the biasing spring 542 formed on the front side of the substrate member 510. It is a groove-shaped opening for allowing the groove to extend, and is curved and extended in a convex arc shape toward the guide groove 511. That is, the connection groove 514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows the locking claw 542b to move when the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516.

  The support shaft 516 is a shaft body for pivotally supporting the second link member 542 and the biasing spring 571, and as described above, is provided so as to project from the front surface side and the back surface side of the substrate member 510, respectively. The support shaft 516 is arranged at a position line-symmetrical to the shaft support hole 515 with a virtual straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a symmetry line. The second link member 542 is pivotally supported at the base end side (shaft support hole 542a) on a support shaft 516 protrudingly provided on the back surface side of the substrate member 510, and is rotated about the support shaft 516. Further, the biasing spring 571 is held by a support shaft 516 that is provided so as to project on the front side of the substrate member 510.

  The biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, the coil portion thereof is held (guided) by the support shaft 516, and one arm portion of the pair of arm portions is engaged with the second link member 542. It is locked by the locking claw 542b, and the other arm is locked by the locking claw 517 of the substrate member 510. The biasing spring 571 is arranged in a state where the pair of arms are elastically deformed in a direction in which they approach each other, and the elastic recovery force pushes the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 upward (see FIG. 34 and the upper side of FIG. 35). That is, the urging force of the urging spring 571 acts in the direction of holding the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. 35 (the posture in which the tip end side is located at the upper end side of the guide groove 511).

  The driving unit 520 is a unit for generating a driving force for slidingly displacing (elevating) the slide mechanism unit 530 in the vertical direction, and is provided on the front side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530. It is arranged. Here, the drive unit 520 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 36 is a rear view of the drive unit 520. Note that, in FIG. 36, the positions of the connecting groove 513 and the shaft support hole 515 of the substrate member 510 in a state where the drive unit 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510 are schematically illustrated by using a chain double-dashed line.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the drive unit 520 is provided with a case body 521 and a drive motor 522 disposed on the front side of the case body 521 and projecting the drive shaft toward the back side of the case body 521 (FIG. 34 and FIG. 34). 35), a pinion gear 523 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a rotation shaft 524a that meshes with the pinion gear 523 and that protrudes from the back surface of the case body 521. A crank gear 524, a connecting rod 525 whose one end is rotatably supported by the crank gear 524 via a rotary shaft 525a, a connecting shaft 526 protruding from the other end of the connecting rod 525, and a case body 521. And a support shaft 527 protruding from the back surface of the. The drive shaft of the drive motor 522, the rotary shafts 524a and 525a, the connecting shaft 526, and the support shaft 527 are arranged in parallel.

  A rotating shaft 525a that rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 525 to the crank gear 524 is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524, and is connected so as to project from the other end of the connecting rod 525. As described above, the shaft 526 is inserted into the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510 and is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Therefore, the crank gear 524, the rotating shaft 525a, and the connecting rod 525 form a crank mechanism that converts the rotational movement of the crank gear 524 into the reciprocating movement of the connecting shaft 526 via the connecting rod 525.

  That is, when the pinion gear 523 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 and the crank gear 524 is rotated in one direction (for example, the arrow A1 direction) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 526 is extended along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Is displaced in one direction (arrow B1 direction) while the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the crank gear 524 is rotated in the other direction (arrow A2 direction), the moving direction of the connecting shaft 526 is reversed. Then, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the other direction (arrow B2 direction) along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  In the state where the drive unit 520 (case body 521) is assembled to the front side of the substrate member 510, the connecting shaft 526 and the supporting shaft 527 are respectively connected to the connecting groove 513 and the supporting hole 515 of the substrate member 510, as described above. After being inserted, the tip ends of the connecting shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are projected to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

  In this case, the connection shaft 526 is rotatably connected to the longitudinal intermediate portion (connection hole 541b) of the first link member 541 and the support shaft 527 is rotatably connected to the base end portion (shaft support hole 541a) of the first link member 541. Therefore, by rotatively driving the drive motor 522, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced along the connecting groove 513 (arrow B1 direction or arrow B2 direction) so that the first link member 541 is moved to the supporting shaft. It can be rotated around 527.

  It returns to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35 and demonstrates. The first link member 541 is a member for connecting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism unit 530. It is formed in a scale plate shape. The first link member 541 is formed with a shaft support hole 541a at a base end portion, a connection hole 541b at a longitudinal middle portion, and a sliding hole 541c at a tip end portion opposite to the base end portion.

  The shaft support hole 541a and the connection hole 541b are formed as through holes having a circular shape in a front view, and the shaft support shaft 527 and the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 are rotatably inserted therein. On the other hand, the sliding hole 541c is formed as a through hole having a long hole shape in a front view, which is along the long diameter direction of the first link member 541 and is slidable along the long hole shape (long diameter direction). The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is inserted.

  Therefore, when the first link member 541 is rotated around the support hole 541a in the direction in which the sliding hole 541c is raised (arrow B1 direction, see FIG. 36), the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 causes the insertion shaft 531c of the substrate member 510 to move. A direction in which the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved upward along the guide groove 511 and the first link member 541 lowers the sliding hole 541c around the support hole 541a (arrow B2 direction, see FIG. 36). When the slide mechanism unit 530 is rotated to, the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is displaced downward along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the slide mechanism unit 530 is lowered (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the connecting rod 525 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510 and the first link member 541 is arranged on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510, and the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are arranged. Since they are connected (connected) to each other through the connection groove 513 of the substrate member 510, the driving force transmission path formed by the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (that is, the rotation shaft 524a of the crank gear 524 is connected. The length dimension of the portion connecting the shaft 526 (connecting rod 525) and the portion connecting the connecting shaft 526 and the insertion shaft 531c (the portion from the connecting hole 541b to the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541). ) Becomes longer. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 may be deformed, and the driving force may not be stably transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530 (insertion shaft 531c).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base end side (the shaft support hole 541a) of the first link member 541 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 527 on the back surface of the substrate member 510, so that the support thereof is supported. Utilizing the rigidity of the case body 521 of the drive unit 520 to which the shaft 527 is fixed and the substrate member 510 to which the case body 521 is fastened and fixed, to increase the rigidity of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 as a whole. You can As a result, when the driving force of the drive motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are suppressed from being deformed, and the driving force is stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). can do.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (the shaft supporting hole 541a) of the first link member 541 are rotatably supported by the substrate member 510, the connecting rod 525 is attached to the substrate member 510. In comparison with the case of rotatably supporting the base member 510, the transmission path of the driving force from the position pivotally supported by the substrate member 510 to the slide mechanism unit 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be shortened, and as a result, the driving force can be reduced. Transmission to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be further stabilized.

  The second link member 542 is a member for connecting the urging spring 571 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to transmit the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530. Formed into a shape. Similar to the first link member 541, the second link member 542 has a shaft support hole 542a and a slide hole 542c formed in the base end portion and the tip end portion, respectively. The support shaft 516 of the substrate member 510 is rotatably inserted in the shaft support hole 542a, and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is inserted in the slide hole 542c. In addition, a locking claw 542b is formed at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the second link member 542. As described above, the locking claw 542b is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 via the connecting groove 514 and locks the arm portion of the biasing spring 571.

  Therefore, since the second link member 542 holds the slide mechanism portion 530 symmetrically with the first link member 541, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed. Further, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts on the slide mechanism portion 530 via the second link member 542 in the ascending direction (the direction in which the tip end side of the second link member 542 (sliding hole 542c) is raised). Therefore, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is raised, the driving force of the drive unit 520 can be assisted. This can prevent the drive motor 522 from increasing in size.

  A retaining ring E formed as an E ring is attached to the support shafts 527 and 516 inserted into the shaft support holes 541a and 542a of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542, respectively, as a retaining device. , The insertion shaft 531c inserted through the sliding holes 541c, 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 has a seating surface having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding holes 541c, 542c as a retaining member ( A fastening screw having a head or washer is fastened (see FIG. 35).

  Here, regarding the first link member 541, the mounting of the retaining ring E or the fastening of the fastening screw as a retainer is omitted with respect to the coupling shaft 526 that is inserted into the coupling hole 541b of the first link member 541. That is, by preventing the two of the three shafts (the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c) from coming off, the remaining one can be omitted (the connecting shaft 526), and It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for retaining. In particular, the first link member 541, which has a long length, is prevented from coming off from the two shafts on the base end side and the tip end side, and is prevented from coming off from the shaft at an intermediate position between the base end side and the tip end side. With the structure in which the first link member 451 is omitted, it is possible to stably rotate the first link member 451 while suppressing the shaft (the connecting shaft 526) that is omitted from being prevented from coming off from the connecting hole 541b.

  As described above, the slide mechanism portion 530 is a mechanism portion that slides (moves up and down) in the vertical direction along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and lowers the first engaging member 539 to a predetermined position. Then, it is coupled to the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 (see FIG. 32). Here, the slide mechanism unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39.

  FIG. 37A is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530, and FIG. 37B is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530. 38 is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 in which the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 in which the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the rear. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the slide mechanism unit 530 includes an A layer base plate 531, a B layer base plate 532 and a B layer decorative body 533, a C layer base plate 534 and a C layer decorative body 535, and The first pinion gear 537, the second pinion gear 538, and the first coupling member 539 are provided, and the first coupling member 539 is slid up and down by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit 520 via the first link member 541 ( Raise and lower).

  According to the slide mechanism unit 530 of the present embodiment, two sets of double rack and pinion structures are interposed between the A layer base plate 531 and the first coupling member 539, and the first link member 541 to the A layer base. The driving force received by the plate 531 is transmitted to the first coupling member 539 via the two sets of double rack and pinion structures, thereby increasing the sliding displacement (elevation) of the first coupling member 539. Is configured so that

  The A-layer base plate 531 includes a main body portion 531a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long in a front view, and a guide groove 531b that is a groove-shaped opening linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 531a. , A plurality of insertion shafts 531c (a total of six in this embodiment) that are provided in a protruding manner from the rear surface of the main body portion 531a and are arranged in parallel on the left and right with a guide groove 531b interposed therebetween, and are provided in front of the main body portion 531a. And a support shaft 531d that rotatably supports the first pinion gear 537.

  The A-layer base plate 531 inserts a plurality of insertion shafts 531c into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and a collar C having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide grooves 511 at the tip of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. By fastening and fixing as a retaining member, the substrate member 510 is held so as to be capable of sliding displacement (elevation) (see FIG. 35). In this case, the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the support shaft 531d is meshed with the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the two insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 as described above. At the top, tighten the fastening screw to prevent it from coming off.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively positioned on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 39) than the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39) of the A-layer base plate 531. Therefore, as will be described later, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is in the forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is set to the collar C, the first link member 541, and the first link member 541. It can be effectively regulated by the 2 link member 542, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid (moved up and down) in a stable state.

  The B layer base plate 532 includes a main body portion 532a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long in a front view, a plurality of insertion holes 532b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 532a, and a plurality of projections provided from the rear surface of the main body portion 532a. And a rack portion 532d having a plurality of teeth formed as rack gears on the side surface of the main body portion 532a along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 532a.

  In the B layer base plate 532, a plurality of insertion shafts 532c are respectively inserted into the guide grooves 531b of the A layer base plate 531 and the fastening shafts 532c are fastened with fastening screws at the tips thereof so as not to come off. It is held by the A layer base plate 531 so as to be capable of sliding displacement (elevation).

  In this case, the rack portion 532d arranged on the side surface of the B layer base plate 532 (main body portion 532a) is meshed with the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the A layer base plate 531 (support shaft 531d). That is, the first pinion gear 537 is meshed with both the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 and the rack portion 532d of the B layer base plate 532, whereby a first set of double rack and pinion structure is formed. Therefore, when the A layer base plate 531 is slid with respect to the substrate member 510 (moved up and down), the B layer base plate 532 is moved relative to the A layer base plate 531 via the first double rack and pinion structure. Slide displacement (elevation). That is, the B-layer base plate 532 is slid and displaced (moved up and down) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the A-layer base plate 531.

  The B layer decorative body 533 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the B layer base plate 532, and slides together with the B layer base plate 532 (up and down). To be done. Specifically, the B layer decorative body 533 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 533a protruding from the back surface thereof, and the fastening shafts 533a are fastened to the fastening screws inserted in the insertion holes 532b of the B layer base plate 532. By doing so, it is fixed to the front surface side of the B layer base plate 532.

  The plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are fixed to the B layer base plate 532 after being inserted into the guide grooves 539b of the first coupling member 539 and the guide grooves 534b of the C layer base plate 534. .. In this case, one insertion shaft 532a of the plurality of insertion shafts 532a of the B layer decorative body 533 rotatably supports the second pinion gear 538. Therefore, when the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the A layer base plate 531, the second pinion gear 538 is also slidably displaced (elevated with respect to the A layer base plate 531). ) Will be done.

  The C-layer base plate 534 includes a main body portion 534a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long in a front view, and a guide groove 534b that is a groove-shaped opening linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 534a. , A plurality of insertion holes 534c penetratingly formed in the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 534d having a plurality of teeth formed as rack gears along the guide groove 534b on the front surface side of the main body portion 532a.

  The C layer decorative body 535 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the C layer base plate 534, and slides together with the C layer base plate 534 (up and down). To be done. Specifically, the C-layer decorative body 535 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 535a protruding from the back surface thereof, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 534c of the C-layer base plate 534 is fastened to the insertion shaft 535a. By doing so, it is fixed to the front surface side of the C layer base plate 534.

  The first coupling member 539 is a member for forming a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and abutting against the pair of second coupling members 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 to form a coupled state. Yes (see FIG. 32), a main body portion 539a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape in a front view, and a guide groove 539b which is a groove-shaped opening linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 539a. The main body portion 534a includes a decorative portion 539c that is continuously provided below the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 539d in which a plurality of teeth are formed as rack gears along the guide groove 539b on the back side of the main body portion 532a.

  The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed by combining two flat surfaces that are inclined downward toward the center. That is, the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed such that its front view shape is an inverted V-shape with its center protruding in the downward direction (downward direction in FIG. 38) (see FIGS. 40 and 41). ). The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is in contact with the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position as described above (see FIG. 32).

  Further, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is provided with a recess 539e1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view at the center thereof. The convex portion 630a1 protruding from the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 is housed (concave-fitted) in the concave portion 539e1 at the coupling position. By this concave-convex fitting, relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position.

  The C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539 are configured such that the plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 534b and 539b of the C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539, respectively. Thus, it is held between the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 so as to be capable of sliding displacement (elevation).

  In this case, the second pinion gear 538 pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 533a of the B layer decorative body 533, the rack portion 534d disposed on the front side of the C layer base plate 534 (main body portion 534a), and the first coupling member. 539 (main body portion 539a) and the rack portion 539d arranged on the back side are meshed with each other, whereby a second set of double rack and pinion structure is formed. Therefore, when the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decorative body 533) is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the A layer base plate 531, the first coupling member is moved through the second set of double rack and pinion mechanisms. 539 is slid with respect to the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decorative body 533). That is, the first coupling member 539 is slid with respect to the substrate member 510 (moved up and down) in a state where the speed is higher than that of the B layer base plate 532.

  It returns to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35 and demonstrates. As described above, in the first coupling member 500, the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510, and a plurality of the slide mechanism portions 530 (A layer base plate 531) are projected (the present embodiment). 6 insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, and a collar C is attached to some (4) insertion shafts 531c of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. The remaining (two) insertion shafts 531c are connected to the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 while being attached as a retaining member (see FIG. 35).

  Here, also in the conventional game machine, a plurality of insertion shafts (corresponding to the insertion shafts 531c) are provided in the moving member (corresponding to the slide mechanism portion 530), and the plurality of insertion shafts are made to correspond to the substrate member (corresponding to the substrate member 510). ) Is inserted into the guide groove (corresponding to the guide groove 511), and the moving member is slid and displaced along the guide groove by the driving force of the driving unit (corresponding to the driving unit 520).

  In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding displacement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of insertion shafts that are inserted into the guide grooves. On the other hand, if the number of insertion shafts is increased, the number of parts (corresponding to the collar C) for holding the insertion shafts (preventing their removal from the guide groove) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing the cost while stabilizing the slide displacement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) is provided on the front side where the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged. The first link member 541 is disposed on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 opposite to the above, and the first link member 541 is attached to one insertion shaft 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. Since they are connected, one collar C of the plurality of collars C for preventing the plurality of insertion shafts 531c from coming off from the guide groove 511 can also be used as the first link member 541. As a result, the number of the insertion shafts 531c is ensured, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized, and the component of the component (color C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c. The number of points can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, the second link member 542 is provided with the guide groove 511 with respect to the first link member 541 on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510, which is the side opposite to the front surface side on which the slide mechanism section 530 is disposed. Since the second link members 542 are arranged symmetrically with respect to each other and are connected to one insertion shaft 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, the first link member Not only can the effect (stabilization of the slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530) by making the supporting reaction force that the slide mechanism unit 530 receives from the 541 and the second link member 542 symmetric be achieved, but also among the plurality of collars C Since the color C of No. 1 can also be used by the second link member 542, it is possible to secure the number of the insertion shafts 531c and stabilize the slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530 (A layer base plate 531). At the same time, the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c can be reduced, and the cost can be further reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 on the back surface side of the substrate member 510, it is possible to stabilize the slide displacement and reduce the cost. Further, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 520 is configured with the crank mechanism (the crank gear 524, the connecting rod 525, and the connecting shaft 526), and the connecting groove 513 is formed in the substrate member 510, so that the connecting groove 513 is interposed. By connecting the connecting shaft 526 to the first link member 541, the drive unit 520 can be arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510. As a result, the constituent elements of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be concentrated on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the limited space can be effectively utilized and the constituent elements can be efficiently arranged. As a result, the size of the first combined operation unit 500 can be reduced.

  Particularly, in the first combination operation unit 500, the decoration portion 560 is arranged on the front surface side of the slide mechanism portion 530, so that the slide mechanism portion 530 and the decoration portion 560 are in the front-back direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B). And the dimension in the front-back direction increases accordingly. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, since the driving unit 520 can be arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, the driving unit 520 can be arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510. It can be arranged in a dead space formed on the side of the slide mechanism portion 530. That is, it is possible to arrange two elements of the slide mechanism portion 530 and the driving portion 520, which have relatively large dimensions, side by side in the left-right direction. Thereby, the dead space of the limited space can be effectively utilized, and the first coupling operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

  Further, in this case, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the first link member 541 is formed on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510 with the support shaft 527 as the center. Since the structure is rotated, the space for moving the first link member 541 can be made flat. That is, a space for moving the first link member 541 can be secured in a planar space on the back side of the substrate member 510, and it is necessary to secure a large space in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). There is no. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the size of the first coupling operation unit 500, particularly in the front-rear direction.

  The same applies to the second link member 542. By utilizing the connecting groove 514, the biasing spring 571 is disposed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, and the dead space described above is effectively utilized. The space for the movement of the second link member 542 can also be made planar, and as a result, the first coupling operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-back direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). it can.

  Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In this description, FIGS. 34 to 39 will be referred to as appropriate.

  40A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 40B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st combination operation unit 500 in the state where it was made. 41A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 41B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st combination operation unit 500 in the state where it was made. 40 and 41, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), in the state where the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, in the drive unit 520, the crank gear 524 is rotated in the direction of the arrow A1 so that the connecting rod 525 is interposed. The connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B1 (see FIG. 36), and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 raise the sliding holes 541c, 542c about the shaft support holes 541a, 542a. It is arranged in a posture rotated in the direction (upward in FIG. 40B). Therefore, the A-layer base plate 531 (FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is arranged on the upper end side (upper side of FIG. 40B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised. The open state (the retracted position is arranged) is formed.

  In this case, as described above, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts on the second link member 542. The urging force of the urging spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to be the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, the posture rotated in the direction of raising the sliding hole 542c around the shaft support hole 542a). ) Is operated in the direction of holding. Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or rocking a game machine) acts on the first coupling member 539 that should be in a stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 moves vertically. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction can be quickly converged by utilizing the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), in the drive unit 520, when the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the arrow B2 direction via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the arrow A2 direction. (Refer to FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are rotated around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a in the direction in which the sliding holes 541c and 542c are lowered (downward in FIG. 40B). . As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms act (FIG. 38 and 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

  As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are moved downward in the sliding holes 541c, 542c about the shaft support holes 541a, 542a. Further rotation, the A layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 539c) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is arranged at the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 41(b)) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, so that the first coupling member A state in which 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged) is formed.

  41(a) and 41(b), in the drive unit 520, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the arrow B1 direction by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the arrow A1 direction via the connecting rod 525. By doing so (see FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move in the direction (upward in FIG. 41(b)) in which the sliding holes 541c, 542c are raised about the shaft support holes 541a, 542a. Is rotated. As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism unit 530 is lifted along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms act (FIG. 38 and 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the first coupling member 539 is arranged (returned) to the retracted position.

  According to the present embodiment, since the slide mechanism unit 530 has a structure for slidingly displacing the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction via the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms, the sliding displacement of the first coupling member 539 can be prevented. It can speed up. On the other hand, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41(a) to the retracted position of FIG. 40(a), not only the first coupling member 539 but also the slide mechanism portion 530 Since it is necessary to raise each of the components described above against the action of gravity, the load on the drive motor 522 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to change to the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, centering around the shaft support hole 542a). The sliding hole 542c is caused to act in a direction in which the sliding hole 542c is held in a posture in which the sliding hole 542c is rotated. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41(a) to the retracted position in FIG. 40(a) against the action of gravity, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is assisted. Since it can be used as a force, the drive force required for the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 520 can be reduced accordingly, and the capacity can be reduced.

  Here, the board member 510 is arranged such that the extending direction of the guide groove 511 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 40 and 41). In detail, the lower end side of the guide groove 511 is projected to the front side (front side, front side of FIG. 40A) of the substrate member 510 (the upper end side of the guide groove 511 is the rear side of the substrate member 510. It is disposed in a posture in which the rear side is retracted to the rear side of FIG. 40A). As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 has a forward tilted posture due to its own weight (a tilted posture so as to collapse in a direction away from the front face of the base member 510 (front side)). Since it can be suppressed, the load on the color C can be reduced accordingly, and the durability thereof can be improved.

  However, since the slide mechanism unit 530 is configured by stacking the respective elements thereof (for example, the A layer base plate 531, the B layer base plate 532, the C layer base plate 534, etc.), the substrate member 510 with respect to the vertical direction described above. If the inclination is made too large, the respective elements of the slide mechanism unit 530 are likely to come into close contact with each other, and the sliding resistance at the time of the slide displacement becomes large. Therefore, the above-mentioned inclination cannot be made sufficiently large, so that a relatively large load is applied to the color C.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the substrate member 510 is interposed between the slide mechanism portion 530 and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 that are connected (connected) to the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. Therefore, the forward tilted posture of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be regulated not only by the collar C but also by the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. As a result, the load on the collar C can be suppressed, the durability thereof can be improved, and the slide mechanism portion 530 can be slid (moved up and down) in a stable state.

  In particular, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively located above the center of the A layer base plate 531 in the longitudinal direction as described above (see FIG. 39). Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is in the forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is changed by the collar C, the first link member 541, and the second link member 542. This can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid and displaced (elevated) in a stable state.

  Next, the second combination operation unit 600 arranged below the first combination operation unit 500 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45.

  FIG. 42 is a front perspective view of the second coupling operation unit 600. 43A is a front view of the second combined movement unit 600, and FIG. 43B is a rear view of the second combined operation unit 600. The front case body 612 is not shown in FIG. 43(a). 42 and 43 show a state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the second coupling operation unit 600 includes a back case body 611 and a front case body 612, and a rear end of each of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 is rotatably supported. Link means (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622), a second coupling member 630 rotatably supported on the respective tip ends of the inner link member 621 and outer link member 622, and the inner link member 621. And a drive motor 640 that generates a drive force for displacing the outer link member 622, and a transmission unit (a pinion gear 651 and a transmission gear) for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 640 to the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. 652) and mainly.

  In the present embodiment, a pair of the link means, the second coupling member 630, the drive motor 640, and the transmission means is provided on each of the left and right sides of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, for a total of one pair. .. In this case, the set provided on the left side and the set provided on the right side of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are the width direction of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 (see FIG. 43(a) left and right). (Direction) The configuration is substantially the same, except that it is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line passing through the center and the shape of the decorative portion is different, and therefore will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are members made of a resin material and formed in a plate shape. The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) and the transmission means (pinion gear 651 and transmission gear 652) are housed.

  In the back case body 611, a pair of guide grooves 611a formed by curving in an arc shape are formed. The guide groove 611a is curved in an arc shape centered on a base end shaft 621a described later (that is, formed in a shape in which a part of an annular shape centered on the base end shaft 621a is cut off), and the inner link member 621 is formed. A collar 621d that is rotatably supported is internally fitted to the back surface of the. The groove width of the guide groove 611a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the collar 621d. Therefore, as will be described later, when the inner link member 621 is rotated about the proximal shaft 621a, the collar 621d is guided along the extending direction of the guide groove 611a, so that the inner link member 621( It is possible to stabilize the rotation of the outer link member 622). As a result, the positional accuracy of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position can be improved.

  The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 have their proximal ends rotatably supported by the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 through the proximal shafts 621a and 622a, while the distal ends thereof have the distal shafts 621b, It is rotatably supported by the second coupling member 630 via 622b.

  In this case, in the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622, the distance between the proximal shaft 621a and the proximal shaft 622a and the distance between the distal shaft 621b and the distal shaft 622b are equal, and the proximal shaft 621a. And a distance between the tip end shaft 621b and a distance between the base end shaft 622a and the tip end shaft 622b are equalized to form a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, when the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotated about the base end shafts 621a and 622a, the second coupling member 630 does not have a rotation center and is parallel (that is, shown in FIG. 43A). It will be moved while maintaining the posture.

  The second connecting member 630 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and is connected to the first connecting member 539 at the connecting position (see FIG. 32), and the lower surface of the first connecting member 539. An upper surface 630a with which the 539e abuts and an opposing surface 630b with which the other second joining member 630 abuts each other when adjacent to each other are formed.

  Note that the upper surface 630a is formed as a flat surface that is inclined downward toward the facing surface 630b in the front view of the second coupling member 630 shown in FIG. 43, and the facing surface 630b is formed as a flat surface parallel to the vertical direction. To be done. Therefore, when the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 are in contact with each other at the coupling position, the front view shape of the pair of second coupling members 630 on the upper surface 630a side is a V-shape with the center recessed. It is formed in a shape (see FIG. 44(b)). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is in contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 (see FIG. 32).

  Further, on the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, convex portions 630a1 each having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view are provided so as to protrude on the side of the facing surface 630b. The convex portion 630a1 is housed (concave-fitted) in the concave portion 539e1 which is provided in the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. By this concave-convex fitting, as described above, the relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position. Here, the convex portion 630a1 has a thickness dimension that becomes smaller toward the protruding tip. Therefore, when the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 is coupled (contacted) to the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539, it is easy to insert (internally fit) the convex portion 630a1 into the concave portion 539e1. it can.

  A gear portion 621c is integrally formed on the base end side of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is a fan-shaped portion that projects outward in the radial direction around the base shaft 621a, and a plurality of teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the fan-shaped portion. A transmission gear 652, which will be described later, is meshed with the gear 621c.

  The drive motor 640 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 611, and the pinion gear 651 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 640 protruding to the front side of the back case body 611. The transmission gear 652 is meshed with the pinion gear 651, and the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621 is meshed with the transmission gear 652 as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the operation of the second combined operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 43(a) will be referred to as appropriate.

  44(a) and 44(b) are front views of the second coupling operation unit 600, and the illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. Note that, in FIG. 44(a), the state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the middle of the retracted position and the coupling position is shown in FIG. 44(b), and the pair of second coupling members 630 is arranged in the coupling position. The respective states are shown.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 43(a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are tilted in the directions in which they are separated from each other, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated in the left and right directions. When the left and right drive motors 640 are rotationally driven from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 43A and the pinion gear 651 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted via the transmission gear 652 to the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is rotated about the base shaft 621a. As a result, the left and right inner link members 621 are respectively rotated around the base end shaft 621a, and the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) come close to each other, as shown in FIG. It stands up in the direction.

  When the left and right drive motors 640 are further driven to rotate from the state shown in FIG. 44(a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) come close to each other as shown in FIG. 44(b). Further, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. That is, the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the opposing surfaces 630b are in contact with each other. On the other hand, when the drive motor 640 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above case from the state shown in FIG. 44B, the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are separated from each other. 43A, the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position, as shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the combined operation of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 45 will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45 is a model view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a front view when the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position.

  As described above, the first coupling member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are coupled to each other from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. The coupling members 630 are arranged close to each other by the standing of the link mechanism so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right sides, and the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged on the left and right sides thereof, As shown in 32, this is performed by bringing the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, respectively.

  Here, in the first combination operation unit 500 and the second combination operation unit 600, as shown in FIG. 45, the inclination angle of the lower surface 539e of the first connection member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second connection member 630 with respect to the horizontal plane is an angle θ. It is said that. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is lowered (slide displaced) along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 45), the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. The vertical force F is a force component Fv (=F×cos θ) perpendicular to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a, and a force component Fp (=F×sin θ) parallel to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a. Can be disassembled. Here, the force F is approximated as a concentrated load that acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 in the widthwise center thereof.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the angle θ of the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a with respect to the horizontal plane is set to be smaller than the angle α of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 with respect to the vertical direction. Further, in the present embodiment, when the action direction of the force component Fv is extended with the center in the width direction of the upper surface 630a as the starting point, the extension line is inside the base end shaft 622a of the outer link member 622 (the inner link member 621). Is formed so as to pass through the base shaft 621a).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a direction (vertical direction) substantially orthogonal to the direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other. Direction (FIG. 45 up and down direction), the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the second coupling member 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Then, it is possible to form a force in a direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other in the adjacent direction. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 can be coupled, but also the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled, and a plurality of members ( It is possible to secure the effect produced by joining the first joining member 539 and the pair of second joining members 630).

  That is, even in the conventional gaming machine, a pair of members are movably provided, the pair of members are retreated to different retracted positions, and the pair of members are moved from the different retracted positions to be arranged at the coupling position. There is one that connects the members of (1) to each other (see, for example, JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, at the joining position, when the joining is not performed properly, such as when a gap is formed between the pair of members, the effect produced by joining the pair of members is impaired. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the pair of members are symmetrically shaped, it is relatively easy to join the pair of members face to face, but three or more members should be properly connected ( That is, it was difficult to bond them while suppressing the generation of gaps.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 in the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 contact each other. Since it is possible to form a force in the direction in which the second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other, a gap is generated between the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. Not only can this be suppressed, but also the formation of a gap between the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second connecting members 630 can be suppressed, and these members can be connected to each other. That is, three or more members can be properly combined, and the effect of the combination can be secured.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 has a front view shape (see FIGS. 32 and 45) on the upper surface 630a side (FIG. 32 and FIG. 45 upper side). The shape shown in the drawing is a concave shape in which the center is recessed downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45), while the first coupling member 539 is a front view on the lower surface 539e side (lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape (the shape illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 45) is a protruding shape in which the center projects downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45) corresponding to the shape of the pair of second coupling members 630.

  Therefore, as described above, at the reference position, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is located at the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. When brought into contact with each other, the first coupling member 539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 630 due to the concave shape and the protruding shape, and the first coupling member 539 causes the pair of second coupling members 630. The player recalls a mode in which the two are expanded in a direction in which they are separated from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, so that the pair of second coupling members is in contact. It is possible to form a force in a direction in which the 630 are brought close to each other to couple the pair of second coupling members 630 while suppressing a gap from being generated between the facing surfaces 630 b. As a result, it can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the annular motion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57.

  46 is a front perspective view of the ring operation unit 700 in a state where the ring forming member 790 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 47 is a ring in the state where the ring forming member 790 is arranged in the coupling position. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 700.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the ring operation unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790 that is moved up and down and rotated via the link member 770, and as described above, the opening 211a (third symbol display). Below the device 81 (see FIG. 2)), the rear case 210 is disposed at a position on the rear side of the rotary operation unit 300 (see FIGS. 6 to 9). The ring operation unit 700 moves the pair of ring forming members 790 up and down while rotating them, and arranges them in the retracted position shown in FIG. 46 or the coupling position shown in FIG. 47.

  At the retracted position shown in FIG. 46, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are moved downward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is opened (FIG. 6). reference). On the other hand, at the connecting position shown in FIG. 47, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are rotated upward in the direction in which they approach each other, and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are combined so that the third symbol display device is connected. An annular shape is formed on the front side of 81 (see FIG. 10).

  In this case, according to the circular ring operation unit 700, when the pair of circular ring forming members 790 are raised upward and are arranged at the coupling position, the circular ring forming member 790 is mechanically moved to the coupling position (elevated position). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the pair of annular ring forming members 790 at the coupling position.

  48 is an exploded front perspective view of the annular operation unit 700 in which the exploded annular operation unit 700 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded view of the annular operation unit 700 in which the exploded annular operation unit 700 is viewed from the rear. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the annular operation unit 700 includes an intermediate case body 710, a rear case body 720 disposed on the back side of the intermediate case body 710, and an opposite side of the rear case 720. The front case body 730 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, the drive motor 740 disposed in the intermediate case 710 and generating the rotational drive force, and the rotational drive force of the drive motor 740 are transmitted. Gear group (first gear 751 to sixth gear 756), a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762) for converting the rotational movement transmitted through the gear group into a linear movement, and A pair of link members 770 whose base ends are rotatably supported by a pair of racks 762 in the rack and pinion mechanism, an elevating base body 780 in which the tips of the pair of link members 770 are axially supported, and its elevating base. The body 780 is mainly provided with a pair of ring-forming members 790 whose base ends are rotatably supported.

  The intermediate case body 710 holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism rotatably and slidably with the rear case body 720 arranged on the rear side, and at the same time, the front case body arranged on the front side. 730 is a member that holds the base end of the link member 770 so that it can be slidably displaced between the link member 730 and the main body 711 that is formed in a flat plate shape of a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and an insertion groove 712 that is formed as an opening in the main body 711. And a projecting part 713 projecting upward from the upper edge of the main body part 711.

  The insertion grooves 712 respectively allow the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body 711) to be inserted, and the insertion shafts 772 of the inserted pair of link members 770 to be inserted. The back side of the main body 711 is a groove-shaped opening for inserting into each of the insertion holes 762c of the pair of racks 762, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body 711. The width of the insertion groove 712 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The overhang portion 713 is a portion for coming into contact with the back surface of the link member 770 to suppress the swing of the link member 770 in the front-back direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 56), and the center of the main body portion 711 in the longitudinal direction. Is formed to have a substantially triangular shape in a front view that widens toward the upper edge of the main body 711 from the protruding end (widens), and its front surface 713a is the front surface 711a of the main body 711. They are formed so as to be flush with each other (smoothly connected without any step and parallel to each other).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) toward the upright state, the front surface 713a of the protruding portion 713 abuts on the back surface of the link member 770 (FIGS. 47 and 56). Further, when the link member 770 is in the upright state, the link member 770 can be sandwiched between the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 and the pillar portion 732 of the case body 730 (see FIG. 47). .. This allows the link member 770 to come into contact with the link member 770 in an upright state where the posture of the link member 770 is particularly likely to be unstable and in the vicinity thereof, so that the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

  The edge of the overhang portion 713 is curved and formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. Therefore, as the link member 770 is erected (that is, as the posture thereof tends to become unstable), the area of the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 that can contact the back surface of the link member 770 can be increased. While it is possible to effectively suppress the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to reduce the area in which the overhanging portion 713 is visually recognized from the front and prevent the appearance from being impaired.

  Further, in the overhanging portion 713, a head portion 713b formed at the tip in the overhanging direction (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49) is projected to the front (forward), and this head portion 713b of the front case body 730 described later. It is connected to the top of the pillar portion 732. Therefore, as will be described later, when the pair of link members 770 is erected upright, the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713 is provided between the pair of link members 770 facing each other.

  The rear case body 720 is a member that rotatably and slidably holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism between the rear case body 720 and the intermediate case body 710. An insertion groove 722 formed in the main body portion 721, a front end guide groove 723 and a rear end guide groove 724 arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722, and a gear group (second gear 752 to sixth gear 756). And a plurality of shafts 725 that rotatably support the pinion gear 761.

  The insertion groove 722 is formed by inserting the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 protruding from the back surface of the rack 762 (that is, the insertion shaft 772 inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710). It is a groove-shaped opening for receiving and is linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body 721. That is, the insertion groove 722 is formed at a position overlapping the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710 in a front view in the assembled state. The width of the insertion groove 722 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The front-end guide groove 723 and the rear-end guide groove 724 are groove-shaped openings for inserting the front-end guide piece 762a and the rear-end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762, respectively, and restricting the moving direction thereof. They are arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722 with a predetermined space therebetween. The front end guide groove 723 has a groove width set to be smaller than the rear end guide groove 724, and the rear end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 is formed in the front end guide groove 723 such that the rear end guide shaft 762b cannot be inserted therethrough. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress an assembling failure when assembling the rack 762 to the rear case body 720, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembling work.

  The front case body 730 is a member that slidably holds the pair of link members 770 between the front case body 730 and the intermediate case body 710, and includes a main body portion 731 formed in a flat plate shape of a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the main body portion 731. And a columnar column portion 732 that is disposed on the front surface of the column and that extends along the vertical direction.

  The back surface 731a of the main body portion 731 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711 and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 in the intermediate case body 710, and the link member 770 is in a tilted state as described later. When rotated (displaced) between the upright state, the back surface 731a of the main body portion 731, the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711, and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 are opposed to the front surface and the back surface of the link member 770. Abut. Thereby, the link member 770 can be rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54 ). it can.

  The column portion 732 is a portion for holding the guide rod 733 inside and for sandwiching the link member 770 between the guide member 733 and the projecting portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710, and the front surface (the front left side in the drawing of FIG. 48) is opened. It is formed in a box shape. The guide rod 733 is a member for guiding the lifting/lowering of the lifting/lowering base body 780, and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section from a metal material, and is provided inside the pillar portion 732 in a posture with its axis aligned in the vertical direction. Retained. In this way, by forming the pillar portion 732 in a box shape with an open front surface and housing the guide rod 733 inside the pillar portion 732, the guide rod 733 can be arranged using the dead space. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the ring operation unit 700 as a whole.

  As will be described later, the guide rod 733 is inserted into the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780, so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is vertical through the guided portion 784. Guide in the axial direction). In this case, the guide rod 733 is arranged in front of the tooth surface of the rack 762 (on the front side) and behind the elevating base body 780 (main body 781) (on the back side), and will be described later. The effect of arranging the lifting base body 780 on the front side with respect to the rack 762 is offset, and the smooth lifting operation of the lifting base body 780 can be ensured at the same time.

  The drive motor 740 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, and has its drive shaft projected to the back side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711). A first gear 751 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 740, and the first gear 751 has a second gear 752 to a sixth gear 756 axially supported by a plurality of shafts 725 of the rear case body 720. Are sequentially meshed with each other, and the sixth gear 756 is meshed with a pinion gear 761 pivotally supported by a shaft 725 of the rear case body 720.

  As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism includes the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762. The pinion gear 761 is rotatably supported by the shaft 725 of the rear case body 720, and the pair of pinion gears 761 are sandwiched therebetween. Racks 762 are arranged so as to face each other with their tooth surfaces facing each other.

  The rack 762 has a front end guide piece 762a and a rear end guide shaft 762b protruding from one end and the other end of the rack 762 in the longitudinal direction, and an insertion hole 762c penetrating the side of the rear end guide shaft 762b. .. The front end guide piece 762a is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped projection, and the rear end guide shaft 762b is formed as a shaft body having a circular cross section. As described above, the leading end guide piece 762a and the trailing end guide shaft 762b are inserted into the leading end guide groove 723 and the trailing end guide groove 724 of the rear case body 720, so that the slide displacement (linear movement) of the rack 762 is performed. The direction is restricted to the extending direction of both guide grooves 723 and 724.

  The pair of link members 770 is a member for forming a link mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the rack and pinion mechanism to the elevating base body 780 and the ring forming member 790, and is a longitudinal direction. One side (base end) is connected to the rack 762, and the other longitudinal side (tip) is connected to the elevating base body 780 and the ring-forming member 790. Here, the detailed configuration of the link member 770 will be described with reference to FIG.

  50(a) is a front perspective view of the link member 770, FIG. 50(b) is a rear perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50(c) is a portion Lc of FIG. 50(a). FIG. 50D is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member 770 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld of FIG.

  The link member 770 includes a long plate-shaped main body 771, an insertion shaft 772 projecting from the back surface of the main body 771 at one longitudinal side (base end) of the main body 771, and the insertion shaft 772. A protruding wall portion 773 protruding from the front surface of the body portion 771 on the other side (tip) in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 771 on the opposite side, and a gear portion arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding wall portion 773. 774 and.

  As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is a shaft member having a circular cross section that is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion shaft 712 of the intermediate case body 710. The protruding wall portion 773 is a portion for offsetting the arrangement position of the gear portion 774 to the front (front) side of the main body portion 771, and is protruded from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at a protruding height h. The gear part 774 includes a shaft support hole 774a formed through the center thereof and a plurality of teeth 774b engraved on the outer periphery of the shaft support hole 774 as a center. 782 is inserted (axially supported) and meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the annular ring forming member 790 via the teeth 774b.

  In the present embodiment, the gear portion 774 (tooth 774b) is formed as a spur gear whose tooth lines are parallel to the axial direction, and the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 extend over the entire wall surface of the protruding wall portion 774. Then engraved. Therefore, even when the gear portion 774 is relatively displaced with respect to the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 which is the object of meshing due to the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) (FIG. 48 and FIG. 49), the tooth 774b extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 774 can be meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring-forming member 790, and the gears 792b and It is possible to prevent the meshing of the portion 774 and the gear portion 792 from coming off. Further, even when the relative displacement due to the bending or the twist described above occurs and the gear parts 774 and 792 are relatively displaced in the axial direction, the teeth extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall part 774 are engraved. Since the meshing area between the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) and the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) can be secured by the amount of 774b, uneven wear of these teeth 774b, 772b is suppressed and its durability is improved. Can be planned.

  Here, for example, if the body portion 771 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outward in the radial direction) of the gear portion 774, it is easy to secure the area of the seat surface at the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. However, in this embodiment, since the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (the end surface in the axial direction) of the gear portion 774, the protruding wall portion 773 can be secured to the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. The seating area is reduced.

  In this case, in the protruding wall portion 773, a wall surface (a wall surface on the axial center side of the shaft support hole 774 a) opposite to the wall surface on which the teeth 774 b of the gear portion 774 are formed by being extended and carved is the shaft support hole 774. Since it is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape centered on the axis, even if the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the shaft of the gear portion 774 is The seating surface area can be secured on the direction end surface, and the diameter of the collar C (see FIG. 49) arranged on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 can be increased by that amount. Furthermore, when the link member 770 (the main body 771, the protruding wall 773, and the gear 774) is integrally molded from a resin material, the protruding wall 773 is provided on the opposite side of the wall surface where the teeth 774b are formed. By forming the wall surface as a concave curved surface, not only the protruding wall portion 773 but also the entire wall thickness including the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 can be made uniform, and the moldability thereof can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the teeth 774b are engraved on the entire surface of the protruding wall 773 (that is, up to the connecting portion with the front surface of the main body 771), the area where the teeth 774b are formed is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the disengagement of the gear with the gear portion 792 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) of the ring forming member 790. In addition, as described above, when the link member 770 (the main body portion 771, the protruding wall portion 773, and the gear portion 774) is integrally molded from a resin material, the teeth 774b extend only partway through the protruding wall portion 773. In the case where it is not performed, the wall thickness of the projecting wall portion 773 can be made uniform over the whole, and the formability thereof can be further improved.

  As described above, in the link member 770, the protruding wall portion 773 is protruded from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at the protruding height h, and the gear portion 774 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding wall portion 773. Since it is provided, the gear portion 774 can be separated from the main body portion 771 by the protruding height h of the protruding wall portion 773. That is, in the assembled state, the disposition position of the elevating base body 780 can be separated (offset) from the rack 762 to the front (front) by the protrusion height h of the protrusion wall 773 (FIG. 55). And FIG. 57). The effect of this offset will be described later.

  It returns to FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, and demonstrates. The elevating base body 780 is a member that is vertically moved up and down between the retracted position and the coupling position by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770, and the main body 780 and the rear surface of the main body 780. A pair of shafts 782 that project from the shaft and pivotally support the gear part 774 (the shaft support hole 774a) of the link member 770, and the gear part 792 (the shaft support) of the ring-forming member 790 that is arranged in parallel below the pair of shafts 782. A pair of shafts 783 that pivotally support the hole 792a), and a pair of shafts 783 that are disposed on the back surface of the main body portion 781 below the pair of shafts 783 and that are vertically guided by the pillar portions 732 (guide rods 733) of the front case body 730. The guided portion 784 and the cover body 785 arranged on the back surface of the main body portion 781 are mainly provided.

  A plurality of insertion holes through which the guide rod 733 can be inserted are formed in the guided portion 784, and the guide rod 733 is inserted through the insertion holes, so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is the axial direction of the guide rod 733. It is restricted only to the direction along.

  The cover body 785 is a member that is disposed so as to face the axial end surfaces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 (see FIG. 51), and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. A portion 785a and an extending portion 785b that extends downward from the lower edge of the head portion in a strip shape and has a width narrower than that of the head portion 785a are integrally formed from a thin metal plate. .. As will be described later, when a relative displacement occurs in the gear parts 774, 792, the cover body 785 (the head part 785a and the extension part 785b) should be in contact with the axial end faces of the gear parts 774, 792. Thus, the relative displacement can be suppressed, and the meshing state between the gear portions 774 and the meshing state between the gears 774 can be appropriately maintained.

  The gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 are inserted through the shafts 782 and 783 through the shaft support holes 774a and 792a of the gear portions 774 and 792, respectively. The collar C having a larger diameter than the shaft support holes 774a and 792a is provided at the tip of the shafts 782 and 783, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed, so that the shafts 782 and 783 are held rotatably supported. It

  The pair of circular ring forming members 790 are members that are rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770 and that form a circular ring shape at the coupling position, and have a substantially circular ring shape. A main body portion 791 formed in a shape divided into two parts and a gear portion 792 disposed on one side (base end) in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 791 are mainly provided. The gear portion 792 is a portion that is axially supported by the elevating base body 780 and meshes with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. The gear portion 792 has a shaft supporting hole 792a formed through the center and a center of the shaft supporting hole 792a. And a plurality of teeth 792b engraved on the outer periphery thereof.

  A magnet (not shown) is embedded on the other side (tip) in the circumferential direction of the main body 791 on the side opposite to the side on which the gear 792 is arranged, forming a ring shape at the coupling position. When doing so (see FIG. 47 ), the tips of the ring-forming member 790 can be brought into close contact with each other using the magnetic force of the magnet. As a result, the annular shape can be reliably formed by the pair of annular forming members 790.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a connection state of the link member 770 with the elevating base body 780 and the ring-forming member 790 will be described. FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged rear view of the annular motion unit 700. Note that FIG. 51 illustrates a state in which the elevating base body 780 is arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 54 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the elevating base body 780, the tip ends (gear portions 774) of the pair of link members 770 are pivotally supported by the pair of shafts 782 (see FIG. 49), respectively, and the pair of shafts 783 (see FIG. 49), the base ends (gear portions 792) of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are pivotally supported, and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 are meshed with each other.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 drives the gear portion 774 (the shaft 782, see FIG. 49). The center of rotation is rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780, and the rotation is transmitted to the circular ring forming member 790 via the meshing of the gear portions 774, 792, so that the circular ring forming member 790 moves to the gear portion 792 (shaft (783, see FIG. 49) as a center of rotation with respect to the gear portion lifting base body 780. At the same time, the pair of link members 770 are erected or tilted with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730, so that the elevating base body 780 is moved up and down with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730 (FIG. 52). To FIG. 57).

  Here, the elevating base body 780 is connected to the tip of a link member 770 formed in the shape of a long plate, and ascends and descends with respect to each case body 710, 720, 730 via the link member 770, the elevating operation is performed. At times, the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body 771) easily causes vibration or shaking of the elevating base body 780 in the front-back direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 51). Also, the ring-forming member 790 itself is formed in a long plate shape, and the tip end opposite to the base end connected to the elevating base body 780 is a free end, so during the elevating operation, It is easy to generate vibration or shaking with respect to the lifting base body 780. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the magnet is embedded in the tip of the ring-forming member 790, the weight of the tip becomes heavier, and the ring-forming member 790 is more likely to generate vibration and shake accordingly.

  Such longitudinal vibration or shaking of the elevating base body 780 causes relative displacement between the link member 770 and the elevating base body 780. That is, a relative displacement is caused between the gear portion 774 integrally formed with the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790. Similarly, vibration or shaking of the ring-forming member 790 with respect to the elevating base body 780 causes relative displacement between the gear portion 792 integrally formed with the ring-forming member 790 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. .. Therefore, the meshing state of the gear parts 774, 792 becomes unstable, and the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790 and the elevating/lowering operation of the elevating base body 780 are not properly performed due to poor transmission of the driving force. , 792 is accelerated and the durability is lowered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cover body 785 is arranged on the back surface of the elevating base body 780, and the cover body 785 is provided on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. It is placed facing the. As a result, the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) causes vibration or shaking in the elevating base body 780 or the ring-forming member 790, and even if relative displacement occurs between the gear portions 774 and 790. , The cover body 785 (the head portion 785a and the extension portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774, 790, thereby suppressing the relative displacement between the gear portions 774, 792, and the meshing thereof. The state can be maintained properly. As a result, the transmission failure of the driving force can be suppressed, the rotating operation of the annular ring forming member 790 and the elevating operation of the elevating base body 780 can be properly performed, and the wear of the gear parts 774, 792 can be suppressed, The durability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the head portion 785a of the cover body 785 is arranged above the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the extended portion 785b of the cover body 785 is formed in the link member 770. It is arranged between the gear portions 774 and between the gear portions 792 of the annular ring forming member 790. Therefore, of the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774, 792, the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 and the main body portion 791 of the ring-forming member 790 are opposite to each other with the shaft 782 and the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) interposed therebetween. The head portion 785a and the extended portion 785b of the cover body 785 can be brought into contact with the axial end surface of the gear body 774 and the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792.

  For example, when the link member 770 is in the upright state or in a state close to the upright state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 51), the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is sandwiched between the main body 771 of the link member 770. Since the head portion 785a of the cover member 785 is arranged on the opposite side, the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 can be more effectively performed by the head portion 785a of the cover body 785. Can be regulated. Similarly, for example, when the link member 770 is in the tilted state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 52) or in a state close to the tilted state, the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is attached to the main body 771 of the link member 770. ), the extending portion 785b of the cover member 785 is disposed on the opposite side, and therefore, the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 is prevented. It can be regulated effectively by 785b.

  On the other hand, regarding the ring-forming member 790, regardless of its rotational position (that is, whether the link member 770 is in the upright state or the tilted state), the left and right of the gear portion 792 (left and right in FIG. 51). Since the main body portion 791 of the annular ring forming member 790 is disposed in the main body portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790, the extending portion of the cover member 785 is provided on the opposite side of the main body portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 with the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) interposed therebetween. By disposing 785b, the displacement of the gear portion 792 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 791 of the annular ring forming member 790 can be effectively restricted by the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, each gear portion 774 of the pair of link members 770 is not only meshed with the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 located therebelow, but also the gear portions 774 that are adjacent to each other on the left and right sides are connected to each other. Is also meshed. Similarly, each gear portion 792 of the pair of ring-forming members 790 is not only meshed with each gear portion 774 of the link member 770 located above it, but also the gear portions 792 adjacent to each other on the left and right are meshed with each other. To be done.

  As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the rotational operation of the pair of ring forming members 790. That is, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and further transmitted from the pair of link members 770 to the pair of annular ring forming members 790 (FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). In this case, the pair of racks 762 of the rack and pinion mechanism are independent of the pinion gear 761. Therefore, when the pair of rack members 770 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are also independent of each other, the phase shift amount of the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 (for example, backlash amount or dimensional tolerance) is paired with the rack 762. , The phase shift amount of the link member 770 with respect to the rack 762 (for example, the amount of rattling of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c) differs between the pair of link members 770, and the ring forming member with respect to the link member 770. The phase shift amount of 790 (for example, the amount of rattling of the shafts 782, 783 with respect to the shaft support holes 774a, 792a, or the amount of rattling of the teeth 792b with respect to the teeth 774b) differs between the pair of annular forming members 790. Due to the accumulation of the phase shifts, the phase shifts occur in the rotation operation of the pair of ring forming members 790, and the synchronization accuracy is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are meshed with each other and the gear portions 792 of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are meshed with each other, so that the above-mentioned phase shift causes the driving force. Even if it occurs in the transmission path of the above, the phase shift is not expressed in the rotation operation of the annular ring forming member 790 (that is, the phase shift can be absorbed in the most downstream of the drive force transmission path). As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy in the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790.

  Next, the operation of the annular motion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57. In this description, FIGS. 46 to 51 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 52 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 700 schematically illustrating the annular motion unit 700 in which the pair of circular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 53 is the LIII- of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 700 in a LIII line. FIG. 54 is a schematic rear view of the circular ring operation unit 700 schematically showing the circular ring operation unit 700 in which the pair of circular ring forming members 790 is arranged at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the coupling position. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit 700 taken along the line LV-LV in FIG. 54. 56 is a schematic rear view of the circular ring operation unit 700 schematically showing the circular ring operation unit 700 in which a pair of circular ring forming members 790 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 57 is a view of LVII- of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 700 in a LVII line.

  52 to 57, the outer shell structure including the intermediate case body 510, the rear case body 520, and the front case body 530, the drive motor 740, and the gear group (first Illustration of the drive structure including the first gear 751 to the sixth gear 756) or the cover body 785 is omitted. However, in FIGS. 52, 54, and 56, the positions of the upper edges of the main body portion 711 and the protruding portion 713 (front surfaces 711a and 713a) of the intermediate case body 710, and the main body portion 731 (back surface 731a) of the front case body 730. The position of the upper edge in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the state in which the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are expanded in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the tip side thereof (tip guide piece 762a). The tooth surface of the side) is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, the pair of link members 770 whose base end sides (insertion shafts 772) are pivotally supported by the rear end sides (insertion holes 762c) of the pair of racks 762 are in a tilted state, and the pair of link members 770 are The elevating base body 780 having the tip side (gear portion 774) axially supported is arranged at the lowermost position. In addition, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are expanded (distributed to the left and right) in the directions away from each other.

  When the drive motor 540 is driven from this state (the state where the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position), and the rotational drive force thereof is transmitted to the pinion gear 761 via the gear group (FIGS. 48 and 49). 52), the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52, and as the pinion gear 761 rotates, the pair of racks 762 shortens the expanded length thereof (the insertion holes 762c on the rear end side are brought closer to each other). It is moved linearly in the direction of letting. As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually erected by displacing the base end sides (insertion shafts 772) toward the center (that is, toward the directions toward each other).

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, relative rotation of the pair of link members 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780 is formed, and the rotation is transmitted through the gear portions 774 and 792 to the pair of annular ring forming members. By being transmitted to 790, the pair of ring-forming members 790 is relatively rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780, and the tips of the pair of ring-shaped members 790 are brought close to each other. At the same time, the upright movement of the pair of link members 770 forms a relative displacement of the elevating base body 790 with respect to the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and rack 762), and the elevating base 790 is raised.

  As described above, in the ring operation unit 700, the lifting base body 780 is pivotally supported by the tips of the pair of link members 770 whose base ends are pivotally supported by the rack and pinion mechanism, so that the pair of link members 770 is erected or tilted. While allowing the elevating base body 780 to move up and down by further engaging the gear part 792 of the ring-forming member 790 whose base end is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 with the gear part 774 of the link member 770, The ring member 790 can be rotated by the relative rotation of the link member 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780.

  That is, means for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 740 to the elevating base body 790 (elevating means) and means for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 740 to the ring-forming member 790 (rotating means) are individually provided. Since the link member 770 can be used as the link member 770, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. Further, the rotational movement of the ring-forming member 790 and the linear movement in the vertical direction can be performed in parallel, that is, the ring is not formed in a fixed position but the position is changed in the vertical direction. Since the rings are formed in order, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 are engaged with each other, and the link member 770 is engaged through the engagement of these gears 774 and 792. Is transmitted to the ring-forming member 790. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, when the pair of link members 770 is erected, the position of the center of gravity becomes higher. Due to the bending and twisting of the member 770 (main body 771), vibration and shaking of the elevating base body 780 (and a pair of ring-forming members 790) in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 54, horizontal direction in FIG. 55) occur. It becomes easier (the amount of displacement in the front-back direction increases).

  The bending and twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) or the annular ring forming member 790 (main body portion 791) or the vibration and shaking in the front-back direction are integrally formed on the link member 770 and the annular ring forming member 790. By affecting the gear portions 774 and 792 and relatively displacing the gear portions 774 and 792, there is a risk that the gear portions 774792 will be out of mesh. Even if it is possible to avoid the disengagement of the gear portions 774 and 792, the meshing state (meshing area) becomes unstable, and the surface pressure concentrates on a part of the tooth surface. , 792b may be unevenly worn, resulting in a decrease in durability.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the link member 770 has the tooth 774b extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 that connects the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 (see FIG. 50). ) Even when the above-described relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 occurs, it is possible to easily maintain the meshing of the gear portions 774 and 792 by the extension of 774b. As a result, not only can the disengagement be suppressed, but also the meshed state can be stabilized, uneven wear of the teeth 774b, 792b can be suppressed, and the durability thereof can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of ring-forming members 790 is arranged at an intermediate position between the retracted position and the combined position (specifically, the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 is disposed). When the rack is arranged at an intermediate position of the relative movable range) and the standing angle of the pair of link members 770 reaches a predetermined angle, the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 and the teeth engraved on the protruding wall portion 773 are formed. The tooth 774b connected to 774b (see FIG. 50) starts meshing with the tooth 792b in the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790.

  Therefore, the range from the state shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 to the state shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 described later (that is, the rising angle of the link member 770 becomes large, so that the vertical movement of the elevating base body 790 and In the range in which the shaking easily occurs and the meshing of the gears 774 and 792 is most likely to be disengaged), the tooth 774b extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 can be effectively used. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent disengagement of the gears 774 and 792 or improve durability of the teeth 774b and 792b.

  From the state shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, the pinion gear 761 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52 by driving the drive motor 740, and the pair of racks 762 is further shortened in the expanded length (rear end). When linearly moved in the direction in which the side insertion holes 762c come close to each other), the pair of link members 770 are erected substantially vertically. That is, the direction connecting the shaft 782 of the elevating base body 780 (see FIG. 49) and the insertion shaft 782 of the link member 770 is substantially vertical. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and the tips of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are brought into contact with each other, so that the ring shape is changed. It is formed.

  In this case, when the pair of ring-forming members 790 is arranged at the coupling position (that is, when the pair of link members 770 is erected to the upright state (the posture along the vertical direction)), the pair of link members is formed. Between the facing surfaces of 770, the connecting portion between the pillar portion 732 of the front case body 730 and the protruding portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 (in the present embodiment, the head portion 713b of the protruding portion 713, see FIGS. 48 and 49). Are provided, and the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion (the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713) are brought into contact with the facing surfaces of the pair of link members 770 (see FIG. 56 ), so that the pair having the annular shape is formed. The postures of the circular ring forming member 790 and the lifting base body 780 supporting the pair of circular ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

  That is, at the coupling position, the pair of link members 770 are erected upright and the center of gravity is increased, so that the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right (left and right in FIG. 56) about the insertion shaft 772. In addition, the rack 762 is easily moved in the direction of the linear movement (left and right direction in FIG. 56) by the left and right rotation of the pair of link members 770. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the postures of the link member 770 and the rack 762, and as a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 arranged at the tip of the link member 770 are also unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting portion (overhang portion) between the front case body 730 (column portion 732) and the intermediate case body 710 (overhang portion 713) is provided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770. Since the head portion 713b) of 713 is provided, the connecting portion (head portion 713b) causes the pair of link members 770 to rotate about the insertion shaft 772 in the left-right direction and the rack 762 to move linearly. Can regulate the movement of. Accordingly, the pair of link members 770 can be maintained in the upright state, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

  Further, since the pair of link members 770 are arranged so as to face each other substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction (the left-right direction of FIGS. 52, 54, and 56), the link member 770 is tilted relatively downward (for example, FIG. 52 to FIG. (Up to 55), the pair of link members 770 face to each other while the pair of link members 770 try to rotate to the left and right (the left and right direction in FIGS. 52 and 54) about the insertion shaft 772. 770 can cancel each other and maintain their posture.

  On the other hand, since the link member 770 may be formed in a flat plate shape, it is difficult to maintain its posture with respect to the displacement in the front-back direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). In this case, in the present embodiment, the base end side (insertion shaft 772 side) of the link member 770 is sandwiched by the facing surfaces of the intermediate case body 710 and the front case body 730. That is, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state, the front case body 730 (main body portion 731) is attached to the front surface and the back surface on the base end side of the link member 770. The back surface 731a and the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) can be brought into contact with each other. Thus, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-back direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). You can As a result, the elevation base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be raised and lowered while stabilizing their postures.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a bulge portion 713 is formed to bulge upward in the widthwise central portion of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the bulge portion 713 is As shown in FIG. 56, as the widthwise central portion is approached (that is, as the link member 770 is erected), the position of the upper edge of the front surface 713a is increased (that is, abutted on the back surface of the link member 770). The possible area is increased).

  As described above, the position of the upper edge of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) is raised not by raising the position of the upper edge of the front surface 711a entirely, but by raising only the central portion. The closer the link member 770 is to the standing state, the more the appearance is impaired by the wall surface of the intermediate case body 710 (or the area where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed is reduced), while the extension 713 of the protruding portion 713 is reduced. It is possible to increase the contactable area between the front surface 713a and the back surface of the link member 770 to enhance the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member 770 (suppressing the swinging in the front-rear direction). As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) in the vicinity of the upright state while suppressing the deterioration of the appearance. That is, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be stably maintained in a stopped state at the combined position, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 near the combined position. It is possible to raise and lower while stabilizing.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the projecting portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 has its front surface 713a retracted to the retracted position (that is, tilted to the lowermost position). The shape is set so that it can come into contact with the back surface of the 770 (see FIG. 46). Accordingly, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are stably maintained in a stopped state at the combined position, and the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are provided near the combined position. For the purpose of raising and lowering while stabilizing the posture of the robot, the portion (overhanging portion 713) in which the height position of the upper edge thereof is raised is used to raise and lower the base 780 disposed at the retracted position (lowermost) and The effect of stably maintaining the posture of the pair of ring-forming members 790 in the stopped state can be obtained at the same time.

  When the drive motor 740 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above case from the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pinion gear 761 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 56, and the pinion gear 761 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the pair of racks 762 are deployed (that is, linearly moved in the direction in which the rear end side insertion holes 762c are separated from each other). As a result, the pair of link members 770 is gradually tilted, and the pair of ring-forming members 790 is retracted to the retracted position as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53.

  Here, in the ring operation member 700, the weight of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts on the rack and pinion mechanism (the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762) via the pair of link members 770. To be done. That is, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of circular ring forming members 790 act in the direction in which the pair of racks 762 are deployed via the pair of link members 770. Therefore, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of circular ring forming members 790 may be lowered from the combined position. In this case, the descent of the elevating base body 780 is restricted by opposing the driving force of the drive motor 740 against the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 (that is, the elevating base body 780 is coupled. In the structure (holding in position), the consumed energy required for the drive motor 740 increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the protruding wall portion 773 is provided between the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the protruding height of the protruding wall portion 773 is increased. The gear portion 774 is offset from the main body portion 711 to the front (front) side by the amount of h (see FIG. 50(d)). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the elevating base body 780 is a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack 762 (that is, the paper surfaces of FIGS. 54 and 56). The thickness dimension of the link member 770 (that is, the total dimension of the thickness dimension of the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 and the projecting height h of the projecting wall portion 773) is shown on the front side, the left side of FIGS. 55 and 57). The rack 762 is offset (separated) by an amount.

  As a result, the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 acts on the rack 762 via the link member 770 even in the offset direction described above. That is, as the force component applied from the link member 770 to the rack 762, a force component in the direction in which the elevating base body 780 is offset can be generated, and a force component for moving the rack 762 in the movement direction can be generated accordingly. Can be made smaller. As a result, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 can be suppressed.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, at the coupling position, the link member 770 is erected in a posture along the vertical direction, and the shaft 782 of the elevating base body 780 (see FIG. 49) and the link member 770 are inserted. The direction connecting the shaft 772 is substantially orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack 762. Therefore, when the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 act on the rack 762 via the link member 770, the rack 762 is used as a force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction of developing (i.e., the direction of tilting the link member 770 in the upright state). Accordingly, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be held at the coupling position, and as a result, the consumed energy required by the drive motor 740 can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In detail, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the distance T1 between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 56) is the insertion axis of the pair of link members 770. It is made smaller than the horizontal distance T2 between 772 (T1<T2). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are erected in a posture in which each of the link members 770 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (that is, the posture in which the pair of link members 770 has a V shape). In this way, by placing the pair of link members 770 in a V-shape, the drive motor 740 is moved to the above-described position in order to start the operation from the state (coupling position) shown in FIG. 56 to the retracted position. When rotationally driving in the opposite direction to the case, the deployment of the pair of racks 762 (that is, the tilting of the pair of link members 770) due to the rotational driving can be started easily and reliably.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a magnet is embedded in the tip of the main body 791 of the ring-forming member 790, and the tips of the main body 791 are magnetically attached to each other. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released. The lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position. On the other hand, when starting the operation from the coupling position to the retracted position, it is necessary to release the magnetic attraction force of the magnet. In this case, it is necessary to keep the pair of link members 770 in a V-shape (that is, to set T1<T2) so as to maintain the coupled state at the coupled position and start the operation from the coupled position to the retracted position. This is particularly effective in satisfying both securing of releasing the coupled state at the time.

  Here, the magnet embedded in the tip of the main body 791 of the ring-forming member 790 may be omitted. In this case, the distance T1 between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 56) and the distance T2 between the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 in the horizontal direction are substantially equal to each other. It is preferable to make them the same (T1=T2) or to make the former larger than the latter (T2<T1). Accordingly, even when the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position.

  In this embodiment, the guide rod 733 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and on the rear side (right side in FIG. 57) of the lifting base body 780 (main body 781). To be done. The guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780, through which the guide rod 733 is inserted, is arranged at the lowermost part of the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781). That is, in the direction of the forward offset of the elevating base body 780 with respect to the rack 762, the portion where the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762, the elevating base body 780, and the pair of annular forming members. A guide rod 733 is arranged at a position between the center of gravity of the structure composed of 790 and the elevation base body 780 is guided up and down through the guide rod 733 and the guided portion 784. With this arrangement, it is possible to achieve both the effect of offsetting the elevating base body 780 on the front side with respect to the rack 762 described above and ensuring a smooth elevating operation of the elevating base body 780.

  Next, the swing motion unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64.

  The rocking motion unit 800 includes the two arm members 820 as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 11), and is composed of two units for moving (displacement) the both arm members 820. That is, the rocking motion unit 800 is composed of two units which are disposed above and below the rear case 210 in the front view of the rear case 210, and are arranged on the left and right sides with the opening 211a interposed therebetween. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) the arm member 820 is the same in the two units, in the following, one of these two units (on the left side of the opening 211a) will be described. The provided unit (see FIGS. 7 and 11) will be described as a swing motion unit 800.

  58 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 800 when the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 59 is a swing motion unit when the arm member 820 is extended to the projecting position. 8 is a front perspective view of 800. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the swing motion unit 800 includes an arm member 820 whose base end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 830 which applies a rotational driving force to the arm member 820. The arm member 820 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 58 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of hanging vertically downward, and is retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 6), while being stretched. At the projecting position, the arm member 820 is in a posture in which the tip is lifted upward and is tilted obliquely downward, and the tip is projected to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5).

  In this case, in this embodiment, when the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position shown in FIG. 59, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the projecting position as described later. Therefore, it is not necessary to oppose the driving force of the drive motor 830 so that the arm member 820 does not rotate toward the retracted position due to the action of gravity (weight of itself). It is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 830 required to hold the drive motor 830. This detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking motion unit 800, which is a front view of the rocking motion unit 800 that has been disassembled. Further, FIG. 61A is a rear view of the swing motion unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a swing view in the portion LXIb of FIG. 61A. 9 is a partially enlarged rear view of the operation unit 800. FIG. 61(a) and 61(b), the swing motion unit 800 with the mounting base 810 removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in the swing motion unit 800, a mounting base 810 arranged in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7) and a proximal end of the mounting base 810 are rotatably supported. An arm member 820, a drive motor 830 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the arm member 820, and a front case body 840 in which the drive motor 830 is provided and in front of the mounting base 810. , Is mainly provided.

  The mounting base 810 is a member for accommodating the base end of the arm member 820 and the drive motor 830 between it and the front case body 840, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view. The mounting base 810 is provided with a shaft 811 projecting from the front surface thereof and rotatably supporting the arm member 820.

  The arm member 820 has a main body 821 formed in an elongated shape, a groove 822 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the proximal end side of the main body 821, and a main body 821 opposite to the groove 822. A decorative portion 823 which is provided on the front surface of the distal end side of the main body portion 821 and is formed as a decorative body, and a shaft supporting hole 824 which is formed through the main body portion 821 at a position between the decorative portion 823 and the groove portion 821. Mainly prepared for.

  The groove portion 822 includes a first groove 822a extending linearly and a second groove 822b connected to one end of the first groove 822a and curved and extending in an arc shape. The groove 822b is formed as an L-shaped groove when viewed from the front. In other words, in the groove portion 822, the recessed portion provided in one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other is the second groove 822b.

The arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that the protruding pin 833 is arranged at the end point of the first groove 822a (the connection position between the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) (see FIG. 63(b)). In, the shape is matched with an arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Further, the groove widths of the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b are set to have the same size as each other. The arm member 820 has its shaft support hole 824 inserted with the shaft 811 of the mounting base 810 so that the base end thereof is inserted. Is rotatably supported by the mounting base 810. In this case, the contact surface portion 841 of the front case body 840 is brought into contact with the arm member 820 on the front surface of the main body portion 821 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 824 (FIG. 61(b)). reference). As a result, the arm member 820 is held such that its base end is rotatable between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840 facing each other.

  The drive motor 830 has a plate-shaped drive arm 832 having a base end fixed to the drive shaft 831 and extending radially outward from the drive shaft 831, and a protrusion provided at the tip of the drive arm 832. The mounting pin 833 is mainly provided, and the protruding pin 833 is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the front case body 840 by a fastening screw.

  As described above, the projecting pin 833 is a portion that is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and is the same or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 822 (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) of the arm member 820. It is formed as a cylindrical body having a diameter. Therefore, when the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, the protruding pin 833 is moved within the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820 along the extending direction of the groove portion 822, and as a result, the arm member 820. Is rotated about the axis 811.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, the swing motion of the swing motion unit 800 will be described. In this description, FIG. 61 will be referred to as appropriate.

  62 to 64 are views for explaining a process of moving the arm member 820 of the swing motion unit 800 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series, and FIGS. 62(a), 63(a) and 63(a) and FIG. 64(a) is a rear view of the swing motion unit 800, and FIGS. 62(b), 63(b) and 64(b) are portions LXIIb and 63(a) of FIG. 62(a), respectively. 64] is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit 800 in a portion LXIIIb in FIG. 64A and a portion LXIVb in FIG. 64A.

  Note that, in FIG. 62, the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, and the arm member 820 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position. In FIG. 63, the arm member 820 is in the extended position. FIG. 64 illustrates a state immediately after the arm member 820 reaches the extended position and a state in which the drive motor is further rotationally driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), when the arm member 820 is arranged at the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a downwardly hung posture, and the protruding pin 833 is The groove 822 is located at the starting point of the first groove 822a (the end opposite to the side connected to the second groove 822b, the right side in FIG. 61(b)).

  In this retracted position, the protruding tip end surface of the protruding portion 821a protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 821 of the arm member 820 faces the restriction surface 812 on the side wall of the mounting base 810 at a predetermined interval. Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated about the shaft 811 in response to an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player hitting or rocking the game machine), the protrusion 821a contacts the restriction surface 812. By contacting them, the rotation of the arm member 820 can be regulated, and the rotation can be quickly converged.

  The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) (the state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the retracted position), and the drive arm 832 is moved to the left in FIG. 61(b). When it is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise), the protruding pin 833 is moved toward the end point of the groove portion 822 in the first groove 822a (the side connected to the second groove 822b, the left side in FIG. 61B). .

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the arm member 820 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the shaft support hole 824 in FIG. 61B. The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is further rotationally driven, and the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 62B. As a result, the protruding pin 833 is the end point of the groove portion 822 in the first groove 822a. 63A and 63B, the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position as shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B.

  Here, also in the conventional gaming machine, the first shaft (corresponding to the shaft 811), the moving member (corresponding to the arm member 820) rotated about the first shaft, and the driving force applied to the moving member. There is also a drive motor (corresponding to the drive motor 830) for rotating the moving member about the first axis as the center of rotation by the driving force of the drive means (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position (corresponding to the projecting position), it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. In this case, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the driving force of the drive motor is opposed to the gravity (the weight of the moving member) to restrict the movement (lowering) of the moving member (that is, the moving member is held at the raised position). However, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

  On the other hand, according to the swing motion unit 400 of the present embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 830 can be released by mechanically holding the arm member 820 in the extended position, and the arm member 820 is extended. It is possible to suppress the energy consumption required to hold the position.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the state shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b) (the protruding pin 833 reaches the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822, and the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position). Immediately after the start), the drive motor 830 is further driven to rotate. As a result, the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 62( b ), and as shown in FIGS. 64( a) and 64 (b ), the projecting pin 833 causes the groove 822 to move. To be moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second groove 822b is connected to the end point of the first groove 822a (a concave portion is provided on one inner wall surface of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). In the state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position, the projecting pin 833 is moved into the second groove 822b (on one inner wall surface of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). Since the protruding pin 833 is received in the recessed recess, the arm member 820 is mechanically held in the projecting position (the arm member 820 is centered on the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811)). Can be regulated to be rotated. That is, even if the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the extended position, and the amount of the drive motor 830 required to hold the arm member 820 in the extended position is consumed accordingly. Energy can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, with respect to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833, the projecting pin 833 and the shaft supporting hole 824 (the shaft 811) are connected. ) Is substantially orthogonal to each other, and the inner wall surfaces of the second groove 822b of the portion where the projecting pin 833 is located are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Is formed as.

  Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft support hole 824 (the shaft 811), the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b moves in a direction that coincides with the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Since the projecting pin 833 is pressed, even if the arm member 820 is rotated and the projecting pin 833 is pressed by the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b, the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 cannot be rotated. That is, the arm member 820 cannot be rotated.

  Therefore, even when the arm member 820 is rocked by the player hitting or rocking the game machine in a state where the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 is pivotally supported. Rotation around the shaft 824 (the shaft 811) can be restricted, and as a result, it can be reliably held in the extended position.

  In this case, as described above, in the arc shape of the second groove 822b, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the projecting pin 833 is the end point of the first groove 822a (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b). In the state of being arranged at the connection position), it is matched with an arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Therefore, when the projecting pin 833 arranged at the end point of the first groove 822b is moved (received) into the second groove 822b (that is, when the state shown in FIG. 63 is changed to the state shown in FIG. 64). In addition, since the movement locus of the projecting pin 833 and the shape of the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b are matched, it is possible to prevent the posture of the arm member 820 arranged at the projecting position from changing. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 63, after the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position, the posture of the arm member 820 at the projecting position is prevented from changing (while being kept in the stopped state). The protruding pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b, and the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the projecting position.

  Here, the groove portion 822 is shaped such that the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the side opposite to the shaft support hole 824 (the side separated from the shaft support hole 824) (of the first groove 822a). Even if the inner wall surfaces of the inner wall surfaces facing each other on the side opposite to the shaft support hole 824 have a recessed portion), mechanical holding of the arm member 820 can be performed similarly to the case of the present embodiment. It is possible. However, in this case, it is necessary to switch the rotation direction of the drive motor 830 when moving (accepting) the projecting pin 833 into the second groove 822b after the arm member 820 is arranged at the extended position. Occurs, the control becomes complicated, and the operation reliability decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove portion 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the shaft support hole 824 side (the side close to the shaft support hole 824). The concave portion is formed on the inner wall surface on the shaft support hole 824 side of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other.) Therefore, the arm member 820 can be moved to the retracted position without switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 830. Can be placed in the extended position and the recessed pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 in the extended position. As a result, the control can be simplified and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 are formed as through holes in the main body portions 451a and 462a in the combined operation unit 400 has been described. However, the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 may be recesses having a bottom. Even in the case of a bottomed recess, by inserting a jig into the recess by the same method as in the above embodiment, the mounting position and the like can be positioned, while comparing with the case of forming a through hole. Then, since the rigidity of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 can be secured, the durability thereof can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the combined operation unit 400, by making the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 different, the opening/closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 is performed as a non-parallel opening/closing operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first and second pinion leg members 482 and 483 have the same length, and the opening and closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 are non-parallel. Of course, it is possible.

  In the above embodiment, in the combined motion unit 400, the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the rack portion 481b and the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c of the second pinion leg member 483 and the rack portion 481b. Although the case where the ratio is the same has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the rack portion 481b and the gear ratio of the second pinion leg member 483 are not limited thereto. The gear ratio between the portion 483c and the rack portion 481b may be different. This makes it possible to open and close the operation members 491 and 492 in a non-parallel manner to enhance the effect.

  In the above embodiment, the case where both the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are meshed with the rack portion 481b in the combined motion unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only one of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 meshes with the rack portion 481b, and the other does not mesh with the rack portion 481b, and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can rotate. It may be supported only on the. This makes it possible to open and close the operation members 491 and 492 in a non-parallel manner to enhance the effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the combined operation unit 400, as the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491 and 492, the operation of continuously rotating the rotating first gear 461 and the opening/closing first gear 451 from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ4. However, the operation unit is not limited to this, and it is naturally possible to divide the unit of operation within the range of the rotation angles θ0 to θ4.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the first combination operation unit 500, the case where the insertion shafts 531c are arranged in two rows in a row on the back surface of the A-layer base plate 531 is described, but the invention is not limited thereto. The number of insertion shafts 531c in each row may be two or less, or may be four or more.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are attached to the central insertion shaft 531c of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically on the back surface of the A-layer base plate 531. Although the case of connecting the first link member 541 and the first insertion member 531c to the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically is described above. The two link members 542 may be connected.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the retaining ring E is provided as a retainer for the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c that are inserted into the shaft support hole 541a and the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541. While the mounting or fastening screw is fastened, the case where the mounting of the retaining ring E as a retaining member or the fastening of the fastening screw is omitted for the coupling shaft 526 inserted into the coupling hole 541b has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and it suffices that the retaining ring E as a retaining member or the fastening screw is fastened at least at one of these three locations.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

  A moving member movably formed between a first position and a second position, a driving unit for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit for the moving member. In a gaming machine provided with a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and a transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member. A blocking state for blocking is formed, and at least when the moving member in the first position starts to move to the second position, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmission means. The driving force required for the driving means to start the movement can be suppressed, and as a result, the driving means can be downsized.

  That is, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the stationary object is moved. Therefore, a force exceeding the inertial force generated in the moving member at the start of the movement is applied. Since it is necessary to act on such a moving member, the driving force required for the driving means becomes large. As a result, the size of the driving means is increased (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). On the other hand, after the movement of the moving member is started, the action of inertia that acts to maintain the motion state of the moving member acts, so that the driving force required for the driving means does not move the moving member. It is small compared to the driving force required at the start. In other words, it can be said that, after the movement of the moving member is started, the driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is being used.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the interruption state is formed by the transmission means, and thus the driving state is achieved. Even if the driving force that can be generated by the means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started. That is, since the transmission means first forms the cutoff state, it is possible to generate a driving force in the driving means in a no-load state, and to give momentum (inertial force) to the driving state of the driving means. .. Then, the transmission state is formed by the transmission means (switching from the cutoff state to the transmission state), so that the driving means drives the driving force to the moving means in a state in which the driving state is energized (inertial force is large). Can be transmitted. With this, even if the driving unit is downsized, the movement of the moving member can be started. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used.

  In the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is formed so that the teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed on at least a part or the entire circumference thereof, and the drive means-side member can be meshed with the teeth. A moving member side member in which teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the driving means side member to the moving member are formed at least partially or entirely around the moving member side member, and at least the driving means side member or the moving member side member. One is provided with a non-forming part in which the teeth are not formed and which cannot be meshed with the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the transmission means is formed so that the driving means side member and the moving member side member can mesh with each other. Therefore, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the driving means side The moving member side member meshed with the member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the moving member (transmission state is formed) through the rotation of the moving member side member. In this case, since the non-forming portion in which the teeth are not formed is formed on one of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member, the driving unit side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit and the driving unit side member is rotated. When the non-formation portion is arranged at the meshing position of the member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member cannot mesh with each other, and the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is blocked. (A cutoff state is formed).

  Therefore, when the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the non-formation portion is first used to form the cutoff state, so that the driving means side member can be idly rotated. Therefore, it is possible to drive the drive means in a no-load state, and to give momentum to the drive state of the drive means (inertial force on the drive side member). After that, the idling driving means side member is engaged with the moving member side member (that is, a transmission state is formed), so that the driving means starts the driving of the moving means in a state where the driving state is energized. be able to. Thus, the movement of the moving member can be started even if the driving unit is downsized.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the transmission means includes the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and at least one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. Since the non-formation part is formed so that the teeth are not formed, the disconnection state and the transmission state are determined according to the relative rotational position (rotational position of the non-formation part) between the driving unit side member and the moving member side member. You can switch between and. That is, an actuator device is not required in the configuration for achieving such switching of states, and only the gears can be used. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, the teeth formed on the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are mechanical elements used for transmission of power through meshing with the teeth of the mating member. In this case, the shape of the tooth trace is not limited. For example, the teeth of the gears illustrated below can be applied to the teeth of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member. Examples of gears include spur gears, helical gears, bevel gears, bevel gears, spiral bevel gears, screw gears, crown gears, miter gears, internal gears, hypoid gears, and worm gears. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

  In the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member face each other, A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a cutoff state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes a non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the driving member side member Since the cut-off state is formed by the forming portions facing each other, the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is improved. It is possible to improve.

  That is, in the case where only one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has the non-forming portion (that is, the other of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has teeth formed over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction). It is necessary that the non-forming portion is retracted to a position where meshing with the other tooth of the driving unit side member or the moving member side member can be avoided. Specifically, the non-forming portion needs to be retracted to the rotation axis side with respect to the root of one of the teeth of the driving unit side member or the moving member side member. As a result, since the amount of retreat in the non-forming portion increases, the outer diameter of the non-forming portion of one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member decreases, and the one portion of the driving means side member or the moving member side member decreases accordingly. Causes a decrease in rigidity.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A3, each of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member has a non-forming portion, and thus both non-forming portions are retracted to a position where they do not interfere with the facing non-forming portion. It's enough if there is. Specifically, both the non-formation portions can be located between the roots and the peaks of the teeth of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member, and it is not necessary to retract them to the rotary shaft side from the roots. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-forming portion can be reduced, so that the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member is reduced. It is possible to improve.

  In the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion of one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. The non-formation portion on the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is separated from the other tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member in the circumferential direction, so that the driving means side member or the moving member side member A gaming machine A4, which is shaped so as to project toward a non-forming portion on one side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion provided in each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is a non-forming portion in one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. The drive means side member or the moving member side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis, and the non-forming portion on the other side of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is the drive means side member or the moving member side member. A shape protruding toward a non-forming portion formed on one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member as it is separated from the other tooth of the member side member in the circumferential direction (that is, the driving means side member or the moving member side member Of the driving means side member or the moving member side member while avoiding the interference between these two non-formation portions and enabling the formation of the cutoff state. By increasing the outer diameter of the other non-forming portion, the rigidity of the other of the driving unit side member or the moving member side member can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the drive unit side member and the moving member side member are respectively the drive unit at the first phase position and the second phase position which is a phase position different from the first phase position. The gaming machine A5, wherein the non-formed portion of the side member and the non-formed portion of the movable member side member face each other to form the cutoff state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member form a cutoff state at two positions of the first phase position and the second phase position. Therefore, by making the first phase position and the second phase position correspond to the first position and the second position of the moving member, the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started. Not only when the moving member in the second position starts to move to the first position, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed, so that the driving state of the driving unit is changed. Momentum (inertial force) can be given. That is, even if the driving force that can be generated by the driving unit is small, the movement of the moving member can be started both when the moving member is at the first position and when it is at the second position.

  A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmitting unit transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the second moving member, and the transmitting unit transmits the driving force to the second moving member. A gaming machine B1 capable of simultaneously forming a blocking state in which transmission of a driving force to the first moving member is blocked.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member move. To be done. In this case, the transmission means can simultaneously form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member and a shut-off state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is shut off. Therefore, the operation mode in which the first moving member is stopped while the second moving member is moved can be achieved by the one driving unit.

  That is, when the movement of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by one driving means, in the conventional product, there are two driving states, that is, the driving means generates the driving force and the driving force is stopped. By forming the structure, since the operation mode of the first moving member and the second moving member is switched, only the operation mode in which both the first moving member and the second moving member both move or both stop However, it was not possible to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member, a driving means for moving the first moving member and a driving means for moving the second moving member are separately provided. It was necessary (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-139766).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, as described above, the operation mode in which the first moving member is stopped while the second moving member is moved can be achieved by the one driving means, so the first moving member and the second moving member It is possible to reduce the number of driving means and reduce the product cost while making it possible to exert the effect of moving and stopping the members.

  In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means transmits a driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member and a driving force generated by the driving means to the second moving member. A second transmission member, wherein the first transmission member has a first driving means-side member in which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the first driving means. A first moving member side member having teeth formed on the side member so as to be meshable with each other and at least partly or wholly having teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the first driving means side member to the first moving member; And at least one of the first driving member side member and the first moving member side member is incapable of meshing with the other of the first driving member side member or the first moving member side member because the teeth are not formed. A gaming machine B2, which is provided with a non-forming part.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmitting member and is transmitted to the second moving member by the second transmitting member. The first moving member and the second moving member are moved respectively.

  In this case, the first transmitting member is formed so that the first driving member side member and the first moving member side member can be meshed with each other, and therefore, when the first driving member side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving member, The first moving member side member meshed with the first driving means side member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member through the rotation of the first moving member side member, and the first moving member Will be moved. Further, since one of the first driving unit side member and the first moving member side member includes a non-forming portion in which teeth are not formed, the first driving unit side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, When the non-formation portion is arranged at the meshing position of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member are unable to mesh with each other, and the driving means The transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is blocked (a blocking state is formed). That is, the formation of the blocking state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Accordingly, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the one driving unit.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the first transmission member includes the first driving unit side member and the first moving member side member, and the first driving unit side member or Since the tooth is not formed on at least one of the first moving member side members and the non-forming portion is provided, the relative rotational position between the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member (of the non-forming portion). It is possible to switch between the cutoff state and the transmission state according to the rotational position). That is, an actuator device is not required in the configuration for achieving such switching of states, and only the gears can be used. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, the second transmission member is moved from the drive means to the second transmission member when the transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. A gaming machine B3, which is capable of forming a shut-off state that shuts off the transmission of the driving force to the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member is moved from the drive means to the second movement member when the transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first movement member is formed by the first transmission member. Since it is possible to form the cut-off state that cuts off the transmission of the driving force, the operation mode of stopping the second moving member while moving the first moving member can be achieved by the one driving means. That is, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 (that is, the effect that the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means), while moving the first moving member The operation mode in which the second moving member is stopped can be achieved by the one driving means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of driving means and reduce the product cost, increase the variation of the operation modes of the movement and stop of the first moving member and the second moving member, and enhance the effect of the production. it can.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member includes a groove-shaped groove portion and a pin portion formed so as to be movable along the groove portion, and the groove portion and the pin portion extend from the drive means to the second moving member. The pin portion is moved along the groove portion so as to form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member. The gaming machine B4, wherein the pin portion is stopped with respect to the groove portion so that a blocking state for blocking the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the pin portion is moved along the groove portion, so that it is possible to form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member. On the other hand, by stopping the pin portion with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a blocking state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked, so that the driving force of the driving means is moved by the first movement. When the transmission state to be transmitted to the member is formed by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is moved), the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked. , The second moving member is stopped, while the driving force from the driving unit to the first moving member is blocked by the first transmitting member (that is, the first moving member is stopped), the driving unit. It is possible to move the second moving member by transmitting the driving force of the above to the second moving member.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member in which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the second driving means side member. At least a part or the entire circumference of the teeth that are formed to be meshable and that transmits the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member is formed, and one of the groove portion and the pin portion is arranged. A second moving member side member, the second driving means side member is disposed coaxially with the first driving means side member of the first transmission member, and the second moving member side member is provided. Is provided coaxially with the first moving member side member of the first transmission member, and the gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the second driving member side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmitting member are the first driving member side member and the first moving member of the first transmitting member. Since they are arranged coaxially with the member-side members, backlash between the second driving member-side member of the second transmission member and the second moving member-side member, and the first driving member-side member of the first transmission member and Backlash between the first moving member-side members can be generated in the same direction, and thus, it is possible to prevent the production timing of the first moving member and the second moving member from deviating from each other.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second driving member side member of the second transmitting member may be fixed to the first driving member side member of the first transmitting member. According to this, the second driving member side member of the second transmitting member is fixed to the first driving member side member of the first transmitting member, so that both the first driving member side member and the second driving member side member are provided. A member for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit is not required, and a member for transmitting the driving force to either the first driving unit side member or the second driving unit side member is sufficient. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced or the parts can be downsized to reduce the product cost.

  Here, fixing the first driving means side member to the second driving means side member means that it is sufficient if the rotations of the first driving means side member and the second driving means side member are synchronized. Therefore, the first driving means side member and the second driving means side member may be formed separately and fixed to each other, or may be integrally formed. When they are formed separately, as a method for fixing the two, for example, adhesion with an adhesive, ultrasonic welding, fastening with screws, or a method of fitting a protrusion provided on one side into a recess or hole provided on the other , A combination of these, and the like are exemplified.

  A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means is formed with at least a part or the entire circumference of teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and the drive means-side member is formed so as to be meshable with the drive means-side member. A moving member side member in which teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the means side member to the moving member are formed at least partially or entirely around the moving member side member and the moving member side member, When the non-forming portions are respectively provided at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the moving member side is provided. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a non-forming portion of the member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the moving member side member meshed with the driving means side member is rotated, and with the rotation of the moving member side member. The moving member is moved. When the driving means side member is further rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are Is unable to mesh. As a result, the transmission of the driving force from the driving unit to the moving member is blocked (a blocked state is formed), and the moving member is stopped. That is, the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range. In this case, since the non-formed portion of the moving member side member is formed so as to be able to contact the non-formed portion of the driving means side member, the non-formed portion of the moving member side member contacts the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. The rotation of the moving member side member in the contact direction can be restricted. That is, the movement of the moving member can be restricted.

  In this case, the stopping of the moving member has conventionally been performed as follows. That is, a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is provided, and when the rotation of the driving means side member or the moving member side member to a predetermined rotational position is detected by the sensor device, When it is judged that the moving member has reached the end of the moving range, the driving of the driving means is stopped. Alternatively, the drive amount of the drive unit (for example, the number of steps when the drive unit is configured by a step motor) is detected (counted), and when the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the moving member ends the movement range. The driving of the driving means is stopped when it has been reached (see JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, for example, due to poor detection of the rotational position or drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise, the drive means may not be stopped even though the moving member reaches the end of the moving range. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper when the driving means is not stopped properly. However, in the structure in which the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper as described above, when the moving member collides with the stopper, not only the moving member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the driving means. There is also a risk that the driving means may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are unable to engage with each other, so that the driving unit Since the transmission of the driving force to the moving member is cut off, the moving member can be stopped even when the driving force of the driving means is continuously generated. Therefore, damage due to the collision between the moving member and another member can be avoided. Further, even if the moving member collides with another member, the moving member is separated from the driving means and the driving means is idling, so that an excessive load acts on the driving means. It can be avoided.

Further, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is provided with a movable member that is formed so as to be movable, and a drive unit that applies a drive force to the movable member, and the drive member moves the movable member within a predetermined movement range. There is a game machine that allows it (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120640).
In this case, for example, when the end of the moving range of the moving member is set to the raised position and gravity acts on the moving member arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member moves (falls) by the action of gravity. You need not to. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is regulated by opposing the driving force of the driving means to the gravity (weight of the moving member) (that is, the moving member is set to the end of the moving range). Since it is a structure for holding), energy consumption required for holding the moving member is large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member. Thus, the rotation of the moving member side member (movement of the moving member) can be restricted. That is, in the gaming machine C1, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member and the driving means are separated from each other, and thus the driving force of the driving means cannot be used to hold the moving member at the end. Using the contact of the non-forming portion, the moving member can be mechanically held at the end of the moving range. As a result, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C1, the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member and abutted against each other. In this case, the gaming machine C2 is formed in a shape capable of restricting rotation of the moving member side member in both directions.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. When the moving members are brought into contact with each other (that is, when the moving means is arranged at the end of the moving range), the moving member side member is formed into a shape capable of restricting rotation in both directions. Compared to the case where the rotation of the side member is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation in only one direction (for example, only the direction in which the moving member is moved by the action of gravity), the moving member when the end of the moving range is reached Since the vibration can be converged and the moving member can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range, and the moving member can be held in a stable state at the end of the moving range, the moving member that should be in a stopped state is affected by an external force (for example, a game It is possible to suppress vibration or displacement due to an external force generated by a person hitting or shaking the game board.

  In the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is curved and formed in an arc shape around the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is the drive When arranged at the meshing position of the device side member and the moving member side member, it has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member and has the same diameter as the arc of the non-forming portion of the drive means side member. Alternatively, the gaming machine C3 is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a slightly larger diameter.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and is on the moving member side. The non-formation part of the member is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member and is not formed when the drive means side member and the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position. Since the curved portion is formed in an arc shape having the same diameter as or slightly larger than the circular arc of the portion, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member can be smoothly brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member, and Both can be easily brought into contact with each other by surface contact. As a result, the non-forming portions can be smoothly brought into contact with each other, the impact when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range and is stopped can be moderated, and the contact pressure between the non-forming portions can be reduced. The durability of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member can be improved.

  In addition, since the non-formed portion of the driving unit side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member are curved in a concentric arc shape, the moving member side member is not affected by the rotational position (phase) of the driving unit side member. The non-forming portion can be brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving unit side member, and the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions can be restricted. That is, even if the drive-side gear is further rotated after the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the rotation of the moving member-side member can be restricted in both directions, and as a result, the moving member is held at the end of the moving range. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the moving member side member includes a plurality of fastened portions, and the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side gear through the plurality of fastened portions. A gaming machine C4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C4, since the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side member through the plurality of fastened parts, one structure is formed by the moving member side member and the moving member connected at these plural points. it can. That is, the rigidity of the moving member side member can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the moving member. That is, since the moving member side member receives a reaction force from the driving means side member when the non-formation portion is brought into contact with the non-formation portion of the driving means side member, the rigidity for resisting the reaction force is secured. On the other hand, for example, when the wall thickness is increased, the weight is increased, and when the material having high rigidity is adopted, the material cost is increased. However, according to the gaming machine C4, the rigidity of the moving member is used (that is, the moving member is moved). Since the rigidity of the moving member side member is increased by being integrated with the member), it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the moving member side member or adopt a high rigidity material. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the durability of the moving member side member while reducing the weight and cost of the moving member side member.

  In the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is arranged at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means side member with a non-forming portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member moves because the fastened portion is arranged at a position facing the driving means side member with the non-forming portion of the moving member side member being sandwiched therebetween. It is possible to effectively increase the rigidity of a portion that receives a reaction force from the driving unit side member when the non-forming unit member-side member is brought into contact with the driving unit side member non-forming unit. As a result, both weight reduction and cost reduction of the moving member side member and improvement in durability of the moving member side member can be further achieved.

  It is more preferable that the fastened portion of the moving member gear is arranged at a position facing the rotating shaft of the driving means side member with the non-forming portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. The reaction force received by the moving member side member when the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is the rotation axis of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member. Since it is acted along the line connecting between the driving means side member and the fastening portion arranged at the position facing the rotation axis of the driving means side member, the rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the driving means side member is increased. This is because it can be exhibited even more.

  A gaming machine comprising: a moving member rotatably formed around a first axis between a first position and a second position; and a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating the moving member. The moving member includes a rotating member that is rotated about the second shaft by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit, and a pin member that is disposed on the rotating member and is eccentrically located with respect to the second shaft. The member includes a groove-shaped guide groove portion that guides the pin member along the inner wall surface, and the guide groove portion is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and formed so as to receive the pin member. At least in the first position, the pin member is received in the recess, so that the moving member is mechanically held in the first position.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the rotating member is rotated about the second axis by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the pin member is arranged on the rotating member. Are guided along the guide groove of the moving member. Since the pin member is located eccentrically from the second axis of the rotating member, the moving member moves between the first position and the second position as the pin member is guided along the inner wall surface of the guide groove. It is rotated about one axis.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft, a moving member that is rotated about the first shaft, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the moving member, and the driving force of the driving unit. There is a gaming machine that rotates the moving member between the first position and the second position with the first axis as the center of rotation (for example, see JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, for example, when the first position is the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member arranged at the first position from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted by counteracting the driving force of the driving means against the gravity (weight of the moving member) (that is, the moving member is held at the first position). However, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position by receiving the pin member in the recess formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove. .. That is, even if the driving force of the driving unit is released, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position, and accordingly, the energy consumption of the driving unit can be suppressed.

  Further, since the pin member is received in the concave portion provided on the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion to mechanically hold the moving member at the first position, the moving member is mechanically moved to the first position only by the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. The degree of freedom in arranging the guide groove portion and the rotary member can be increased as compared with the structure in which the guide groove portion and the rotating member are held in a static manner.

  Note that the recess does not have to have a bottom and may penetrate. That is, it suffices to have inner wall surfaces that communicate with the guide groove portions and that face each other. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

  In the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, and the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being substantially orthogonal to.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is arranged in a direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, In addition, since the second member and the pin member are arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the connecting direction, the moving member rotates about the first shaft even when the driving force of the driving unit is released. Since the inner wall surface of the concave portion presses the pin member in the direction parallel to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, the rotation of the rotating member may be affected by the pressing of the pin member accompanying the rotation of the moving member. A rotation about the second axis cannot be formed. Accordingly, the holding of the moving member at the first position can be performed more firmly. Therefore, for example, even if the moving member is shaken by the player hitting or rocking the game machine, the moving member can be reliably held at the first position and moved downward in the gravity direction ( Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved and formed in an arc shape centered on the second axis of the rotating member when the moving member is arranged at the first position. Gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved in an arc shape with the second axis of the rotating member as the center when the moving member is arranged at the first position. Therefore, after the moving member is arranged at the first position, the pin member can be received in the recess while suppressing the posture of the moving member from changing.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the concave portion is an inner wall surface of the guide groove portion that opposes, and the pin member slides when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine D4, which is provided on the inner wall surface on the side where the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion that faces each other, and when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. Since the pin member is recessed in the inner wall surface on the sliding side, the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position without switching the driving direction of the driving means (rotating direction of the rotating member), and It is possible to hold the moving member in the first position by allowing the recess to receive the pin member.

  The gaming machine D5 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, characterized in that the recessed portion is provided on an inner wall surface of the guide groove portion facing each other, and the inner wall surface on a side closer to the first axis.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recessed portion is provided on the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion facing each other on the side closer to the first axis. The recess can be arranged in the dead space between the guide groove and the first shaft, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by disposing the concave portion on the side of the first shaft in this way, the distance between the first shaft and the pin member in the state where the moving member is arranged at the first position can be further shortened. With the rotation about the first axis, the force with which the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member can be reduced. Accordingly, the holding of the moving member at the first position can be performed more firmly.

  A moving member that is slidably movable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member; and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the gaming machine described above, a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member is provided, and the moving member is inserted into the slide holes of the base member. The transmitting means is arranged on the other surface side of the base member opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged, and the transmitting means moves the driving force of the driving means. A link member for transmitting to the member, the link member projecting to the other surface side of the base member through a slide hole of the base member; A gaming machine E1 characterized by being connected to.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the driving force of the driving unit is generated, the link member of the transmitting unit is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit, and the displacement of the link member is transmitted to the protrusion of the moving member. To be done. As a result, the protrusion of the moving member is moved along the slide hole, so that the moving member is slid.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is slidably movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a driving force that the driving unit generates are moved. There is a game machine provided with a transmission means for transmitting to a member, and transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the moving member by the transmitting means to slide the moving member (for example, refer to JP-A-2004-229885). .. In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding movement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of protrusions to be inserted into the slide holes. On the other hand, if the number of protrusions is increased, the number of parts for holding the protrusions (preventing slipping out of the slide hole) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing the cost while stabilizing the sliding movement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a link member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and the link member is opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged. And is connected to at least one protrusion of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that is disposed on the other side of the base member that is the side and is protruded to the other side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Therefore, at least one of the components for holding the protrusion can be used as the link member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions, enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, reduce the number of components for holding the protrusions, and reduce costs.

  In the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the link member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the drive means to the link member, and the base member has a connection hole formed as an opening. The driving means and the connecting member of the transmitting means are disposed on one surface side of the base member, and the connecting member is connected to the link member via a connecting hole of the base member. A gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the link member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the drive means to the link member, and the connection formed as an opening. Since the base member is provided with the hole, and the connecting member is connected to the link member through the connecting hole of the base member, it is possible to dispose the connecting member of the driving means and the transmitting means on the one surface side of the base member together with the moving member. it can. Thereby, the constituent members can be concentrated on one surface side of the base member (that is, the disposition of the constituent member on the other surface side of the base member can be suppressed), and as a result, the space can be efficiently used, It is possible to reduce the size as a whole.

  The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the link member of the transmission means is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, in the transmission means, the connection member is arranged on one surface side of the base member, and the link member is arranged on the other surface side of the base member, and these connection member and the link member are connected through the connection hole of the base member. Therefore, the drive force transmission path formed by the connecting member and the link member becomes long. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted, the connecting member and the link member may be deformed, and the transmission force may not be stably transmitted to the moving member. On the other hand, since the link member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, the rigidity of the connecting member and the link member as a whole is increased by utilizing the rigidity of the base member. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connecting member and the link member.

  Particularly, in the gaming machine E3, the link member among the connection member and the link member is rotatably supported on the base member, so that the base member is rotatably supported on the base member as compared with the case where the connection member is rotatably supported on the base member. The distance from the shaft supporting point to the projecting portion of the moving member can be shortened, and as a result, the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member can be stabilized with fewer shaft supporting points.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is vertical, and the moving member is arranged along the slide hole of the base member. The game machine E4 is characterized in that is slid in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is perpendicular to the base member. Since the moving member is slid in the vertical direction along the slide hole, the structure in which the link member is disposed on the other surface side of the base member is effective, and the moving member can be stably slid. That is, when the base member is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is the vertical direction, the moving member is inclined forward in a direction away from the one surface side of the base member due to the action of gravity. Since the base member is interposed between the link member connected to the moving member and the moving member, the forward tilting posture of the moving member is regulated not only by the component for holding the protrusion but also by the link member. As a result, the moving member can be slid in a stable state.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the link member is connected to a protruding portion located at least above a center of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine E5, since the link member is connected to the projecting portion located at the upper side of at least the center of the moving member, the attitude of forward tilting toward the direction of separating from the one surface side of the base member by the action of gravity. With respect to the moving member, the forward tilting posture of the moving member can be effectively restricted by the link member, and as a result, the moving member can be slid in a more stable state.

  A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means has a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a tooth surface meshed with the pinion is arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane, and is horizontally displaced with rotation of the pinion. And a link member that has one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the moving member and is erected or tilted as the rack moves in the horizontal direction. The moving member is arranged in a raised position and the moving member is arranged in a lowered position by tilting the link member. At the rising position of the moving member, the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is the rack. A gaming machine F1 located in a plane orthogonal to the tooth surface and the moving direction of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the rack is displaced to the one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the link member is moved along with the displacement of the rack to the one side in the horizontal direction. When the rack is tilted and the link member is tilted, the moving member is moved downward (downward) toward the lower position, and when the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is moved to the other side in the horizontal direction. The link member is erected with the displacement to the side, and as the link member is erected, the moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the raised position.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force applied to the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member. There is a game machine in which the transmission means is formed by including a rack and pinion in a part of the transmission path of the driving force (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-065923). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the driving force of the driving means is opposed to the gravity (the weight of the moving member) to restrict the movement (lowering) of the moving member (that is, the moving member is held in the raised position). ), the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is high.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, at the rising position of the moving member, the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is located in the planes orthogonal to the tooth flanks of the rack and the moving direction of the rack. As a force component acting on the rack from the link member, it is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction of moving the rack in the horizontal direction. Accordingly, even if the driving force of the drive unit is released, the moving member can be held at the raised position, and as a result, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1, a pinion and a rack of the transmission means include a base member rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and a link member, and the link member includes The base members are arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base members are provided between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, and the pair of links are provided. A gaming machine F2, which is provided with an interposition portion that is formed so as to be capable of abutting on the facing surface of the member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, the gaming machine F2 is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members and also the facing surfaces of the pair of link members. Since the base member is provided with the interposition portion formed so as to be able to contact, the posture of the moving member can be stabilized in the raised position. That is, at the raised position, since the pair of link members are erected, it is difficult to maintain the posture thereof, and the posture of the moving member is likely to be unstable, and the interposition portion is provided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members. By doing so, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the pair of link members in the facing direction (that is, the moving direction of the rack) by the interposition portion. Accordingly, the pair of link members can be maintained in the upright state, and the posture of the moving member can be stabilized at the raised position.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a pinion and a rack of the transmission means are provided with a base member rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means is provided with at least a pair of the rack and the link member and the link member. Are arranged so as to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member has a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that one end sides of the pair of link members are respectively provided between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member is provided with a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. Therefore, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture. That is, since the pair of link members are arranged facing each other along the moving direction of the rack, the mutual displacement is canceled by the pair of link members arranged facing each other in the moving direction of the rack. You can fit and maintain that posture. On the other hand, since the moving member of the link member is offset with respect to the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack, the position of the center of gravity is likely to change due to the input of disturbance, and it is difficult to maintain its posture. However, since one end sides of the pair of link members are respectively interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions, a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack of the pair of link members is formed by the pair of facing wall portions. Can be regulated. With this, the postures of the pair of link members can be maintained and the moving member can be moved in a stable posture.

  In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member has a standing height that is increased as the moving member approaches the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, as the moving member approaches the rising position (that is, as the link member is erected), the standing height of the facing wall portion is increased (that is, one end of the link member with respect to the facing wall portion). Since the area facing the side becomes large), it is possible to stabilize the movement of the moving member while improving the appearance. That is, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the opposing wall portion from being impaired and to erect the link member by raising the standing height of the facing wall portion partially instead of raising it (that is, The more difficult it becomes to move the moving member in a stable posture, the more the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member by the facing wall portion can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to move the moving member in a stable posture while suppressing the deterioration of the appearance.

  In this case, in at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member, the portion where the standing height is increased is in a state where the moving member is arranged in the lowered position (that is, the link member is laid down). It is preferable that the height is set so that the other end of the link member (the side connected to the moving member) can face the link member. According to this configuration, the effect of maintaining the posture of the moving member arranged in the lowered position can be obtained at the same time by using the portion where the standing height is increased in order to stabilize the posture of the moving member during movement. You can

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extension member extending in a direction orthogonal to a tooth surface of the rack is provided, and the moving member is slidably connected to the extension member and the extension member is provided. A guide portion that is guided along the extending direction of the member, wherein the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack; The gaming machine F5, wherein the moving member is arranged between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in a direction in which the moving member is offset.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extending member that extends in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and guides the guide portion of the moving member along the extending direction is provided. Since the extension member is disposed between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset, the effect of offsetting the moving member (that is, necessary for holding the moving member) is provided. It is possible to secure smooth movement of the moving member while exhibiting various energy consumption reductions).

  When a pair of link members is provided and an interposition portion is provided between the pair of link members facing each other, it is preferable to dispose the extension member inside the interposition portion. An extension member is arranged at the central portion where a pair of link members face each other, and the inside of the interposing portion that becomes a dead space is effectively used while enhancing the guide effect of the movement of the moving member, and the overall size is reduced. Because you can.

  A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission member has a tooth in at least a part thereof, and a first transmission member to which the moving member is coupled, and a second transmission member having a tooth engageable with the tooth of the first transmission member in at least a part thereof. A transmission member; and a connection member that is connected to the second transmission member and that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission member. The connection member is continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine G1, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second transmission member via the connecting member, the second transmission member is rotated, and the rotation of the second transmission member is meshed with each other's teeth. Is transmitted to the first transmission member via the, and the first transmission member is rotated. As a result, the moving member connected to the first transmission member moves as the first transmission member rotates.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member that is formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. A first transmission member having a transmission member for transmitting the transmission member, and a first transmission member meshed with the first transmission member; and a second transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the first transmission member through the meshing. There is a game machine in which a part of the driving means is formed by the transmission member (for example, see JP 2011-110376 A). In this case, the second transmitting member is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member is rotated, so that the moving member connected to the first transmitting member is moved. The first transmission member is moved along with the rotation. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member, the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move the moving member. When the moving member shakes while moving, the first transmitting member may be displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, and the meshing with the second transmitting member may be lost. Even if it is possible to avoid the disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the meshing area with the teeth of the second transmission member is reduced by the amount of displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member. When the surface pressure is reduced and the surface pressure is concentrated on a part of the tooth surface, the tooth may be unevenly worn and the durability may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member are formed in the connecting member, even when the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, The teeth of the first transmission member can be meshed with the teeth formed on the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Further, when the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, the meshing area between the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member and the connection member can be ensured, so that the deviation of each tooth It is possible to suppress wear and improve durability.

  The teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed in a part of the circumferential direction. The same applies to the following. The same applies to other gears.

  In the gaming machine G1, the connection member is erected from the axial end surface of the second transmission member along the axial direction of the second transmission member, and the tooth forming portion in which the teeth are formed, and the tooth formation thereof. A main body portion connected to the standing tip of the tooth portion, and the tooth forming portion has a surface opposite to the side on which the teeth are formed curved in an arc shape with the axis of the second transmission member as the center. A gaming machine G2, which is formed as a concave curved surface.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is erected from the axial end surface of the second transmitting member along the axial direction of the second transmitting member, Since the surface of the transmission member opposite to the side where the continuous teeth are formed is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape with the axis of the second transmission member as the center, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is Even when connecting to the axial end surface of the second transmission member, the area of the axial end surface of the second transmission member can be secured, and the fixing member mounted on the axial end surface of the second transmission member can be increased by that much. The diameter can be reduced. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from a resin material, the tooth forming portion is formed by forming the surface opposite to the surface on which the teeth are formed as a concave curved surface as described above. The thickness can be made uniform, and the moldability thereof can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member, the teeth are formed over the range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion, the gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over the range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion. It is possible to sufficiently secure the area to be covered and more reliably prevent the meshing of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from being disengaged. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from the resin material, the teeth are formed over the entire tooth forming portion as described above, so that the thickness of the tooth forming portion is reduced as a whole. It is possible to improve the moldability by making the temperature uniform.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a second moving member in which the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are arranged and is formed so as to be movable, and a guide for guiding the second moving member in a linear direction. A member, the transmission means includes a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a rack that is meshed with the pinion and displaced with rotation of the pinion, and the connecting member is A gaming machine G4, wherein one end is connected to the rack and the other end is connected to the second transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 includes a second moving member on which the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are arranged, and the second moving member is a guide member. The transmission means includes a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a rack which is engaged with the pinion and which is displaced by the rotation of the pinion. Since one end is connected and the other end is connected to the second transmission member, the connecting member is displaced by operating the rack and pinion by the driving force of the driving means, and the second member is moved according to the displacement of the connecting member. The rotation of the transmission member and the linear movement of the second moving member can be performed at the same time. That is, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member, the moving member can be linearly moved together with the second moving member while rotating the moving member. As a result, the staging effect can be enhanced. Further, since the transmission of the driving force of the drive means to the moving member and the transmission to the second moving member can be combined into one member (coupling member), the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine G4, the rack has a tooth surface which is meshed with the pinion arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member horizontally moves the rack. Is guided by the guide member in the vertical direction with the displacement in the direction, and when the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the connecting member causes the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion to have the first transmission. A gaming machine G5, which is arranged at a position corresponding to a tooth of a member.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the rack has the tooth surfaces meshed with the pinion arranged substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member moves in the horizontal direction of the rack. Since the pinion is guided by the guide member in the vertical direction with the displacement, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is moved to one side in the horizontal direction. The connecting member is tilted in accordance with the displacement of the rack, and the second moving member is moved downward (downward) toward the lower position as the connecting member is tilted, while the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion. Then, the connecting member is erected with the displacement of the rack to the other side in the horizontal direction, and as the connecting member is erected, the second moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the raised position.

  In this case, in the state in which the second moving member is arranged in the raised position, it is difficult to maintain the posture because the connecting member is erected, and the posture of the second moving member becomes unstable. As a result, the posture of the moving member arranged on the second moving member becomes more unstable. Therefore, the swing of the second moving member makes the swing of the moving member more noticeable, and the displacement of the first transmitting member accompanying the swing of the moving member becomes large. That is, in the state where the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the meshing between the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member is likely to be disengaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, the connecting member causes the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion to perform the first transmission when the second moving member is arranged in the raised position. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member, the displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member becomes large, and in the state where the meshing of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is most likely to be dislocated. The teeth formed in the tooth forming portion can be effectively utilized. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively prevent the meshing of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from being disengaged.

  In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the transmission means includes the rack, a connecting member whose one end is connected to the rack, a second transmitting member whose other end is connected to the rack, and teeth of the second transmitting member. A pair of first transmission members that are combined with each other and a pair of moving members that are connected to the first transmission member are provided, and the first transmission member and the second transmission member of one set are the first transmission of the other set. One set and the other set may be arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack in a state where they are meshed with the member and the second transmission member. According to this, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the moving member in one set and the moving member in the other set. Further, even if only the first transmission members or only the second transmission members are meshed with each other, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the moving member. Therefore, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are By engaging with each other, it is possible to increase the number of meshing points (meshing area) and to disperse the surface pressure of the tooth surface by that amount, so that the durability can be improved.

  A plurality of movable members that are formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to each of the plurality of moving members. A gaming machine in which the plurality of moving members are retreated to different retreat positions, and the plurality of moving members are coupled by being moved from different retreat positions and arranged at a reference position. The first moving member and the second moving member that are moved adjacent to each other at the reference position and the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. A third moving member that is in contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member from a direction substantially orthogonal to the third moving member, and the third moving member moves the first moving member and the second moving member at the reference position. By abutting on each of the members, a force in a direction to bring the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other is formed, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are combined. A gaming machine H1 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member by the transmitting means, so that the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member. The moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from different retracted positions to be arranged at the reference position.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of movable members that are movably formed, a drive unit that generates a drive force for moving each of the plurality of movable members, and a drive force of the drive unit. A plurality of moving members that are respectively moved to different retracted positions and are moved to different reference positions to be arranged at the reference position. There is a game machine to which is connected (for example, see JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, if the plurality of moving members are not properly joined at the reference position, the effect produced by joining the plurality of moving members is impaired. However, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is relatively easy to join a pair of symmetrical moving members face to face, but it is difficult to join three or more moving members.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged side by side at the reference position, and are substantially orthogonal to the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. When the third moving member moved from the direction toward the first moving member and the second moving member contacts the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively, the first moving member and the second moving member are moved. Since a force is generated in the direction of bringing them close to each other, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be appropriately combined. As a result, it is possible to ensure the effect produced by combining a plurality of moving members.

  In the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are respectively provided with a first contact portion and a second contact portion, and are brought into contact with the first contact portion and the second contact portion, respectively. The third moving member is provided with a third abutting portion, and the third abutting portion of the third moving member is a first abutting portion and a second abutting portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. By being brought into contact with each other, a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other is formed, and the first moving member and the second moving member face the third moving member. The external shape on the side is a concave shape that is formed by the first contact portion and the second contact portion and is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. The external shape of the third moving member facing the first moving member and the second moving member is formed by the third abutting portion and is the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. A gaming machine H2, which has a projecting shape in which the center projects correspondingly.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged adjacent to each other at the reference position, and the first contact member and the second contact member of the first moving member and the second moving member are opposed to each other. When the third contact portion of the third moving member is brought into contact, a force in a direction of bringing the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other is formed, whereby the first moving member and the second moving member. And the third moving member is coupled.

  In this case, the outer shape of the first moving member and the second moving member facing the third moving member (the combination of the first abutting portion and the second abutting portion) is a concave shape with the center recessed. On the other hand, in the third moving member, the appearance shape (third contact portion) on the side facing the first moving member and the second moving member is centered corresponding to the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member. Has a protruding shape, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are moved from the retracted position to the reference position, and are joined at the reference position to improve the effect of presentation. be able to.

  That is, as described above, the external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member facing each other are the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other. In the configuration in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has the protruding shape, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other when arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. When the player recalls a mode in which the third moving member enters between the members and pushes and expands the first moving member and the second moving member in the direction in which they are separated from each other, according to the gaming machine H2, the third moving member moves at the reference position. The member (third contact portion) is brought into contact with the first moving member and the second moving member (first contact portion and second contact portion), so that the first moving member and the second moving member are separated from each other. It is possible to couple the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member by forming a force in a direction to bring them close to each other. As a result, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the game machine H1 can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are supported by the base member by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, respectively, and the first moving member and the second moving member are at the reference position. In the state where they are arranged side by side, the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism may be arranged in a V shape in which the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member is narrower than the base member side. preferable. By setting the angle formed by the first contact portion and the second contact portion and the third contact portion with respect to the angle formed by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, the first movement is performed at the reference position. This is because it is possible to form a force in a direction in which the member and the second moving member are brought close to each other.

  In the gaming machine H1, the outer shape of the first moving member and the second moving member facing the third moving member is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. While the outer shape of the third moving member facing the first moving member and the second moving member corresponds to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, the third moving member has a concave shape. A gaming machine H3, which has a protruding shape with a center protruding.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the outer shape of the first moving member and the second moving member facing the third moving member is a concave shape in which the center is dented, The external shape of the third moving member facing the first moving member and the second moving member is a protruding shape in which the center is projected corresponding to the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by moving the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member from the retracted position to the reference position and connecting them at the reference position.

  That is, as described above, the external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member facing each other are the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other. In the configuration in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has the protruding shape, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other when arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. When the player recalls a mode in which the third moving member enters between the members and pushes and expands the first moving member and the second moving member in the direction in which they are separated from each other, according to the gaming machine H3, the third moving member moves at the reference position. By abutting the members, a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other is formed, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are coupled to each other. You can As a result, the operation can be performed in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the operation can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H3, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first contact surface and a second contact surface, and are in contact with the first contact surface and the second contact surface, respectively. The third moving member includes a third contact surface, and at least one of the third contact surface, the first contact surface, and the second contact surface has the third moving member at the reference position. It is formed as an inclined surface which becomes wider toward the advancing direction side when it is moved toward, and the third contact surface is contacted from both sides of the first contact surface and the second contact surface, whereby A gaming machine H4, wherein the first moving member and the second moving member are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, at least one of the third contact surface, the first contact surface, and the second contact surface has the third moving member directed toward the reference position. Is formed as an inclined surface that becomes wider toward the advancing direction side when moved by moving the third contact surface from both sides of the first contact surface and the second contact surface. Since the second moving member and the second moving member are displaced toward each other, the first moving member and the second moving member can be reliably displaced toward each other. Therefore, the structure that makes the first moving member and the second moving member movable can be simplified, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure can be increased.

  In the gaming machine H4, the first abutting surface and the second abutting surface are respectively arranged on the back side of the portions forming the external shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member, and the third abutting surface. The game machine H5, wherein the contact surface is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the external shape of the third moving member.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, the first contact surface and the second contact surface are arranged on the back side of the portions forming the external shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively. Since the third contact surface is provided on the back side of the portion that forms the external shape of the third moving member, the first contact surface, the second contact surface, and the third contact surface. Can be suppressed from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation.

  A movable member formed so as to be movable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In a gaming machine in which the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the second transmission member of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member is provided. A gaming machine I1 comprising a positioning means for positioning the meshing position at the predetermined phase.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member that is formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. There is a game machine that includes a transmission unit that transmits, and the transmission unit includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase (for example, (See Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-125092). According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, the rotation of one of the first transmission member and the other of the second transmission member is rotated, The moving member is moved by the other rotation. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the second transmission member is not meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the moving range of the moving member is displaced. Therefore, when assembling (engaging) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to position the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase and then assemble. The positioning work was complicated.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine I1 includes the positioning means for positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, so that the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled (tooth). In this case, the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be assembled by utilizing such positioning means. That is, when positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

  As described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed in a part of the circumferential direction.

  In the gaming machine I1, a first transmission member and a second transmission member include a base member rotatably supported, and the positioning means includes a first base positioning portion and a second base positioning portion formed on the base member. And a first transmission member positioning portion and a second transmission member positioning portion formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, at positions corresponding to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. A gaming machine I2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed on the base member, and the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are supported. Since the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, at the position to be set, the first transmission member positioning portion is made to coincide with the first base positioning portion, and By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while aligning the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the second transmission member is brought into a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. Can be positioned. As a result, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

  In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion and the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed as a through hole, such one penetration The positioning work for positioning the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member is further simplified by inserting the jig into the hole and abutting (or inserting) the tip of the inserted jig to the other. It can be done accurately and accurately.

  In the gaming machine I2, the base member includes a first shaft and a second shaft that are provided so as to project toward the front surface of the base member and are inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first base positioning is performed. And the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, a gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2, in the case where the base member includes the first shaft and the second shaft that are projected from the front surface of the base member and are inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are positioned while the second transmission member is positioned in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. When the member is assembled to the base member, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved.

  That is, according to the gaming machine I3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted from the back surface of the base member into the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. With this, the jig can be projected from the front surface of the base member together with the first shaft and the second shaft. Thereby, at the same time as the work of assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member from the front surface of the base member to the first shaft and the second shaft, respectively, the tip of the jig is moved to the first transmission member and the second transmission member. It is possible to perform a positioning operation of abutting (or inserting) the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion. As a result, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is made up of a pair of members that coaxially overlap each other in the axial direction, and the first transmission member positioning portions are formed as through holes at positions corresponding to each other of the pair of members. A gaming machine I4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is made up of a pair of members that coaxially overlap each other in the axial direction, and the first transmission member is provided at a position corresponding to each other of the pair of members. Since the positioning portions are respectively formed as the through holes, the positioning work of the pair of gears can be performed at the same time, and the workability of the positioning work can be improved accordingly. Further, since the positioning work of the pair of gears can be performed using a common jig, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to connect the pair of gears to each other, the pair of gears can be rotatably supported on the common shaft so as to be relatively rotatable. The second transmission member may have the same configuration.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member includes a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped with each other in the axial direction, and the pair of members includes a protruding portion protruding from one member and the protruding portion. And a recess formed in the other member for receiving, and the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in a member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members. Gaming machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member includes a pair of members that coaxially overlap each other in the axial direction, and a member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members. Since the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in the second transmission member positioning portion, the member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members can be positioned in a predetermined phase by using the second transmission member positioning portion. .. In this case, the pair of members can position the pair of members in a predetermined phase by receiving the protrusion of one member in the recess of the other member, and cannot relatively rotate (that is, in synchronization with each other). (Rotatable) can be pivotally supported on a common shaft. In particular, since the protrusions of the pair of members are received and fitted in the recesses, the rigidity as a whole can be increased accordingly.

  The concave portion does not need to have a bottom, and may be formed as a through hole. That is, it is sufficient for the recess to be formed so as to be able to receive the connecting projection and be positioned in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) when the pair of members are coaxially stacked.

  A game having a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and an out opening for discharging a game ball that has not flown into the plurality of winning openings and has flowed out of the game area. In the machine, the first winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is close to the lower edge of the game area or to the position where the game ball cannot pass through the lower edge of the game area. The first outlet, which is disposed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, is provided on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, and the first outlet. A gaming machine J1 comprising: a second out opening arranged on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to a winning opening.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning holes arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and a game ball that has flowed without winning the winning holes into the plurality of winning holes. There is a gaming machine provided with an outlet that is discharged from (for example, see JP 2012-143268 A). In recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device in order to enhance the effect. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered downward in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, the position of the winning opening also needs to be lowered accordingly. However, if the position of the winning opening falls too downward, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the gaming ball to flow down below the winning opening (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). That is, the game ball that has not flown into the winning opening and flows down cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning opening downward, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device cannot be made sufficiently large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the out-out port is a first out-out port which is arranged on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to a first award-winning port of the plurality of award-winning ports, and Since the second outlet is arranged on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning opening, the first winning opening is not placed in the first winning opening and is located on the one side in the width direction than the first winning opening. The game ball that has flowed down can be discharged from the game area by the first outlet, while the game ball that has flowed to the other side in the width direction than the first winning port without being awarded to the first winning port is the second. It can be discharged from the game area by the outlet. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning opening (lower edge of the game area, for example, between the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot pass through between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device. Can be upsized.

  In the gaming machine J1, a game board having a game area in which a game area is formed on the front side is light-transmissive, which is provided with an effect member that performs an effect associated with winning a game ball into a second prize hole of the plurality of prize holes. Made of an elastic material, the effect member is arranged on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second winning port, and the second winning port and the effect member are used as the first winning port. On the other hand, a gaming machine J2 which is arranged on one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, it is provided with an effect member for effecting an effect associated with winning a game ball into the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Since the game board is made of a light-transmissive material and is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the game board, the player can see the scene where the game ball is won in the second winning opening. The effect by the effect member can be visually recognized at the same time behind, and the effect accompanying the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening can be effectively performed.

  In this case, the second winning opening and the effect member are arranged on the one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, and thus the positions of the second winning opening and the effect member. Can be lowered, and the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the liquid crystal display device can be upsized even when the effect member is provided.

  In other words, disposing the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening prevents the effect member from interfering with the liquid crystal display device, and thus hinders the size increase of the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, by arranging the first out opening and the second out opening on one side in the width direction and on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, Not only can the position of the first winning opening be lowered, but the degree of freedom of the arrangement position of the first winning opening on the one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area can be secured, so that It is possible to secure a space for disposing the second winning opening and the effect members. As a result, according to the gaming machine J2, a layout in which the effect members are disposed on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second winning opening. Became possible.

  In the gaming machine J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the second winning opening is arranged substantially in the center of the gaming area in the width direction.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2, the second winning port is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction of the gaming area. Therefore, the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased and the gaming area can be limited. By effectively utilizing the space provided, it is possible to secure a wider space for disposing the effect member. That is, with such a layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the effect member. In addition, by arranging the second winning port in the approximate center of the game area in the width direction, it is possible to lengthen the flow path of the game ball to the second winning port. As a result, it is possible to enhance the playability for winning the game ball in the second winning opening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the effect produced by the effect member that accompanies the winning in the second winning opening.

  In the gaming machine J2 or J3, a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board is provided, and the second effect member is arranged at a position where at least a part of the second effect member overlaps with the effect member. A gaming machine J4, which is characterized by being installed.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board is provided, and the second effect member is at least one in front view. Since the part is arranged at a position overlapping the effect member, when the game board is made of a light-transmissive material, the player can visually recognize only the necessary part of the second effect member and effect the other part. It is possible to shield the player from the member. Thereby, the second effect member does not need to be designed on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom of design can be improved.

  The gaming machine J5 according to any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, wherein the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable about the second winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable around the second winning opening, and thus surrounds the second winning opening. It is possible to perform the effect in the entire area, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect associated with the winning of the second winning opening.

  In this case, the second prize hole needs to be arranged at a position where a space for letting the game ball flow down can be secured both above and below the second prize hole, and the game area of the second prize hole is in the game area. Since the first winning port is arranged at one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction and below the game area, the effect member is formed in a circle centered on the second winning port. Thus, the space that can be secured around the second winning opening can be utilized most effectively, and as a result, the area of the effect member can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an actuation port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K3, which is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and game balls that have not flown into the plurality of winning openings and flow down from the game area. There is a game machine provided with an outlet (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-143268 A).
In recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device in order to enhance the effect.
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered downward in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, the position of the winning opening also needs to be lowered accordingly. However, if the position of the winning opening falls too downward, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the gaming ball to flow down below the winning opening. That is, the game ball that has not flown into the winning opening and flows down cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning opening downward, and as a result, there is a problem that the liquid crystal display device cannot be made sufficiently large.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the size of a liquid crystal display device.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and the plurality of winning openings flowed without winning. An outlet that discharges the game ball from the game area, and a first prize hole of the plurality of prize holes is configured to prevent the game ball from passing between the lower edge of the game area. Is arranged so as to be close to the lower edge of the game area or in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the out opening is on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening. It is provided with a first outlet that is provided and a second outlet that is provided on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, and is provided with an effect member for performing an effect associated with the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. The game board on which the game area is formed is made of a light-transmissive material, and the effect member is arranged on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second winning port, and the second The winning port and the effect member are arranged on one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in which the second winning opening is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction of the gaming area.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the out-out port includes the first out-out port which is arranged on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first award-winning port of the plurality of award-winning ports, Since the second winning opening is provided on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, the first winning opening is not won and the one side in the width direction than the first winning opening. The game ball that has flowed down to the can be discharged from the game area by the first outlet, while the game ball that has flowed to the other side in the width direction than the first winning port without being awarded to the first winning port is It can be discharged from the game area by the 2 outlets. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning opening (between the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot pass through between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device. Can be upsized.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the production accompanying the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is performed. The effect member is provided, and since the effect member is arranged at the position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the game board made of a light-transmitting material, the game ball is won in the second winning opening. A player visually recognizing the scene can also visually recognize the effect by the effect member behind the scene, and effectively perform the effect accompanying the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening.
In this case, the second winning opening and the effect member are arranged on the one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, and thus the positions of the second winning opening and the effect member. Can be lowered, and the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the liquid crystal display device can be upsized even when the effect member is provided.
That is, arranging the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening interferes with the size increase of the liquid crystal display device because the effect member interferes with the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, by arranging the first out opening and the second out opening on one side in the width direction and on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, Not only can the position of the first winning opening be lowered, but also the degree of freedom of the arrangement position of the first winning opening on the one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction can be secured. It is possible to secure a space for disposing the second winning opening and the effect member, and as a result, according to the technical idea 2, the effect member is disposed on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second winning opening. Layout became possible.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the second winning port is arranged in the approximate center in the width direction of the gaming area. It is possible to secure a wider space for disposing the effect members by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game area while increasing the size. That is, with such a layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the effect member. In addition, by arranging the second winning port in the approximate center of the game area in the width direction, it is possible to lengthen the flow path of the game ball to the second winning port. As a result, it is possible to enhance the playability for winning the game ball in the second winning opening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the effect produced by the effect member that accompanies the winning in the second winning opening.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 Game board 64 1st prize hole (2nd prize hole)
71 1st Out Exit (Out Exit)
72 Second Out Exit (Out Exit)
81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
300 Rotation motion unit (effect member)
410 Mounting base (part of base member)
410a Positioning hole (first base positioning part)
410b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
421 Back case body (part of base member)
421a Positioning hole (first base positioning part)
421b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
426 First shaft 427 Second shaft 430 Drive motor (drive means)
451 Opening/Closing First Gear (Part of Transmission Means, First Transmission Member, Second Transmission Member)
451d Connection protrusion (positioning means, protrusion)
451e Positioning hole (positioning means, first transmission member positioning portion)
452 Opening/closing second gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member)
452d Connection protrusion (pin portion)
452e Positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning portion)
461 rotating first gear (a part of transmitting means, driving means side member, first transmitting member, second transmitting member)
461a1 Cylindrical surface (part of non-forming part)
461d Connection hole (positioning means, recess)
462 rotating second gear (a part of transmitting means, moving member side member, first transmitting member, second transmitting member)
462a1 non-formed surface (a part of non-formed portion)
462d Connection protrusion (fastened part)
462e Positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning portion)
471 Rear arm body (part of the first moving member or the second moving member)
472 front arm body (a part of the first moving member or the second moving member)
481c Connection groove (connection groove part)
491, 492 Operation member (moving member, first moving member, second moving member)
510 substrate member (base member)
511 Guide groove (slide hole)
522 Drive motor (drive means)
524 crank gear (a part of transmission means)
525 Connecting rod (part of transmission means)
526 Connection shaft (part of transmission means, connection member)
530 Slide mechanism part (moving member)
531c Insertion shaft (projection part)
539 First coupling member (part of moving member, third moving member)
539e Lower surface (third contact portion, third contact surface)
541 First Link Member (Part of Transmission Means, Link Member)
600 Second combined operation unit (second effect member)
621 Inner link member (part of transmission means)
622 Outer link member (part of transmission means)
630 Second coupling member (part of moving member, first moving member, and second moving member)
630a Upper surface (first contact portion, second contact portion, first contact surface, second contact surface)
630b Opposing surface (contact surface)
640 Drive motor (drive means)
650a Second special winning opening (first winning opening)
700 ring motion unit (second effect member)
710 Intermediate case body (part of base member)
711a Front (opposing wall)
713a Front (opposing wall)
720 Rear case body (part of base member)
730 Front case body (part of base member)
731a Rear surface (opposing wall)
732 Pillar part (intermediate part)
733 Guide rod (extension member, part of guide member)
740 Drive motor (drive means)
761 Pinion gear (part of transmission means, pinion)
762 rack (part of transmission means)
770 link member (part of transmission means, connecting member)
771 Body 773 Projecting wall (part of connecting member, tooth forming part)
774 Gear part (second transmission member)
774b Teeth 780 Lifting base body (moving member, part of second moving member)
784 Guided part (guide part, part of guide member)
790 Ring forming member (moving member)
792 Gear portion (first transmission member)
811 axis (1st axis)
820 Arm member (moving member)
822a First groove (guide groove portion)
822b Second groove (recess)
830 Drive motor (drive means)
831 Drive axis (second axis)
832 Drive arm (rotating member)
833 Projection pin (pin member)

Claims (3)

A game having a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and an out opening for discharging a game ball that has not flown into the plurality of winning openings and has flowed out of the game area. In the machine
The first winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is close to the lower edge of the game area or close to the lower edge of the game area to a position where the game ball cannot pass through between the lower edge of the game area. Arranged in contact with the lower edge,
The first outlet is provided on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, and the other outlet is provided on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening. A second out port provided, and a gaming machine. A second member of the plurality of winning openings, and an effect member for performing an effect associated with winning a game ball into the second winning opening,
The game board on which the game area is formed on the front side is made of a light-transmissive material, and the effect member is arranged on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second winning opening, and 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein two winning openings and effect members are arranged on one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening.   The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the second winning opening is arranged substantially in the center of the game area in the width direction.

Images